


t 


f 




I 


I 


I 


I 






. . 


- \ 






V, • 


‘ J 


■ tv- 










•■'•''' V. '»^'''' ^ w •-* '* 

.y ■ tvi ^ 


















‘"i .* 


* Ch 





♦ '■'j t 


>- - - s.- 




. - ■ >*;'% ’■fc^'fT.' 








4l^,. 




* ' . H vV ■«'^ ^/ ’■ ' .’«'i?^ 4 • = 


«. » 


' '■ fef: ; ■■ ; • 

• r 1 L .Vf iAXL4UninAi&. . * ' ^ 


'•1 


• » 




' «. 




Y 


.•" «,>*•< />c 

>.i'.‘-vr* - /:. 

' -1 « . ,\ - 


.1 


-. « ) 





' I. ’ 

v’.-s ■*'i'v 


». • 


Vi 


,V»‘ I 

•f 


V# 


It* 


* ‘ \yih’ 


'-.V. 


, f 









■-*' .'i^ ''i^''^’*’V.'' •''■■•• ■ 

•- vf.v^ '* vvv •>'/* '^T 


iV*. 




^r'.: 




4i 




i V , ^ { f t’ .. tf J-f U I . ^’'•'•^ 'VVl>'j ',* ^'r-p 

4<s ixwni' <• • J r ' . ' ri-^r\-t'' •^• : S 

■ ■. • V 


\ ■ 


. &A 








-.V. »< 


4 ’I' 


'• •» .* 




• 1* 




\. 


\ . 




1, 


I * * • -' 

• I . • <* « 


AJ 


B * 


‘A -•' V 


r- 





iV 


» » 


• f .} *■ '. * 1 ' 

•'■ n' - •.' 

?• .‘ .7» 








tl\. 


•t , 




»a 


I 

:A. 


■n 


i-i' 

1 41^ ^ ^ 

B ' ^ tt 








/< 


n-r 


1 1 1 


1 




• » 


:• I T 
j/ * w 


•i 


% 

y 


y > Vk\ 





^•A' 





Sit;?' 


u-i 


C; 


:>fn 



■ v"- 










s;; 


t *• ‘ 


.1 




''fi'i-. 


t. 




*X I 


• 1 




•>v 




t *1* 



» f ■ 




■V fc, 



v:*?-. 



'. f •• 


• ' 1 . 


mx 


• >\' 


»•. 


‘. V P 


^ . k 


M> 






I 


.r>: 


• .Jv,.,«S 






o.l 


J' 


1^' 








N • * * V A 








J • Cr 


•’f 

a '*. 




■>. I ', t ».. 1 . 

■ ■ -'.Y- •* 


,.A 


. I 


*♦ ': :■ V > • 


•• 





•V-: 


J.,?' ^ 



! -I* » f . " 
; ^ 



/- 


I# ♦ 


• 1 r 



4 »* 






# • 


. 4 




* * m I^' ikt 

. 7 V 

A t. 


.• ♦ 











• 4 _ t » • I ' 



' .>*■ 




* I 





• ■ I.:*' '•■■■• 





-'• JAi *;•» V > • 

, I > •! I _»• /i* • • ■ . '• 1 I 







.>i-\ 




'i\;v 

i 4 W * ■ '■ ■’ ■- ■ 


‘ - ' few 

'' , V.' ."'I 

‘ *: ■ : ■• 

■ ' ' ■ / i‘ '"*• v’r ■' 

. '■ . ■* . :‘i KMt 


* '■ ►'— 4 


yft 


»- , .] 


'' ■ ,v 


i I • 


’i'-i 


* 

ii 

V 



\ ^ •' 

'■'r ' 


Tv; 

't, '•) „ , 




\ • ^’ 1 ? • 

■>.<» >V !,. i.V t< 

,!. _4 y , 


» » 

f *- ' 


u 

.‘».V 


t . I 


' * A 

• . . ’ ( • • • 

kS j. • • < ■ 


’ ' W '• I '■■ • /■ '" ■ '•ff'i . . - It 


:. ' »• i '■\' -i-' 

/ < 



v.y^i •£ 

'TRJ 



• « . Jl A »D 

l .», >,, X f 

' ' < ' 

' ’ ' ' I ' 


, I ^r., -s, 


V*' "'a.' ri,/’ 

^ ' ■ V'm. 

‘ *• 

.• • '■ \ 'r^’t 

f ' ■ 


19 > ■ ■ 

^.V '^4 • : • 






{ •• 


I,.'. ./•■'«< , ' £ 


t . ' 


V.' - -• 

V 

•• ^. 



^ ■ 1 

« .« * 


? .■* • 

1 * 


* y 

"'f'. 


& 4 % 'V * ;{-?• i' ■ -'" Wfe 1 





'■' V ■ 

* %•. / 1 


. \' ^ 




■■ k. V •*, • •^ ■ ■■* V . . y • V • 

'-.i- ',•■■'•-■»■’ ■' ' •' 

■•^f _ ■ '• • •? ^ .V 

EBqI '" '•'• ‘ ■ ‘ 


--ft'/vJ .' Ai;* VA:<v .y 




/ ■ • -v:, 'v: 

', .' if " tSv ,..,'';4 

,‘; .f- •' 4 V.i* •■ vVA'»ii22 


• ‘ *■ . Ji- *'4 I A. ' > L '!'. 

•v, - v V .•{\l'- 4 -^ 











,i> 





















f 




n i 


♦ 


\ 









.V 




/ ♦ 

I 


4 


0 




» 



I 




I 


« 

«| 


•» 






« 


» 







“THERE IS A PLAN ON FOOT TO MURDER, OR MAKE PRISONER, GEORGE 
, WASHINGTON,” SAID THAD GRAVELY. 


Frontis, 


Laughing Mart/,p. 15. 







THE CAPTURE 


OF 

THE LAUGHING MARY. 


A Story of Three New York Boys 
in 1776. 


As Set Down by Eliphalet Willett and Edited 

By JAMES OTIS. ^ 

• * 



With Eight Page Illustrations by J. Watson Davis. 


YORK: 

A. L. BURT, PUBLISHER. 



22 i ‘;>2 


Copyright, 1898, by A. L, Burt. 

THE CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 
By James Otis. 



TWO COPIES RECEIVED. 






CONTENTS 




CHAPTER I. page 

Young Patriots 1 

CHAPTER II. 

A Surprise 20 

CHAPTER III. 

The Laughing Mary 40 

CHAPTER IV. 

The First Independence Day 60 

CHAPTER V. 

Mutinous Conduct 80 

CHAPTER VI. 

Treachery 102 

CHAPTER VII. 

Frightened Traitors 122 

CHAPTER VIII. 

A Clever Trick 141 

CHAPTER IX. 

Turning the Tables 163 

CHAPTER X. 

Peleg Symonds 183 

CHAPTER XI. 

Marooning Mutineers 203 

CHAPTER XII. 

Past the Fleet 224 


iv 

CONTENTS. 

Brooklyn Heights. . . 

CHAPTER XHI. page 

A Night Attack 

CHAPTER XIV. 

Mysterious Orders. . . 

CHAPTER XV. 

286 

An Unequal Battle. . 

. CHAPTER XVI. 

At Dobb’s Ferry 

CHAPTER XVII. 

328 

Surrender 

CHAPTER XVIII. 

Scuttled 

CHAPTER XIX. 

Freedom 

CHAPTER XX. 


LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS. 


PAGE 


“There is a plan on foot to murder, or make prisoner, George 
Washington,” said Thad gravely 15 

Suddenly the sharp report of a musket rang out, followed by 

a cry of pain from one of the oarsmen 41 

“Halt there!” Thad shouted, when the man was five or six 

feet forward of the main hatch 169 

“Don’t move, but look on shore where stands that fellow with 

the scarlet shirt.” 241 

# 

I had a belaying-pin, and with it beat off a fellow with a 
knife 269 

“That’s the way to do it, lads, you made the splinters fiy 
then,” cried Peleg 319 

I turned my head to look back at the little schooner; she sank 

slowly, on an even keel 384 

“We are hungry, sir, and beg you to give us food,” said 
Thad 396 


■ ■( 






/S?' 


.rt% . 


.1- 


mp'::* ‘ ttusi: 


r?i ■ • ** ' 


“v. 


S' 


»ai^' 


■ i 

i2 ' ' .&• 


i\ 




f 




* • f I 
¥•^1 




#'-* 




31?^ 


* <-.. 


i 


X*. - 


’ ’i •■■■• *V^ ■* ■■' 

(f^OlHyi - '^~ 


• I 


. r* . t r^ I 




D 




*)► 


■'I ■ - • 








:<<?;... -V’ Y'.' ;,*• ';• ,»'?■'? 

‘■f* > ' - -J'-Vjas,;' -y; 

•*.' ■^‘yiWSp^ " '* 


» • '' iTi 




,,,-r *^-K» 




*• ' f 

k k . 


>• m 


>Si 


Kc 








- f 




• •* 


- ^ 


W- 


?3 


A, 

i_. 1* 


4% ' > 


^ , • ^'* ^ ^ ^ 
I ^ 1# 


; ^5? 


h-'- 


1 








> « 


— ■ -• A*.l 

* ■ * j’-'-:-_-^»*: 




-.1* 




lo* 


I* 




V9KL. ^ . w A ^ J ^ 


' V : 


'* 


.#> 4 : 


_H.--- ‘^■- i 

i3i"-r •■' U: 'r'^7^' -^i'' . ' 


^ ■| ^ 


- ‘5w,. , 


m ^ 




S I'ltfkf 


CAPTURE OF THE LADGHING MART. 


CHAPTER I. 

YOUNG P ATEIOTS . 

We are so besieged by the snow here in 
Morristown — and by “we,” of course, I mean 
the American army — that there is but little 
to occupy our time save the routine of camp 
duty. The two comrades who shared with 
me the excitement, and took upon them- 
selves the most dangerous portion of the 
enterprise, when we were so fortunate as to 
have rendered a signal service to the Amer- 
ican people, have decided that in no better 
way can these winter days be spent than by 
writing down all which has happened to us 
since the hour we were minded to take up 
arms against the king. 

Although it is but right that I should call 


2 


CAPTURE OP THE LAUGHING MARY. 


every member of this army a comrade, in 
using the term it seems impossible to apply 
it with true meaning to any other than those 
two friends in whose company I have been 
almost constantly, since it was our rare good 
fortune to have had no mean share in the un- 
earthing of the plot which was formed 
against General Washington, just before the 
colonists refused longer to call themselves 
Englishmen and became Americans. 

It would be useless to repeat in this record 
those events which took place in the colony 
of Massachusetts up to the day when the 
town of Boston was evacuated by the English 
forces, and when we in New York believed 
Howe would at once attack our city, for so 
short a time has elapsed that the stirring in- 
cidents are fresh in the minds of all. 

During the year 1775 none of us — meaning 
my two comrades and myself — had thought 
of becoming soldiers, although we were 
nearly of age* when we could do so lawfully; 
but after General Israel Putnam arrived with 
his forces in New York on the fourth of last 
April, to make his headquarters in the man- 
sion owned by Captain Kennedy of the 



" HE FIRST PERSON HE MET WAS CAPTAIN YEO 






CAPTURE OP THE LAUGHING MARY. 


3 


British army, at No. 1 Broadway, we began to 
realize there was a part for us to play. 

I am telling the story very badly in not 
having first set down the names of my com- 
rades, than whom to-day no boys can be 
found in all the colonies more ready to en- 
dure privation or incur danger. 

Sam Antill deserves the first place in this 
record because of what he has done already, 
and even though it be that his mother is first 
cousin to John Antill the Koyalist, who is — 
or was at the time this record should begin — 
postmaster of New York, no one can accuse 
him ever so lightly of other than loyal 
thoughts to the cause. 

Then comes Thaddeus Burr, namesake of 
him of Connecticut, but of no kin, 

and there is in my mind a great doubt even 
now whether Thad or Sam should take the 
first place in this record, for, with nothing 
but friendship in their minds for the other, 
each strives constantly to outstrip his friend 
in brave deeds. 

As for myself, if I deserve ever so slight a 
place in this story, it is only because Colonel 
Marinus Willett is my uncle, and he it was. 


4 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


SO my mother has often said, who gave to me 
the name of Eliphalet. 

This seems but a lame beginning to what 
should be a brave story, and although Sam 
will not admit it, I am certain he was disap- 
pointed in my attempt when, a few moments 
ago, he read what had been written. 

However, since they both have decided I 
shall be the one to make up this record, my 
shortcomings must not be set down against 
me, because, having resolved to devote all 
my mind to becoming a soldier, I cannot be 
expected to write as would those whose 
trade it is to wield a pen. 

As I have said before, it was not until Gen- 
eral Israel Putnam came to New York that 
any of us three boys had decided to become 
soldiers. 

While the British were shut up in Boston it 
was as if we of New York might be allowed to 
go our own way, and not until January, when 
General Charles Lee began to fortify the 
city, did it appear that any great amount of 
fighting would fall to our share in the strug- 
gle with his majesty. 

Then it was that the Tories were called 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


5 


upon to take the oath of allegiance ; the city 
was intrenched, and we began to understand 
that something more than the ordinary street 
brawls with which we had been treated 
would be visited upon us. 

We three were on Broad Street when the 
Sons of Liberty prevented the Royal Irish 
Regiment from carrying away arms belong- 
ing to the city, when the troops went to Bos- 
ton, and at that time the British forces made 
so little resistance to Colonel Willett’s — my 
uncle’s — demand, that it seemed to us boys 
as if these veteran soldiers of the king were 
afraid of the Americans. 

Perhaps it was this which prevented us 
from realizing how near to our doors the 
bloody business of war was ; but when Gen- 
eral Putnam arrived, and a few days later 
General Washington himself came, making 
his headquarters at the Richmond Hill 
House ; when volunteers were not only 
called for but sought after, we talked the 
matter over among ourselves and decided 
that although I, who had but then turned fif- 
teen years, was over-young for a soldier, my 
stature was such that the recruiting officer 


6 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


would have but little hesitancy about per- 
mitting me to sign the rolls, therefore all 
would enter the army. 

My mother, who lived on Ann Street near 
William, when I talked with her regarding 
the course I would pursue, had not refused 
her permission, although she did not give it; 
Sam’s father was already among the forces 
at Cambridge, and therefore he could by 
right enlist; while Thad, having neither 
father nor mother, was at liberty to do as he 
chose. 

When we had come to this decision Lord 
Howe’s fleet was expected in the harbor at 
any hour, and it had been said that his lord- 
ship left Halifax with the intention of at 
once capturing New York. 

When he did arrive, two weeks after the 
commander-in-chief entered the city, he 
landed at Staten Island without any effort 
having been made to put an obstacle in his 
way, because of the fact that our troops 
were so dispersed at King’s Bridge, Paulus 
Hook, Governor’s Island, and Brooklyn 
Heights that there were not American sol- 
diers enough to make any opposition. 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


7 


Although having determined we would 
enter the army, none of us had taken any 
steps in the matter, for it was rumored — and 
as is well known very many believed — that 
Lord Howe would make in the king’s name 
such a proposition to us of the colonies as 
would prevent a war, even though much 
blood had already been spilled. 

It was on the morning of the third day 
after Governor Try on — afraid that his own 
precious body was in danger — had left the 
city and taken refuge on the Duchess of Gor- 
don — one of Lord Howe’s ships — that Thad, 
Sam and I, having just come from Bowling 
Green, where we had loitered to hear the 
news of the day, stopped on the corner of 
Dock Street at White Hall Slip, to talk as we 
had for at least an hundred times before, of 
what we ought to do, but yet lacked the 
heart while it was possible further bloodshed 
rnight be averted. 

As we stood there a great crowd came 
through Pearl Street, and in their midst two 
negroes who were in the custody of the 
watch. 

It was not necessary to ask why these men 


8 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


had been apprehended, for the cries of those 
around soon told that they were accused of 
having carried news from the city to Gov- 
ernor Try on, and save for the vigilance of 
those who had the Africans ir xiarge, the 
mob would have handled them most 
roughly. 

Until this moment it haci not seemed possi- 
ble to me any person, unless it might be one 
whose very life was the stake, would will- 
ingly betray the cause which had been so well 
begun by those of Massachusetts, and even 
though these fellows’ skins were dark their 
crime was not the less great, for it appeared 
to me to be the interest of the bonded as 
well as the free that the yoke of oppression 
which had been borne so long and so heavily 
should be lifted. 

“How can it be that those negroes could 
have learned anything which would be of im- 
portance to Governor Try on?” Thad said as 
if asking of himself the question, and Sam 
replied promptly : 

“Most likely they are the servants of such 
as are loyal to the cause, and having learned 
something which the Royalist governor 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


9 


might wish to know, have carried him the 
information for the sake of reward.” 

Just at that moment it did not seem as if I 
had more concern in what we had witnessed 
than any ", "rer in the city who desired the 
success of the American army ; but before 
we three parted on that day I began to real- 
ize for the first Ame that even boys might be 
able to do something of importance — some- 
thing which would win the approval and 
praise of the officers of our army. 

While the rabble surrounding the prisoners 
were passing us my comrades and myself 
had been forced to stand close against the 
building on the inside of the walk, and were 
yet in that position when, as if following the 
mob and not wishing such fact should be 
known, two white men and a negro passed 
us slowly as they indulged in a spirited 
conversation, speaking so loudly that we 
could without difficulty overhear the words. 

“We must learn how much of the plan 
these fellows know,” one of the white men 
said emphatically. “I cannot believe they 
were intrusted with any important portion 
of the work ; but yet the fact that they went 


10 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


to the governor on this morning would seem 
to prove them in the confidence of our 
people.” 

“Whether they are or not can hardly ben- 
efit you, for we do not seem likely to get 
speech with them,” his companion replied, 
and the first speaker said angrily : 

“It must be done in some way.” 

“But how?” 

“We must deliver Ham up,” and the man 
nodded toward the black member of the 
party, “on the charge of being a suspicious 
person, in the hope that he would be con- 
fined near them. I tell you. Parsons, this 
whole scheme may be defeated if these fel- 
lows should be brought to confess even so 
much as to who sent them, and it is more 
than likely every effort will be made to this 
latter end.” 

Thad, who ever had his wits about him and 
was quick to act upon impulse, motioned 
silently to Sam and I, after which he fol- 
lowed the three who were so concerned 
regarding the prisoners. 

I believed he was doing so out of curiosity, 
hoping to hear yet more of the conversation ; 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


11 


but if this had been the case he was disap- 
pointed, since it was not possible for us to 
follow very closely in the rear without our 
motives being suspected, and as we preceded 
the fast-gathering throngs of people in the 
street not only prevented us from eaves- 
dropping, but induced the three to speak in 
more guarded tones. . 

“What plan have you in your head, 
Thad?” Sam asked with a slight show of ir- 
ritation. “Surely there is no reason why we 
should join the rabble who are escorting the 
Africans.” 

“Hark you, Sam, the men just ahead of us 
spoke of some plan which might be ruined if 
the prisoners should be made to confess ever 
so little.” 

“Well, what has that to do with us?” 

“The Africans are charged with having 
carried news from the city to Governor 
Try on.” 

“Well?” 

“If they had gone to the frigate for 
nothing serious, why should there be such 
danger to these three whom we overheard? 
What can be ruined by their confession?” 


12 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


“Now you are asking riddles.” 

“Nevertheless it is one which may be 
solved, and, boys, who shall say we cannot 
serve the cause, even though we do not wear 
a uniform? What say you to the possibility 
of our discovering the plot intended to work 
mischief to our friends?” 

Sam laughed boisterously, and I foolishly 
followed his example, for at that moment 
Thad’s bearing, and the idea that we three 
should be able to discover anything of im- 
portance to the cause seemed ridiculous ; but 
before the sun rose again we looked at the 
matter in a far different light. 

Nothing daunted by our mirth Thad Burr 
pressed the three men as closely as he dared, 
and because of our derision no longer ap- 
peared to care whether we accompanied him 
or not. 

Just beyond the fish market the three en- 
tered a dram shop over against Martin’s 
warehouse, and Thad followed, Sam and I 
remaining outside, perplexed to know what 
course we should pursue. 

“Shall we wait for him?” I asked, half in 
jest, and instantly grew more sober-minded 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


13 


as I saw the look of gravity which had sud- 
denly come upon my comrade’s face. 

“Thad has a longer head than either you 
or I, ’Liphalet, and it stands us in hand to 
wait lest he should need assistance.” 

“Loitering on the streets in these troublous 
times is not a safe amusement.” 

“The watch will not come Jback this way 
for some time, and we are in no danger here 
at present.” 

“Why not follow Thad into the shop?” 

“Because he didn’t ask us.” 

“Yet he would have done so had we not 
made sport of his words.” 

“We will wait here,” Sam said in a tone so 
sharp I knew it would be folly to argue 
against it. 

And we did wait until I begged my com- 
rade to come away, for I was weary with 
much standing, and it was high time to 
present myself at home. 

“You may go if you choose; I shall stay 
till Thad comes out.” 

With that resolve Sam continued what 
seemed a useless vigil, and I could do no less 
than remain by his side. 


14 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY 


We had long since been forced to move 
some distance from the shop because of the 
many patrons v^ho entered or departed; but 
having kept our eyes fixed steadily upon the 
door, we knew beyond a question that Thad 
yet remained inside. 

It was long past the hour when I should 
have been at home that our comrade came 
out, and I was startled by the look upon his 
face. 

Without speaking, but looking at us in a 
way which we understood to mean that we 
should follow, he walked rapidly toward 
Ruger’s wharf, not slackening pace until he 
stood upon the very stringpiece, where there 
was no possibility that what we said could 
be overheard. 

“The negroes who were arrested had been 
sent by none other than his excellency the 
mayor of this city,” Thad said impressively, 
and I stared at him as if believing he had 
taken leave of his senses, for I could not 
understand by his words that he had dis- 
covered anything of a startling nature, as his 
voice and actions seemed to imply. “If the 
head of this city is in communication with such 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY 


15 


a Tory as Try on, what may not follow?” he 
asked gravely. “Yet* this is not all I learned 
in the dramshop. There is a plan on foot — 
what I know not; but certain it is that ar- 
rangements are being made by the Tories in 
New York to either murder or make prisoner 
of no less a personage than General Washing- 
ton himself, and the three to whom I have 
been listening are actively engaged in the 
work.” 

I still gazed at him like a simple, while 
Sam, with more ready wit, seized upon the 
import and cried excitedly : 

“Why did you leave them? You should 
have stayed until everything had been 
learned.” 

“So I would but that the time is passed 
when they can give any further information. 
The African, overcome by the effects of the 
rum in which he freely indulged, is asleep, 
and the white men are awaiting the coming of 
others in the conspiracy.” 

“Then they gave up the attempt to gain 
speech with those who were arrested?” 

“The plan was evidently abandoned before 
they reached the dram shop. Perhaps some 


16 CAPTURE OP THE LAUGHING MARY. 

friend was met as they walked up the street, 
who undertook that portion of the work. At 
all events, no mention was made of it from 
the time I entered, and now not a moment is 
to be lost. There is work to be done, and if 
it so chances we do it well, who shall say 
that instead of enlisting as privates, we may 
not receive commissions?” 

I was yet in the dark as to the meaning of 
it all, but understood that it was little less 
than ridiculous for three boys who knew 
nothing of the art of war to expect to be 
made officers, and so expressed myself, when 
Thad replied as if it was folly to consider the 
words I had spoken: 

“Of that we shall have ample- time to talk. 
Now we must act.” 

“In what way?” I asked irritably. “You 
and Sam seem to have decided that these three 
drunken men may be able to harm General 
Washington, surrounded as he is by his 
officers and his troops, and talk about acting 
without having first explained what may be 
done.” 

“Even though General Washington is sur- 
rounded by his troops, there are traitors even 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 17 

in the ranks, and mayhap more than one 
wears a sword. Wiser heads than yours or 
mine can best decide whether what I have 
heard be of importance, therefore, ’Liphalet, 
it is for you to go with all speed to your 
uncle. Colonel Willett; repeat to him what I 
have said ; tell him I will keep the men in 
sight if it so be he desires to see them, and 
that done yon shall come back to Dock Street, 
where Sam will be found.” 

It was in my mind that I would first go 
home and acquaint my mother with the busi- 
ness on hand, lest she be anxious because of 
my long delay; but Thad, as if reading my 
thoughts, said sharply: 

“There is to be no delay in this work, 
’Liphalet, even though your wise head may 
not believe it of importance. It must be 
done regardless of anything else, and rest 
you not a moment until after having had 
speech with Colonel Willett.” 

I realized at once that Thad Burr would 
not have spoken thus without believing he 
had good cause, and then suddenly came 
into my mind the thought that perhaps it 
might be possible we could render signal 


18 


CAPTUKE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


service to the cause, and straightway I was 
like one in a fever, being consumed with the 
desire to speak with Uncle Marinus. 

Running at full speed I went first to one 
place and then another, asking of every 
American soldier or officer whom I saw 
where the colonel might be found, and when 
it seemed as if I had spent hours upon the 
work, although my search had not lasted 
forty minutes, I halted, panting and breath- 
less, in front of General Putnam’s head- 
quarters just as my uncle emerged therefrom. 

My excitement was so great that for fully 
a moment it was impossible for me to tell a 
story which could be understood ; but when 
he finally realized all I would have made 
known, his face paled suddenly as if he had 
been stricken a mortal blow. 

Grasping my arm with such strength that I 
was forced to cry aloud from very pain, he 
asked, and the words seemed to come with 
difficulty from his lips : 

“Are you certain your comrade can have 
made no mistake, Eliphalet?” 

I told him it was Thad — Thad Burr — who 
followed the men, and he was a boy not 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


19 


given to sudden excitement — one who ever 
kept his wits about him, and who could not 
well be mistaken in what he heard. 

“And you say he is on Dock Street?” 

“The men were in a dramshop over against 
Martin’s warehouse beyond the fish market.” 

“Then get you back there, lad, and see to it 
that those three, drunken or sober, are not 
allowed to give you the slip. Remain with 
them even though the morning should come 
before you hear from me again, and at what- 
ever hazard to you. In due time I, or some 
one sent by me, will relieve you from the 
duty.” 

He gave me no time to question him; but 
turned suddenly and ran as a boy might run 
into General Putnam’s headquarters, while 
I, exultant now because of what Thad Burr 
had had the ready wit to do, turned to rejoin 
my comrades, thinking like the simple I 
always am that the work set us to do would 
be easy and unaccompanied by danger. 


20 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


CHAPTEE 11. 

A SURPRISE. 

While returning to the fish market, run- 
ning as rapidly as was possible, I forgot that 
I felt only derision when Thad first proposed 
to learn the business these strangers had in 
hand, and set down to my own credit a full 
share in what had already been done, thereby 
puffing myself up with pride, remembering 
not that such feelings go before a fall. 

My thoughts even went so far as to picture 
myself as able a soldier as my uncle had 
proven to be, and there was in my mind an 
idea that the slight part I had played must 
win rich recognition from those who were 
risking their lives in the cause of independ- 
ence. 

Then I met Sam Antill, who, standing on 
the corner of Dock Street, was awaiting my 
coming, and still swelling with pride I told 
him what my uncle had said, clothing the 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


21 


order in such words of my own as made it 
appear as if I myself was directing the course 
of affairs. 

Sam looked at me curiously a moment 
after I had ceased speaking, but made no 
reply, and his silence, together with the odd 
expression of his eyes, gave me an inkling of 
the foolish part I was trying to play. 

Realizing how simple I must appear, I re- 
peated Uncle Marinus’ words more soberly, 
and my comrade said, with what was very 
like a chuckle of satisfaction : 

“If there is any credit out of this affair, 
’Liphalet, we can have but little part in it. 
Thad has already shown himself more of a 
man than you or I will be in many years.” 

“You are right, Sam, and I knew it even 
while acting the fool. But when I saW how 
important my uncle deemed the information 
brought by me, it seemed as if already we 
had done very much for the cause.” 

“It may be we have, but all through Thad, 
which should not cause us to be envious, for 
a truer comrade never lived, and we shall do 
well ever to follow his counsel. Yet even 
now I cannot believe any serious danger 


22 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


menaces General Washington through such 
people as Thadhas been watching; but Colo- 
nel Willett has set us a task, and it must be 
performed. We are to go back to the dram- 
shop, and there wait till our comrade calls on 
us for further service.” 

Not only at that moment, but very many 
times since, has Sam Antill proven himself a 
lad of rare discretion, and in looking back 
upon the happenings of that day I am often- 
times at a loss to decide as to which of my 
two comrades should be given the greatest 
praise. 

However, thoughts of mine have little to do 
with the story I am trying to tell and suc- 
ceeding in so lamely, for all that we aided in 
doing during that week in June of ’76 has 
now become a matter of history, and it is not 
well a humble soldier like myself, who can 
claim but little credit for the part he has 
played during the dark days which have 
followed, should give voice to his opinion. 

Sam and I went back to the vicinity of the 
dramshop, and there waited with as little 
impatience as was possible fully half an 
hour before Thad showed himself. 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


23 


Then he came slowly out as if having no 
especial purpose, looked quickly around 
until seeing us, and asked when we had 
joined him : 

“Have you seen Colonel Willett?” 

I told of the part I had played in this queer 
business, and he said hurriedly: 

“It stands us three in hand to keep our 
wits with us, unless Colonel Willett comes or 
sends some one to take charge of the busi- 
ness. These fellows are about to depart, 
and we may not find it an easy matter to 
keep them in sight. They have been in con- 
versation with two men, one of whom wears 
the uniform of an American soldier, and the 
other, if I mistake not, is in attendance upon 
no less a person than his excellency the 
mayor. The negro, whom I thought to be so 
thoroughly overcome by the drams he has 
taken, is now fully alive to all that happens 
around him, and from what has been said I 
believe some move is contemplated as soon as 
it shall be dark. I have loitered around so 
long that there is danger of exciting their 
suspicions, therefore it is better one or both 
of you go in while I stay outside to watch 


24 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

for Colonel Willett. Note closely all they 
do, and try, so far as is possible without be- 
traying your purpose, to hear what they may 
say among themselves.” 

Distrusting my own ability to continue the 
work begun by Thad, I looked at Sam as if 
to intimate he was the one to perform the 
task ; but he was not minded to do so alone. 

“Go you with me, ’Liphalet. The best 
both of us can do will not equal Thad’s work, 
and I would he had thought it best to remain 
in attendance upon these fellows until your 
uncle or his messengers arrive.” 

Then, beckoning to me in a manner which 
was little less than a command, Sam entered 
the dramshop, I following close at his heels. 

The three men whom we were to watch 
were seated at a small table in one corner of 
the room, from whence could be had a full 
view of all who entered or left the place, and 
to approach so closely without causing sus- 
picion as to overhear any conversation they 
might indulge in seemed to me impossible. 

There were many patrons in the shop, each 
intent on his own and his neighbor’s busi- 
ness, but yet no one seemed to pay any par- 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


25 


ticular attention to the three in the corner 
who were conversing little, and watching in- 
tently everything around them. 

It seemed to me as if they must be able to 
discern by the expression on my face why I 
had come, and as if guilty of a crime, I 
partially concealed myself behind Sam. 

“Don’t act as if you had been caught steal- 
ing sheep,” he whispered. “No one is 
giving any heed to us, even though we are 
boys and in a place where we have no busi- 
ness. We shall have little trouble in staying 
as long as Thad may wish, but I can’t see 
that we are likely to be of any service.” 

It heartened me to hear him talking thus 
carelessly, and I looked around more at ease. 

Step by step Sam moved nearer the corner 
where were seated the two white men and 
the African ; but he must have understood as 
well as I that we could not approach within 
sound of their voices, save at a great risk of 
detection. 

I doubt not that he would have tried it, 
however much the possible danger, for Sam 
Antill has even more courage than I lack; 
but while we were yet some distance from 


26 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

those we had been enjoined to watch, the 
scene was changed. 

Two visitors entered, looked quickly 
around, and, seeing the three in the corner, 
went directly toward them. 

“That which we should hear is being said 
now,” Sam whispered when the men began 
talking earnestly, and at the same moment 
he advanced several paces as if unconscious 
of what he did. 

I followed his example, but before gaining 
his side the men arose suddenly and walked 
out of the shop at a rapid pace. 

For the moment I felt relieved, doubting 
not that Thad was on guard and would take 
up the work he began despite our derision ; 
but on gaining the street my heart sank, for 
our comrade was nowhere to be seen. 

“He did not think there was any chance 
the fellows would leave so soon, and has run 
home to explain to his cousin why he may be 
absent,” Sam whispered, quickening his 
pace lest in the fast-gathering darkness we 
should lose sight of those whom we had been 
ordered to follow. 

“What is to be done?” I asked like the 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


27 


simple that I was. “He cannot guess which 
way we have gone, and may not see us again 
till after much mischief has been done.” 

“It will be our fault if anything goes wrong 
now,” my comrade replied sharply. “We 
must continue the work, and try to carry it 
on as he would have done.” 

It was not seemly in me to give my fore- 
bodings words when he was so brave, and in 
silence I followed close by his side, feeling 
certain our efforts would be in vain. 

Those whom we would keep in view 
walked rapidly on until arriving at the meal 
market, when they turned sharply to the 
right toward the water. 

Here we encountered a throng of citizens, 
and it became necessary to close up on those 
we were pursuing lest we lose sight of them 
entirely, and in so doing I made the fatal 
blunder which so nearly thwarted our pur- 
pose. 

Hurrying forward through the press of 
people without due thought of caution, I 
ran full upon one of the three who had first 
entered the dramshop, and, turning, the man 
remembered my face. 


28 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


I would have stepped back, hoping to hide 
myself amid the throng, but that he sud- 
denly seized me by the collar with a grasp so 
firm that I was near to choking, and speak- 
ing not a word, forced me to walk by his side. 

“What have you here?” one of his friends 
asked as if in surprise when I was thus unex- 
pectedly brought in the midst of the party. 

“An eavesdropper if I mistake not; it is 
the same lad I saw at the dramshop, and he 
overran me in his eagerness.” 

I would have cried aloud for Sam, but my 
captor tightened his grasp as if reading the 
purpose in my face, and said in a tone so low 
that those who were passing could not have 
heard : 

“Make ever so little noise, and you are 
through with this world, for I shall wring 
your neck as I would a chicken’s!” 

There was no question in my mind but that 
he would carry out his threat to the letter, 
and now my terror was so great that I could 
not have cried out if I would. 

My legs bent under me, and the man 
dragged me along by the neck until it was as 
if death itself clutched me. 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


29 


One of the fellow’s companions began to 
speak about a boat which should have been 
seen, and he checked him suddenly by 
saying: 

“Not a word till we have disposed of this 
young cur ! The matter has gone so far that 
it is our lives against every one of his ilk 
who has an idea of our purpose.” 

“What will you do with him?” 

“Put a weight on his feet and drop him into 
the water.” 

“Here?” 

“Why not? There is no good reason why 
we should keep him with us many minutes.” 

“There are too many near who might see; 
better carry him down the bay, where he can 
be taken care of without trouble to us.” 

My captor did not reply, but I understood 
from the yet further tightening of his grasp 
that he would prefer to finish me offhand 
rather than be put to ever so slight an incon- 
venience. 

Indeed I had good cause to believe myself 
very near death. 

If it was true, and I did not doubt it now, 
that these men were plotting to kill or cap- 


30 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


ture General Washington, there could be no 
question they would let my life stand in 
their way, and, not knowing how much I had 
learned regarding their plans, must believe it 
necessary to put me past all power of doing 
them harm. 

To have cried out then, even had the villain 
loosened his grasp, would have been impos- 
sible, so great was the terror upon me. 

I knew dimly, as one does when half- 
asleep, that we approached the water until 
we stood at the very edge of the dock, and 
he who held my throat in so firm a grip 
pushed me to and fro as if with the intent to 
throw me over; my heart beat short and fast ; 
I could breathe only with the greatest effort, 
and the thought was in my mind that death 
by drowning must be more easy than 
strangulation. 

Suddenly my attention was diverted from 
my own dangerous position to a short, whis- 
pered conversation between the African and 
another, and, without having heard the 
words, I knew it was Sam of whom they 
spoke. 

Then the black man shook hands with his 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 3i 

companions as if about to take his departure, 
and strolled carelessly away, the others 
giving no heed to his movements. 

I turned my head as much as was per- 
mitted me, to gaze after him, but by this 
time the darkness was so great that I could 
not distinguish objects fifty yards away, and 
he was already swallowed up by the gloom. 

“Are you certain there were but two?” 
one of the men asked, and he who held me 
by the collar replied : 

“I saw no more; they must have over- 
heard what you said on joining us, and have 
taken up the trade of spies on the impulse of 
the moment. But Ham will soon bag the 
second cub, and we need have no further con- 
cern regarding them, save to decide how and 
when they shall be put out of the way.” 

At this moment I fancied I heard a faint 
cry, and my captor said with a laugh: 

“Ham has done his work quickly. You can 
now signal for the boat, and we’ll be off.” 

This suggestion was acted upon at once, as 
I knew from the fact that the sound of oars 
could be heard a moment later, and the ap- 
proaching boat had not yet come into view 


32 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


when the African joined us, holding Sam as 
I was being held. 

Now I understood the meaning of the con- 
versation just held by the men, and there 
was no longer any hope in my mind that the 
plot against General Washington could be 
defeated. 

Sam looked reproachfully at me, as if be- 
lieving I might have warned him in time to 
prevent capture, and I could not reply to the 
mute accusation because I was being forced 
over the edge of the dock into the boat which 
had just arrived. 

My comrade was sent down immediately 
after me, and for the instant I believed we 
might regain our freedom by leaping over- 
board, since both of us were in the bow of 
the craft unfettered ; but this hope of escape 
was soon quenched. 

The black man took it upon himself to 
attend to us, and following Sam, leaped 
directly upon us, pinning both Sam and my- 
self to the bottom of the boat by his great 
weight. 

So severe was the pain that I believed 
some of my bones had been broken by the 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


33 


brute, and when I would have cried out he 
struck me across the mouth with such force 
that blood followed the blow. 

Observing the treatment dealt out to me, 
and knowing he would receive the same if 
the slightest provocation was offered, Sam 
remained silent, but there was an expression 
in his eyes which told what he would do if 
the time ever came when he might settle 
accounts. 

Thus, serving as cushions for the African, 
we remained silent, suffering most severe 
pain, while the men first pulled the boat up 
toward Catherine Street as if intending only 
to visit the waste lands beyond, and after 
having passed from view of those standing 
near where we had embarked, rowed toward 
the Brooklyn shore. 

I was positive that once we were so far in 
the stream as to be hidden from those on 
shore, Sam’s fate and mine would quickly be 
settled; but in this I was mistaken, as is 
proven from the fact that we are yet alive. 

Our captors rowed on in silence during 
what appeared like many hours to us, and 
when it seemed impossible I could longer en- 


34 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

dure the pain inflicted by the brutal African, 
the boat came alongside a ship. 

I now knew we were among Lord Howe’s 
fleet, and my relief of mind was great, for it 
could not be he would sanction a cold- 
blooded murder, whatever might be the pur- 
pose of the plot. 

Even now we were forced to remain 
crouching under the black man’s feet until 
the ship had been hailed, and a request made 
for an interview with his excellency. Governor 
Tryon. 

Ten minutes later, after two of the party 
had been allowed to go on board, some 
pieces of rope were thrown to the African, 
and with them he proceeded to bind us hand 
and foot, threatening as he did so to blow our 
brains out if we made ever so slight an 
appeal for help. 

Then we were left alone in the boat, and 
instantly it was possible for us to speak with- 
out danger of being overheard, Sam whis- 
pered: 

“Are you willing to take the chances of 
trying to hail the officers of the ship?” 

“To what end?” I asked. 


CAPTURE OP THE LAUGHING MARY. 


35 


“They will force these fellows to release 
us, or at the worst, take us on board as 
prisoners. Anything is better than what we 
may expect from the negro and his friends.” 

“If there really is a plot to capture General 
Washington we should get little aid from the 
British, although I do not believe Lord Howe 
himself would agree to our murder. But we 
shall never be able to summon him, and by 
making an outcry only increase our suffering, 
even though the African does not carry out 
his threat.” 

“It is the same as assisting at our own 
death, to remain here silent.” 

I knew Sam’s words were true, yet at the 
same time I did not believe it wise to do as 
he suggested, therefore held my peace. 

“Once the business here is finished we can 
count on their murdering us, for it is not 
reasonable to suppose those fellows will dare 
let us go back to New York.” 

“We shall be no worse off by waiting for a 
time,” I replied after trying in vain to see 
some way out of our trouble, but yet I could 
not have explained how I hoped we might be 
benefited. 


36 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


Sam fell silent for many moments, and 
then broke out into reproaches because of 
having been so careless as to allow himself to 
be made a prisoner without a struggle, and 
since all this included me, I insisted strongly 
that we had done our best ; that the capture 
was but the fortune of war, although even as 
I spoke I realized how foolish were my 
words. 

We had failed in the duty intrusted us — of 
that there could be no question — and what- 
ever should befall us was the price of our 
own heedlessness. 

But neither reproaches nor wailing could 
avail us now, and after a short time both 
realized this, for we ceased to talk, and each 
busied. himself with his own thoughts, which, 
as can well be imagined, were far from 
cheerful. 

Then, when it seemed as if they had been» 
absent half the night, our captors returned to 
the boat, all evidently well-pleased with the 
result of their visit. 

So far as we could see or hear, no one at- 
tended them to the rail of the ship; they 
were allowed to sneak over the side alone. 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


37 


and the murderous traitors were so engrossed 
with their own wickedness as to apparently 
have no thought regarding this refusal of the 
British to treat them as equals. 

Pushing off from the war vessel, four of 
the party plied the oars, and since the Afri- 
can was one of these we were not forced to 
endure his ill-treatment. 

The men were in high spirits, and talked, 
without mentioning any names, as if there 
could be no question as to the certainty of 
carrying out their vile plot. 

They spoke as if some one high in author- 
ity in the city was implicated with them, and 
that now there was but little danger to any 
one concerned save him whose life or liberty 
was sought. 

Each moment I expected to hear them raise 
the question of what should be done with 
Sam and I ; but yet no word bearing on the 
subject was uttered ; it was as if they had 
already decided our fate among them- 
selves. 

The fact that they talked so unguardedly 
before us told that our doom was settled in 
their minds at least, and I had no doubt but 


38 


CAPTURE OP THE LAUGHINC MARY. 


that death would come to us before the voy- 
age was ended. 

When we had made half the distance from 
Staten Island to the city, I heard the sound 
of oars evidently but a short distance away, 
yet gave little heed to the fact, for, there 
seemed no hope we could find assistance 
now. 

A few moments later our captors also heard 
the noise, and in whispers called each other’s 
attention to the fact. 

The boat was turned sharply to starboard, 
and the oarsmen made every effort to row 
silently, but yet the faint splashing of water 
could still be heard. 

Our enemies bent all their strength to the 
task, pulling vigorously ten minutes or more, 
but when they stopped to listen the same 
sounds betokened pursuit, and I fancied 
them nearer than before, despite the efforts 
made by those in our craft. 

“There’s no question about it,” one of the 
fellows said as if in reply to some remark, 
although none had been made. “We are fol- 
lowed, and all know only too well what the 
result will be if we are taken. The fact that 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


39 


we visited the British fleet is enough to con- 
demn us, even though nothing more be 
known.” 

My heart was beating so loudly with the 
excitement of hope and the thought that 
friends had not deserted us, that it seemed 
as if the scoundrels must hear it, and I had 
almost as much difficulty in breathing as 
when the man clutched me by the throat. 

Those who had it in their hearts to murder 
General Washington, and in the commission 
of that crime would not allow the lives of 
two boys to stand in the way, were rowing 
with all their strength, and yet I could still 
hear close in the rear those sounds which 
told of pursuit. 

I believed Thad Burr to be near at hand, and 
nothing save the knowledge that I would 
probably be killed instantly the first cry 
escaped my lips, prevented me from shouting 
to my true-hearted comrade. 


40 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


CHAPTER III. 

.THE LAUGHING MARY. 

Sam was not one whit less excited than 
myself. 

He also had heard the welcome sounds 
which told that the villains were being pur- 
sued, and understood equally well with me 
that those who were enemies to these trai- 
tors must necessarily be our friends. 

Were I to set down here all the thoughts 
which came into my mind during the re- 
mainder of the chase this record would con- 
tain little else, for it seemed as if I lived 
again my entire life. 

At one moment I was positive the traitors 
must speedily be overtaken, and at another, 
hope grew so faint that the time when we 
would be murdered seemed near at hand, and 
I fancied the pursuers, whoever they might 
be, could not end the chase until after Sam’s 
fate and mine had been decided. 



SUDDENLY A SHARP REPORT OF A MUSKET RANG OUT, FOLLOWED BY A CRY 
OF PAIN FROM ONE OF THE OARSMEN. 


Laughing^ Mary, p. hi. 



CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


41 


My comrade was in the same fever of alter- 
nate hope and fear as myself. 

Now he would whisper that the race was 
well-nigh ended, and again question if those 
in the unseen boat were really pursuing our 
captors. 

But for the fact that the other craft was so 
near at hand, I believed of a verity we would 
have been flung overboard shortly after the 
chase began ; but the scoundrels who plotted 
against their country were so closely pressed 
that they dared not waste even as much time 
as would be necessary to dispatch us. 

Save for the grinding of oars in the row- 
locks and the gurgling of the water forced 
up by the prow of the boat, a profound 
silence reigned over the bay, when suddenly 
the sharp report of a musket rang out, fol- 
lowed by a cry of pain from one of the oars- 
men, and my heart leaped up exultantly. 

The end was near at hand ; the pursuers had 
given token of their determination. 

By the falling of one of their companions 
our captors were thrown into momentary 
confusion, and this was sufficient to decide 
the issue. 


42 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

One could not have counted twenty after 
the report of the weapon before the second 
craft lay alongside of ours, and in the gloom 
were seen the barrels of half a dozen leveled 
muskets as a voice which 1 recognized to be 
my uncle’s cried sternly: 

“Surrender, or we shall open fire!” 

That the conspirators were cowards was 
shown instantly these words had been spoken, 
for as if with one voice they cried out that no 
resistance would be made. 

Then the two boats came together, rail to 
rail; there was a time of seeming confusion, 
during which the conspirators were being 
manacled, while Sam and I alternately 
laughed and shouted as crazy boys might 
have done. 

In the joy and excitement I attempted to 
leap to my feet, forgetting for the instant the 
bonds which confined my limbs, and before 
the pain caused by this effort had ceased 
Thad Burr was unfastening the ropes. 

It was not until the conspirators had been 
securely ironed, and the boats were being 
pulled back to the city in company by the 
soldiers under my uncle’s command, that 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


43 


Sam and I were sufficiently calm to under- 
stand what Thad was trying to tell us. 

Twice he began the story, and twice did we 
interrupt him with our exclamations of joy 
and relief at what was nothing less than an 
escape from death ; but when for the third 
time he commenced the recital, we were 
sufficiently calm to understand his words. 

“Colonel Willett, accompanied by eight 
men, had just come around the market when 
these fellows,” and Thad motioned toward 
the discomfited prisoners who were packed 
in the bottom of the boat like fish in a box, 
“left the dramshop. Knowing you would 
keep them in sight, we had nothing more diffi- 
cult to do than follow, which allowed us to 
remain so far behind that there was little 
danger of our detection.” 

“Then you must have seen us when ’Liph- 
alet and I were captured,” Sam interrupted. 

“So we did.” 

“And yet made no eflPort to,prevent it?” 

“But for Colonel Willett 1 might have been 
so foolish as to have made the attempt, and 
thereby worked much mischief.” 

“In what way?” I asked in perplexity. 


44 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


“Knowing as little as we did regarding 
the plot, it was necessary some proof should 
be had, and this was only obtained by allow- 
ing the men to go wherever they would. To 
pursue them in a boat and yet remain unde- 
tected was not difficult in the darkness.” 

“But they might have murdered us off- 
hand, as at one time seemed probable,” Sam 
said reproachfully. 

“I had thought of such a possibility and 
made mention of it to Colonel Willett; but he 
would not change his plan. ‘Even though 
they were both my sons, I would take the 
chances of harm coming to them rather than 
risk a failure in the unraveling of the plot,’ 
he said, and after that it would have been 
folly for me to have argued further. I could 
only hope if serious danger threatened we 
might arrive in time to avert it; but very 
often, and especially while they were on 
board the frigate, did I fear that in this at- 
tempt to aid the cause I had in a certain 
way compassed the death of my com- 
rades.” 

Then silence fell upon us three for a time, 
during which we realized as never before of 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 45 

how little value human life may be in the 
game of war. 

“We dared not lay so near the British ves- 
sel that we could see what was being done 
by those scoundrels,” Thad continued, “lest 
we ourselves be discovered, and even after 
they pushed olF I was filled with doubt as to 
whether you yet remained on board the boat. 
Orders had been given that not a word be 
spoken by those in our craft, therefore I 
could not give utterance to the fears which 
beset me until after the fire had been opened 
upon the conspirators, when we heard your 
voices.” 

During the remainder of the voyage to the 
city we three found much to talk about, 
although but little had occurred, for Sam and 
I had really come back through the dark val- 
ley where death seemed very near unto us, 
and it was to me at least as if we were reunited 
after a long separation. 

It was midnight when we arrived at Peck’s 
Slip, and I ventured to ask my uncle privately 
why we had landed so far up the harbor. 

“That everything connected with this 
night’s work may be kept a secret so far as 


46 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


is possible,” he replied, “and I am com- 
manded to enjoin upon you who have ren- 
dered such signal service this night to the 
cause, to refrain from so much as telling 
your mothers what has occurred.” 

“But if we have made prisoners of those 
who would have harmed General Washing- 
ton, why should it not be told?” I asked 
foolishly, for it was never my way to reflect 
long before speaking. 

“It must not be known that there are men 
calling themselves Americans who would 
enter into such a plot,” my uncle replied. 
“It would hearten those among us who are 
not in full sympathy with the cause to work 
mischief if an opportunity presented itself. 
Therefore keep watch upon your tongues, 
lads, and to-morrow morning come to General 
Putnam’s headquarters. I doubt not you are 
minded to serve your country yet further, 
and for this night’s work you shall be given a 
fairer opening than could be had through a 
recruiting officer.” 

Having said this Uncle Marinus — here I am 
resolved to give him his proper title hence- 
forth, Colonel Willett — gave his commands to 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 47 

the squad in a low tone, and the soldiers 
with their prisoners walked rapidly away, 
leaving us three standing on the slip like 
lads bewildered, for the words of caution 
spoken had caused us a feeling very near 
akin to fear. 

I, simple like, would have discussed with 
my comrades the happenings of the after- 
noon and night but that Thad checked me. 

“If we speak not of it among ourselves we 
shall be less liable to disobey the colonel’s 
commands,” he said decidedly. “Of course 
we would relish letting our friends know 
what we have done this night for the good of 
the cause; but the injunction of secrecy is 
laid upon us, and that is all we need care to 
know. To-morrow, if I mistake not, we 
shall have an opportunity of doing that 
which has often been talked of between us, 
but never accomplished, and I’m not certain 
that the time is far distant Y^hen we shall 
wear swords.” 

As we walked toward our homes, for all 
three lived in the same neighborhood, many 
plans which now seem extravagantly foolish 
were formed, and when I entered my home 


48 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

I was in such a whirl of excitement that at 
my mother’s first anxious questions I nearly 
betrayed the secret which we had been com- 
manded to keep. 

Collecting my senses in time, however, I 
replied to her that we had been engaged 
under Colonel Willett; but could not, because 
of his* commands, explain what had been 
done. 

This was sufficient for the dear soul, who 
had every confidence in my word, and I fore- 
bore telling her that on the morrow we three 
comrades were to become soldiers, for there 
was no reason why she should have any 
more hours of anxiety than was absolutely 
necessary. 

Of the conversation between my mother 
and myself on the following morning I re- 
frain from speaking. It is not necessary to 
the purpose of this record, and even at this 
day is too painful for me to write out in 
words. 

It is sufficient to say that I met Sam and 
Thad at the rendezvous decided upon the 
evening previous, and together we went to 
General Putnam’s headquarters, marching 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


49 


through the streets with what we believed to 
be a true military air, for just then, in our 
own minds at least, we were not only soldiers 
in the American army, but very nearly 
officers. 

I was so foolish as to be disappointed by 
the manner in which Colonel Willett received 
us when we presented ourselves, and, as they 
afterward told me, my companions shared 
this feeling, though perhaps not to so great 
an extent. 

I do not know with what ceremony I ex- 
pected to be treated, but surely thought after 
the events of the previous night that we would 
be considered as of more consequence than 
three boys who were willing to devote all 
their energies and perhaps their lives to the 
cause of independence. I may have fancied 
General Putnam would meet us with open 
arms, but certain it is I felt sore, when, after 
coo*ling our heels at the door an hour or 
more, we were ushered into Colonel Willett’s 
presence, and he said in a matter-of-fact 
tone: 

“So you are the lads who desire to enter 
the continental service?” 


50 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


My mouth opened in surprise at this poor 
greeting, and the question might have re- 
mained unanswered but for Thad, who, 
always quick-witted, as will be seen if this 
record is ever finished, replied that we had 
come for the purpose of enlisting. 

“But for the fact that one of your number 
is the son of my brother, I would propose 
that you join my regiment.” 

“And why should we not. Uncle Marinus?” 
I asked. 

“I must be Colonel Willett to you, Elipha- 
let, if you enter the army, and hard though I 
should strive to prevent showing any partial- 
ity because of the kinship, there would 
likely be those in the ranks who might ac- 
cuse me of doing for my brother’s son more 
than I would for a stranger, therefore it is 
best you enlist under some other commander. 
I have thought the matter over since last 
night, and conclude that perhaps you will be 
better pleased to serve under Lieutenant - 
Colonel Benjamin Tupper, who has command 
of what we call the fleet, although it is com- 
posed of but little save whaleboats, galleys 
and small sloops. Colonel Tupper is a par- 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


51 


ticular friend of mine, and can do for yon 
what would not be seemly in me. How say 
you, lads? Would you be suited in that por- 
tion of the army?” 

“We shall be pleased to do whatever you 
may suggest, sir,” Thad replied, and without 
further parley Colonel Willett took from his 
pocket a sealed packet which he handed to 
me as he said : 

“This will serve to introduce you to Col- 
onel Tupper, who, if I am not mistaken, may 
be found at the fort. Before enlisting with 
him it will be well you understand fully the 
duties which are required, that there may be 
no cause on your part for regret. Should it 
so chance that the proposition he makes be 
not acceptable, return to me, and I will see 
what further can be done.” 

Then Colonel Willett would have dismissed 
us with a stiff military salute; but I, pre- 
suming upon my kinship, had the boldness 
to refuse an immediate dismissal, and 
asked : 

“What is to be done with those men whom 
we captured last night?” 

“If I was willing to admit that you knew 


52 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

of anything important which occurred last 
evening, I should reply by saying that the 
plans of the commanding general did not 
concern a private soldier; but as I under- 
stand the matter, you know of nothing that 
might interest either you or me.” 

Heavy -witted as I am and probably always 
shall be, I stared at Colonel Willett in open- 
mouthed astonishment, and might have re- 
mained there like a stupid until he was 
forced to call some one to take me away, but 
for Thad, who after thanking him for his 
kindness in giving us an introduction to Colo- 
nel Tupper, actually dragged me out of the 
room, saying with no little sharpness when 
we were on the street : 

“Can you not understand that if what oc- 
curred yesterday is to be kept a secret, there 
must be no conversation regarding it? It is 
fortunate Colonel Willett is your kinsman, 
otherwise we might have been read a de- 
cidedly unpleasant lecture.” 

Finally I succeeded in getting through my 
head the meaning of this latter portion of our 
interview, and by that time we had arrived 
at the fort, where we sent in to Colonel Tup- 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


53 


per, through the officer of the day, our letter 
of introduction. 

Not until fully half an hour had passed did 
we see the officer to whom we had been sent, 
but once hearing him speak I was satisfied 
he would prove such a commander as we 
should be pleased to serve under. 

“I understand,” he said, holding the open 
letter in his hand as if to intimate that from 
it he had gathered the information, “Colonel 
Willett feels under a certain sense of obliga- 
tion to you lads for some work done in the 
past, and to such end proposes you shall 
choose your own manner of serving the 
cause. I doubt not it will be possible for me 
to gratify you, although at the outset you 
must know that the opportunities for gaining 
distinction will be few while under my com- 
mand. Our fleet is composed of nothing more 
formidable than such harbor craft as you are 
familiar with, and the greater number of 
them are small, open boats. Perhaps it is 
fortunate for you that on this morning a 
friend of the cause presented the government 
with a schooner of thirty tons, to which ves- 
sel no crew has yet been drafted. Would it 


54 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


serve your purpose if I should put you three 
lads in command of her?” 

Would it serve our purpose? To be placed 
in command of a schooner, when we had 
thought we must march and countermarch 
until our legs were like to drop off from hard 
usage, was something which promised even 
better to our minds than the wearing of a 
sword. 

What reply we actually made to Colonel 
Tupper I am unable to set down, remember- 
ing only that I for one was almost extrava- 
gant in trying to thank the gentleman for the 
opportunity he offered. 

Of course Thad made the proper answer, 
and in a proper fashion, for when I next was 
in possession of my full senses we were 
marching past the fort to the water front at 
the head of a squad of soldiers, on our way 
to take command of a trim little vessel which 
lay at anchor a short distance from the 
shore. 

To explain all we did in getting our vessel 
ready for service would not only take up too 
great space, but become tiresome in the tell- 
ing, therefore I shall speak but little of the 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


55 


work lest I crowd more important matters 
from this record. 

We signed the rolls as recruits, and were at 
once drafted to take command of the schooner 
Laughing Mary, each being equal in rank, 
since we believed ourselves privates. 

We decided Thad should be the captain, 
Sam the first mate and I the second. If we 
needed assistance in handling her those who 
should be sent as guard could form a crew, 
but we hoped most sincerely we might be 
able to work the little craft unaided. 

Inexperienced boys as we were, there was 
in our mind^ the idea that we would be re- 
quired to sail the schooner here and there as 
messengers rather than belligerents, and be- 
cause of her small size as compared with the 
British war vessels it never entered into our 
calculations that we should be called upon to 
do any fighting while on board. 

Before nightfall on the first day of our tak- 
ing possession the supply of provisions was 
sent on board, and with them a yellow-faced 
man who claimed to have been engaged as 
the cook. From his appearance one would 
have said he had spent his days rolling pills 


56 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


in the office of some doctor, rather than in 
the kitchen where wholesome food should 
have been found. 

The six soldiers who accompanied us on the 
first visit to the schooner remained, by Colonel 
Tapper’s orders, as guard, and for lack of 
other accommodations were quartered aft 
with us, Thad promising meanwhile that 
bunks should soon be built in the hold in 
order that we officers of the vessel might 
have at least room in which to turn around, 
as was not the case when nine people — the 
cook slept forward in the galley — were forced 
to occupy the tiny cabin. 

On the day after our coming on board we 
were notified to haul into the dock in front of 
the fort to receive two small cannon and a 
supply of ammunition, together with such 
weapons as might be needed for the defense 
of the vessel. 

All this had very much the look of war to 
us, and when the Laughing Mary was at her 
anchorage again Sam and I paced the deck 
in such solemn fashion as we fancied should 
be assumed by officers of the navy, while 
Thad stalked here and there trying to look 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


57 


extremely dignified, but uncertain as to ex- 
actly how it should be done. 

We three were by no means indifferent sea- 
men, and I say so without intending to boast 
of our accomplishments, but because there is 
none other to set down the fact, and I would 
not it should appear we were green hands at 
the business we had undertaken. 

Perhaps Colonel Tupper may have feared 
after giving us command of the Laughing 
Mary that he had intrusted her to three 
boys who could not even have managed a 
punt, and perhaps also it was for this reason 
that on the third day he came aboard order- 
ing us to get under way for a reconnoissance 
of the bay. 

“I want to see what you can do with your 
vessel, lads, and propose to combine business, 
with instruction. We will run down to the 
British fleet as near as may be safe, and then 
back ; after which you will be better able to 
say how much of a crew is necessary.” 

“I doubt not, sir, but that some, if not all, 
the soldiers aboard know how to sail a ves- 
sel, and would give us such assistance as we 
might need,” Thad said gravely. “Under 


58 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


ordinary circumstances we should be able to 
handle her to your satisfaction.” 

Colonel Tupper made no reply to this 
speech; but I observed that he watched us 
narrowly as we got the Laughing Mary under 
way, and whispered to Sam that if we 
wished to make a good impression upon our 
commanding officer, it stood us in hand to 
move around right lively. 

Thad gave his orders in a loud, imperative 
tone; but he was careful to bear a hand 
when we weighed anchor or made sail, 
knowing full well that Sam and I could not 
unaided have done all the work. 

The Laughing Mary was as neat a little 
craft as ever left a builder’s hands. She 
behaved like a lady, and handled as readily 
as a fifteen-foot wherry. 

It was necessary to make several tacks in 
order to round Governor’s Island, and when 
she came up into the wind it was only while 
one might have counted five that she stood 
motionless, and then filling again, went on 
the other tack like a bird, wasting not a single 
second of time in the maneuver. 

We made the reconnoissance — that is to 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


59 


say, we approached the British fleet at a re- 
spectful distance, and then coming about, 
stood up the harbor with a free wind and 
such a bone in the teeth of the Laughing 
Mary as told eloquently of her sailing 
qualities. 

“Well,” Colonel Tupper said as we ap- 
proached the anchorage, “if you boys are 
not satisfled with this craft I can only say 
that you are extremely difficult to please.” 

“We are more than satisfied with her, sir,” 
Thad replied. “Who could be otherwise? I 
will engage to run around the best ship Lord 
Howe has in his fleet, and as for their catch- 
ing us, sir, it can’t be done unless the Laugh- 
ing Mary is first disabled. I only hope there 
may be such demand for our service as shall 
enable us to show what she can do.” 

“As to that you need have no fear, my lad. 
From this time forward I guarantee your 
time will be fully occupied, and doubt not 
from what I have heard regarding you three 
but that the service required will be per- 
formed in proper fashion.” 


60 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


CHAPTEK IV. 

THE FIRST INDEPENDENCE DAY. 

Many times during the week which fol- 
lowed our taking command of the schooner 
Laughing Mary did my comrades and I con- 
gratulate ourselves upon the very pleasant 
manner in which we were serving the cause. 

The idea in our minds had been, when we 
talked of enlisting, that we must suffer 
many hardships, endure privations, and so to 
speak, remain constantly in fear of death. 

Now, however, had we decided to devote 
the time wholly to our own amusement we 
could not have arranged matters more satis- 
factorily. 

The fact that we were under command of 
the officers of the army only served to make 
the pleasure greater, since it relieved us of 
all responsibility, and when we were sent up 
the North River with messages, or went into 
the bay reconnoitering the enemy, it was for 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


61 


US no more than a pleasure trip, therefore we 
flattered ourselves that the hardships of war 
had been greatly exaggerated. 

It is needless to say that after a time we 
discovered our mistake. 

During this week we had kept our eyes 
open for news regarding the conspirators who 
had been made prisoners; but could learn 
nothing. 

It can well be supposed that we did not ven- 
ture to ask Colonel Willett or Colonel Tupper 
questions bearing on the matter, and it is 
hardly likely we should have gained any- 
thing by so doing. 

The men passed from our knowledge as 
absolutely as if they were sunk beneath the 
waters of the bay, and we came to the con- 
clusion that nothing more would be heard 
regarding them, at least not until the war 
was ended. 

Then came the 12th of July, when we were 
made to realize that Lord Howe did not intend 
to remain quietly at anchor in the Narrows. 

The Laughing Mary’s anchorage was a 
short distance to the left of the fort, and 
about two hundred yards from the shore. 


62 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


On this particular morning my comrades 
and I were lounging about the deck under a 
bit of canvas we had spread as an awning to 
shield us from the intense heat of the sun, 
when two or three of the boats belonging to 
our fleet, which had been cruising near 
Governor’s Island, were pulled toward the 
city with all possible speed, and we were 
suddenly startled from our idleness by warn- 
ing cries. 

I was yet staring stupidly around me, won- 
dering what could have caused the sudden - 
commotion, when I saw standing up past the 
island the frigates Kose and Phoenix, all sail 
set, and their decks cleared for action. 

My first thought was that the British were 
about to attack our city, and yet I remained 
in my tracks like a blockhead as if I had 
nothing to do, until Thad’s voice, ringing out 
sharp and distinct, aroused me to a sense of • 
the fact that I had some duty to perform. 

To have heard the captain of the Laughing 
Mary at that moment one would have said of 
a verity he had had long experience in naval 
affairs, for I am certain Lord Howe himself 
could not have made more prompt or better 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


63 


arrangements for defense than did Thad Burr 
in the short time which intervened before 
the frigates opened fire upon the fort. 

The tide ceased ebbing, and the Laughing 
Mary was lying with her head toward the 
fort. The two cannon had been placed amid- 
ships, one on either side, no very dangerous 
implements of war, to be sure, but still our 
only means of defense at long range, and 
without loss of time Thad shouted for the 
soldiers to wheel the starboard gun over to 
the larboard side. 

Then, without waiting to see if his com- 
mand was obeyed, he darted into the hold 
where was stowed our small stock of ammu- 
nition, returning to the deck with powder 
and shot by the time both guns were in 
position. 

I must have cut a sorry figure in the wild 
scramble which ensued, for we had had no 
practice in such work, and it was really 
hardly better than a scramble as we charged 
the guns, got our cables over the starboard 
rail aft to hold the Laughing Mary in posi- 
tion, and otherwise prepared for the ex- 
pected attack. 


64 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


I seemed like one in a dream while these 
things were being done, but was speedily 
aroused to due realization of the situation 
when the foremost frigate — the Kose — yawed 
slightly and opened fire with her bow upon 
the fort, one of the iron missiles passing just 
abaft the Laughing Mary’s foremast, and 
within ten feet of the deck. 

It was our first experience in work of this 
kind, and I am free to confess not a pleasant 
one to me. 

I was yet wondering whether the second 
shot would end my life, for it seemed as if the 
guns were trained directly upon me, when the 
weapons of the fort belched forth their reply, 
and Thad himself discharged our two cannon. 

The din was like to stun one ; the smoke 
enveloped us as in a cloud ; the odor of burn- 
ing powder was pungent in our nostrils, and 
straightway there came upon me a most in- 
tense desire to work injury to the arrogant 
Britishers, who dared try to kill us because 
we were defending a country which was ours 
by right of birth. 

It needed not Thad’s shouts of command 
to stimulate me to action, as I darted here 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


65 


and there doing many useless things, and 
perhaps never a proper one; forgetting dan- 
ger — eager only to destroy — conscious of 
nothing save the single desire, until the 
action was over. 

The frigates had passed the fortifications, 
and were in the North River above the city 
where they could menace us from the rear. 

When the tumult was hushed I became 
more frightened than at the moment the first 
shot screamed above my head. 

It seemed impossible those two huge vessels 
of war had fired broadside after broadside 
directly upon us without killing all hands, 
and during several moments I was assailed 
by such terror as caused me to tremble and 
shake like one in an ague fit. 

Among the guard on board was a soldier 
who had been in the army during the siege of 
Boston, and therefore had had much expe- 
rience in such matters. 

He treated the whole affair as something of 
so trifling a nature as not to be worthy of 
more than passing attention, declaring that 
before the summer was ended we would 
cease to think of this ten-minute action as 


66 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

anything deserving the name of an engage- 
ment, and otherwise making such light of 
the matter as to shame me into soon getting 
the better of my fears. 

This incident, however unpleasant at the 
moment, served us a good turn, for until it 
occurred no one, not even Thad, had seemed 
to think it necessary we should be con- 
stantly in a position of defense; but from 
that hour, we ceased not to practice and drill 
ourselves for a like emergency. 

On the second day after the Britishers thus 
reminded us they were ready for mischief, 
and while Thad was drilling his officers and 
crew in a most energetic fashion, a message 
came from Colonel Tapper’s headquarters in 
the name of General Putnam, commanding 
us to appear at the hour of t\vo o’clock in 
the afternoon before a military court as- 
sembled at Captain Kennedy’s mansion. 

Nothing could have occurred to plunge us 
in more consternation than this order, and 
while making ready to obey by furbishing 
ourselves up in proper fashion, we speculated 
nervously as to the reason for the summons. 

“In some way we neglected our duty when 


CAPTURE OP THE LAUGHING MARY. 67 

the frigates passed the fort,” Sam said in the 
tone of one who is confident he has solved a 
difficult problem. “Of course we are to be 
brought before the court because of care- 
lessness, and the only time when anything of 
the kind might be charged against us was 
while the British were sailing past.” 

“But what could we have done more than 
we did?” Thad asked mournfully, for he be- 
lieved as I did that we were about to lose 
the snug berth which Colonel Willett’s in- 
fluence had obtained for us. 

“That is a question I cannot answer,” Sam 
replied. “I only know that on no other 
occasion since we’ve been in command of the 
Laughing Mary could there have been an 
opportunity to find fault.” 

“But we did the best we could, and I am 
sure if Thad failed in his duty it was be- 
cause of ignorance, not carelessness,” I 
hastened to add, and both my comrades 
laughed in a mirthless sort of fashion be- 
cause I should believe ignorance would 
be any excuse in such a case. 

Whatever had been done, or left undone, 
however, would not be mended by our dis- 


68 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

cussion, and after racking our brains in vain 
for a better solution of the riddle we ac- 
cepted Sam’s surmise as the truth, setting 
out with heavy hearts for the meeting place 
of the court. 

The sergeant in command of the squad was 
left in charge of the schooner, and the two 
men who rowed us ashore were instructed 
to return at once to the Laughing Mary in 
order that her full force of defenders might 
be on board during our absence. 

Arriving at General Putnam’s headquarters 
we were admitted only after our names had 
been sent in by the sentinel on duty, and 
were at once ushered into the library of the 
house, where, seated around a long table, 
were half a dozen or more officers, all of 
whom, with the exception of Colonel Tupper, 
were strangers to us. 

I confess to quaking with fear during the 
few moments we stood silent and motionless 
before these stern-visaged men, for there was 
in my mind the thought that we must have 
committed some exceedingly grave offense, 
otherwise so many high in rank would not 
have been gathered to pass judgment upon us. 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


69 


Fortunately for my own peace of mind, 
however, we were not long kept in suspense, 
and at the first question from Colonel Tup- 
per a great feeling of relief came over me, for 
I understood that this summons to the mili- 
tary court was not because of any neglect on 
our part. 

“Sergeant Thaddeus Burr,” Colonel Tup- 
per began gravely, and I saw a flush mantle 
Thad’s cheek as he was thus addressed, for 
until this moment we had no idea we were of 
higher rank than privates in the army — 
“Sergeant Thaddeus Burr, you will tell in 
detail all that occurred on the afternoon 
when you heard certain men talking together 
about a plot against General Washington.” 

Then Thad was sworn to tell only the 
truth, but an oath was not necessary, for my 
comrade scorned a lie as he did a Tory, after 
which he repeated what I have already set 
down. Then Sam and I told of the part we 
had played, both before and while we were 
the prisoners of the conspirators, and this 
done we were dismissed with an intimation 
that we might return to our post of duty on 
board the schooner. 


70 


CAPTURE OP THE LAUGHING MARY. 


That was all we had to do in the matter, 
and later in the day we learned that the 
prisoners had really been on trial, although 
we saw them not. 

In the evening when Thad went to the fort 
in response to a summons from the command- 
ant concerning some duty to be performed 
on the following day, he heard that the con- 
spirators had been found guilty; that the 
mayor of New York was committed to jail 
like a common malefactor, and a soldier, one 
of General Washington’s own guards, was to 
be hanged as a traitor on the following morn- 
ing in that field near the Boston road where 
twice before I had seen a gallows erec- 
ted. 

Even now the seal of secrecy regarding the 
events of that afternoon and evening vrhen 
we won our way to the command of the 
Laughing Mary through Thad’s quick-wit- 
tedness was not removed from our lips, for 
a message was brought to me during the 
evening addressed to “Corporal Eliphalet 
Willett,” and signed by Colonel Marinus 
Willett, which had these lines for its 
contents : 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


71 


“Sergeant Burr and Corporals Antill and 
Willett are hereby notified that the good of 
the cause demands they shall affect to know 
nothing concerning a certain plot against an 
officer high in command in the American 
army, even though the findings of the court 
have been made public. They are also en- 
joined against attending the execution to- 
morrow morning, lest curious citizens should 
question them too closely.” 


We speculated, my comrades and I, upon 
this, to us, odd injunction, and could only 
arrive at the conclusion that it was desired 
to keep from the public the disgraceful fact 
that among our people could be found those 
so base as to join in such a plot. 

These speculations were not prolonged as 
they otherwise would have been, because of 
the fact that we had been addressed severally 
as sergeant and corporals, which also had 
been done while we were at the military 
court. 

That Colonel Willett should thus plainly 
write out our names with rank attached, 
seemed sufficient evidence that we had with- 
out our knowledge risen thus far in the serv- 


72 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


ice, and I for one said to myself if promotion 
was to be gained so readily, before a year 
had passed I would of a truth be wearing a 
sword. 

It must not be supposed that during these 
. days of which I am writing we of New York 
looked upon Lord Howe’s fleet as harmless 
visitors, who, being amused thus in the lower 
bay, would depart without any attempt at 
working us harm. 

On the contrary, we who espoused the 
cause knew beyond a question that the 
king’s admiral would do all in his power to 
force upon us the yoke from which we were 
trying to free ourselves, as was shown when 
the Rose and the Phoenix darted past the 
city in order to take up a position from 
which they might better harass us. 

The Tories believed that in due time my 
Lord Howe would not only take possession 
of the city with but little difficulty, but that 
he would punish in a most summary manner 
all who had committed any act as against the 
authority of the king. 

We all understood that his lordship re- 
mained thus quietly at Staten Island only 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


73 


until he should be joined by his brother, 
General Howe, when there could be no ques- 
tion but that we must fight, and fight val- 
iantly for the rights we claimed. 

That morning when the traitorous Amer- 
ican who would have delivered his general 
into the hands of the enemy was executed, 
my comrades and myself remained quietly 
on board the Laughing Mary, nor did we so 
much as question any of the loungers regard- 
ing what had taken place, when we went on 
shore in the evening. 

But for the fact that the people had better 
topics of conversation than the hanging of a 
traitor, we should probably have been made 
acquainted with the facts of the morning by 
giving heed to the conversation among the 
citizens who gathered near the fort to re- 
ceive the benefit of the cooling breezes. 

As it was, however, we heard more regard- 
ing what the Continental Congress was doing 
than of the wretch who had met with a 
shameful but merited death. 

On the fourth day of July twelve of the 
colonies had adopted an Act of Independence, 
so manly and vigorous in its tone that there 


74 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

could be no question in the mind of his 
majesty but that it was our determination to 
become free, and we of the city were fever- 
ishly eager to know if this same Declaration 
was to be adopted by New York. 

We had to content ourselves in patience 
twenty-four hours before the result was 
learned. 

At three o’clock in the afternoon of the 
ninth, Colonel Tupper, who had come down 
the water front in an eight-oared galley, 
drew up alongside the Laughing Mary, and 
said in a tone as friendly as if he had been 
addressing his own comrades: 

“My lads, I think you can safely trust the 
schooner to the care of the guard for an hour 
this afternoon, in order to come up on the 
Common, where an official copy of our 
Declaration of Independence is to be read. 
The commander-in-chief himself is to be 
present, and you may witness such a scene 
as will be well worth the remembering.” 

“Has it been adopted by New York, sir?” 
Thad asked eagerly, for we had not been 
ashore since morning. 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


75 


“Not yet; but there is little question as 
to the fact soon being accomplished.” 

Colonel Tupper was rowed away after hav- 
ing thus spoken, and we, meaning my com- 
rades and myself, set about making ourselves 
as smart as possible for the occasion. 

Except when we had been summoned to 
the military court, the three of us had not 
been on shore together from the day we took 
command of the Laughing Mary, and we 
were resolved we would do credit to the little 
vessel. 

Sam’s mother and mine had made three 
uniforms of buff and blue like unto the one 
worn by Colonel Willett, save that ours were 
befitting privates, and therefore it was that 
in our opinion at least we did not present a 
mean appearance, when, having been rowed 
ashore by two of the guard, we marched 
three abreast up Broadway to the Common. 

It was as if all the citizens loyal to the 
cause were in the streets, and such a merry- 
making day has not been my good fortune to 
see, save nine days later when there was a 
public reading of the Declaration in front of 
the city hall. 


*76 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

We saw the general from Virginia who 
will, if any man can, lead our people on to 
victory, as he set his horse within the hollow 
square formed by the brigade, while Colonel 
Willett read in a voice which might have 
been heard a hundred yards away, that writ- 
ing by which we declared our right to govern 
ourselves. 

This done three cheers were given, and 
given with a will, while from the city could 
be heard the ringing of bells and firing of 
guns, making it altogether one of the most 
inspiring scenes which can well be imag- 
ined. 

Coming from the Common in the rear of the 
troops we found that the leaden statue of 
George III. on Bowling Green, placed there 
in the year 70, had been pulled down, and it 
was already in an ox cart being drawn, so 
some of the bystanders said, into Connecti- 
cut, where I afterward heard it was run into 
bullets, with which we peppered the redcoats, 
as I have no doubt. 

In order to fitly celebrate the day, as Thad 
suggested, we invited Sam’s mother and 
mine, and Thad’s cousin, with whom he had 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


77 


been living, on board the schooner to partake 
of as good cheer as our unwholesome-faced 
cook could prepare. 

On the following morning the soldiers who 
went on shore for provisions came back with 
the pleasing intelligence that a message had 
been sent to the New York delegates in Con- 
gress, empowering them to vote for the Act 
of Independence, and ordering that a public 
reading of the document should be had at 
city hall, almost within reach of the British 
guns. 

Little did we think then as we rejoiced at 
the spirit displayed by our lawmakers that 
so many signal reverses would come to us 
during the remainder of this year ; but now 
that we have lately shown our mettle in 
rather a better fashion, it is talked about 
here at Morristown that on the fourth day of 
next July we will celebrate what was done 
last July, if it so be we still hold possession 
of any part of the United States. 

Nothing occurred of suiScient importance 
to warrant my setting it down in this record 
from the time we heard the Act of Independ- 
ence read on the common until we gathered 


78 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

with— I was near to say every inhabitant in 
the city of New York, for so it seemed at the 
time ; but it is reasonable to suppose a goodly 
number of Tories remained away from the 
festivities, a vast assemblage on Wall Street, 
and heard for the second time those words 
which make, simply by the hearing of them, 
brave men out of cowards. 

For thirty days after this grand celebra- 
tion we of the Laughing Mary had as much 
work on hand as we could well perform. 
There were reconnoissances to be made, troops 
to be carried to Brooklyn, where were build- 
ing many strong fortifications, and much 
moving to and fro between the city and 
Governor’s Island, which was garrisoned by 
the heroes of Bunker Hill under command of 
Colonel Prescott. 

We had no idle time at our disposal, but 
yet to set down in detail all that which we 
did would be dry and uninteresting reading, 
therefore it has been decided between my 
comrades and myself that now having ex- 
plained how we three, the oldest but seven- 
teen years of age, chanced to be in command 
of the schooner Laughing Mary, this record 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHmO MARY. 79 


shall be devoted entirely to the doings which 
came to our share from the day when Gen- 
eral Washington knew the British forces were 
about to make an attack. 


80 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


CHAPTER V. 

MUTINOUS CONDUCT. 

On the morning of the 21st of August 
Sergeant Burr, captain of the schooner 
Laughing Mary, received orders from Colonel 
Tupper to pull in at a particular place near 
the Grand Battery, and there take on a cer- 
tain amount of ammunition to be delivered 
to Colonel Prescott on Governor’s Island. 

The order was similar to many we had re- 
ceived since being in command of the 
schooner, and one not calculated to cause 
either my companions or myself any excite- 
ment. 

It was a common freighting job, rather 
than sailoring, in the doing of which we three 
would be forced to perform a very large share 
of the work, for the soldiers on board had 
more than once during the past thirty days 
complained so loudly we could not fail to 
hear them, against what they called the 


CAPTURE OP THE LAUGHING MARY. 


81 


“unjustice” of being placed under the com- 
mand of boys. 

Had it not been for this complaint neither 
Thad, Sam nor I would have considered our- 
selves very well acquainted with the soldiers. 

Since the hold had been fitted up for their 
better accommodation, the captain and mates 
of the Laughing Mary bunked alone in the 
cabin, perhaps living more by themselves 
than was right because of the discontent 
among the squad from the first day we took 
command. 

There were five privates and one corporal, 
which last counted for half a dozen men, so 
far as peevishness and ill-temper were con- 
cerned. 

Jethro Barnes was his name, a red-faced, 
awkward-looking creature, who claimed to 
have lived in Connecticut during his earlier 
days, and later followed the occupation of 
trapper in the northern part of New York, 
until enlisting in what Colonel Tupper called 
the “marine service.” 

When he first came on board Jethro was 
disposed to lord it over us three boys in no 
slight degree, but after twenty-four hours 


82 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


passed Thad had a plain conversation with 
him which decided, as I thought, the ques- 
tion of authority beyond the necessity of 
reopening it. 

During the evening of the day we gave our 
testimony in the military court Jethro had 
another outburst, which seemed but trifling 
to me, so quickly was it settled. 

He announced to Thad his intention of 
living aft with us, because he considered it 
beneath his dignity to occupy the same 
quarters with the men under his command. 

Now Thad was a fellow who could make 
another understand a great deal by the use 
of but few words, and on this occasion his 
speech was remarkably short. 

“Your quarters in the hold are as good as 
ours, and if you are not satisfied with them. 
Corporal Barnes, I will ask Colonel Tupper 
to detail some one else in command of the 
guard aboard this schooner.” 

Jethro turned away sulkily, and Sam said 
to me, while we were hanging over the rail 
after the fellow had gone below : 

“I reckon that is the last complaint we 
shall hear from Corporal Barnes. He is not 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


83 


the kind of a fellow to put himself in the 
way of being obliged to leave a berth in 
which he is having a remarkably easy 
time.” 

And I believed as did Sam, being strength- 
ened in my opinion as the days passed and 
he made no further complaint. 

Neither did he show any liking for our 
company; but this was a matter of small 
concern to us, since we preferred to be alone 
whenever the opportunity presented itself. 

On this 21st day of August, when we had 
warped around to the Grand Battery, ready 
to begin the work of loading, every one on 
board the schooner, with the single exception 
of Corporal Barnes, pulled off his coat in 
order to be more free of movement during 
the labor. 

This gentleman strutted to and fro across 
the deck forward as if there was nothing in 
hand for him more important than to air his 
graces, and Thad said sharply, although by 
no means angrily^ for he is a lad who can 
control his temper admirably : 

“Now then, corporal, if you lend a hand 
we will run out these planks.” 


84 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


“I am on board this schooner in command 
of the guard, and not to work as a stevedore 
under your orders.” 

Thad straightened himself up quickly, and 
a deep red flush came over his face which 
would have been a warning to Corporal 
Barnes to keep a quiet tongue between his 
teeth had he known our captain better. 

For a moment I thought Thad would 
measure strength with the soldier, and he 
has since confessed it was his intention to do 
so; but fortunately, as it then seemed to me, 
unfortunately as it afterward proved, he 
realized in time that either as a sergeant in 
the American army, or as the captain of the 
Laughing Mary, it was beneath his dignity to 
take part in a brawl, therefore he turned 
away in silence. 

The corporal continued to pace to and fro 
while we took on board the ammunition, and 
when the job was finished we began the short 
voyage with Thad at the wheel and Sam and 
I standing by the sheets whenever it was 
necessary to come about, for we took especial 
pride in performing all the work of sailing 
the schooner ourselves. Thus far, never 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


85 


once had we called upon the soldiers for 
assistance in this labor. 

We stood over to the Brooklyn shore, and 
then laid on the other tack, expecting to 
make Governor’s Island after coming about 
again. 

Sam and I were forward alone. Corporal 
Barnes’ squad all being below, and my com- 
rade said in a cautious tone, after first look- 
ing around to make certain there were no 
eavesdroppers : 

“I am sorry Thad decided not to fiog that 
fellow.” 

“Why?” I asked in surprise. “It would 
not be a seemly story should Colonel Tupper 
hear that the boy he put in command of the 
Laughing Mary had no other means of enforc- 
ing discipline than by fisticuff’s.” 

“Better that than worse.” 

“What do you mean?” 

“Unless Corporal Barnes is made to know 
his place, and right speedily, all of us may 
find it necessary to play at that game, except 
we are willing to use more dangerous 
weapons.” 

I was not only surprised but alarmed at 


86 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


hearing Sam speak in this manner, for he 
was not a lad given to anticipating trouble ; 
on the contrary, always ready to believe in 
others, as I often told him. 

“You are growing timorous,” I said, trying 
to laugh away my own fears. “Because this 
trapper sergeant, who believes himself equal 
in rank with Colonel Willett, happens to get 
into the sulks you straightway tremble.” 

“It is all very well to make sport, ’Liph- 
alet, of what you know nothing about. 
Barnes’ behavior this morning would have 
troubled me very little but for the fact that 
this is not the first time he has shown signs 
of insubordination.” 

“You still remember the desire to move 
his quarters from the hold into the cabin?” 

“You must be blind as a mole if you have 
not observed how that fellow has carried 
himself during the past two weeks. Had I 
been in Thad’s place he would have gone 
ashore ten days ago.” 

“But what have you seen?” 

“Enough to convince me he would make 
mischief for us if he could, and that he is 
already trying to work harm by inciting his 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


87 


squad to what would be downright mutiny if 
he and they were sailors on board. Have 
you noticed that during the past week none 
of them remain on deck with us, although at 
any moment something might happen re- 
quiring the services of all on board?” 

Now he spoke of it I remembered such was 
the fact; but until this moment had given 
no heed to it. 

However, that Corporal Barnes and his 
men should go into their quarters while we 
were under way seemed to me a matter with 
which we should be pleased rather than 
irritated, and so I said to Sam. 

“If he behaved himself properly toward 
Thad, who is not only the captain of this 
schooner but his superior in rank, I would 
never open my mouth though he stayed be- 
low a month ; but it is his manner of going 
below ; his way of speaking and a hundred 
little things I have noticed for some time 
past, all of which have increased until he 
broke out this morning.” 

“But why do you not speak to Thad about 
it?” 

“I did, and he refused to listen.” 


88 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


To this I could make no reply. 

Thad was the captain of the schooner, and, 
comrade though he was, we had no right to 
say what he should do. 

While I stood gazing at Sam like a simple, 
we had sailed so far on this second tack that 
it was time to come about again, and further 
conversation was checked until our work had 
been performed. 

Nor was there another opportunity for Sam 
to give voice to his fears before we arrived at 
Grovernor’s Island, because Sergeant Burr 
kept both his mates actively employed until 
we were at anchor in port. 

The work of unloading the schooner was 
performed expeditiously, and with but little 
assistance from us. Colonel Prescott sending 
a squad of his men to take charge of the 
work. 

Corporal Barnes came on deck shortly after 
we dropped anchor and stood by the rail for- 
ward, watching idly the work of the Massa- 
chusetts soldiers until one of the boats was 
ready to return to the shore, when, without 
a word to Thad, he jumped aboard. 

As a matter of fact he had no more right 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


89 


to leave the schooner without permission of 
the captain than if it had been commanded 
by Colonel Tapper himself, and this un- 
warranted departure was as thorough a piece 
of mutiny as he could have indulged in. 

Thad was aft at the time, and remained in 
ignorance of the corporal’s departure until 
more than half an hour elapsed, when the 
boat in which he had embarked returned 
without him. 

Then I called my comrade’s attention to 
what had occurred, at the same time ventur- 
ing to say : 

“You are in command here, Thad, and it 
is not for me to make any suggestions.’’ 

“Now you are becoming as stiff-necked as 
Sam. Antill,” Thad replied almost irritably. 
“Because I was made sergeant and captain 
of the sloop, while you two only corporals 
and mates, is no reason why our friendship 
for each other has lessened. Nor do I claim 
to be higher in rank when we three are 
together. Why should you and Sam think 
it out of place to make suggestions to me?” 

“Because the good of the cause, as I have 
heard Colonel Willett say, demands that due 


90 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


regard be given rank and position in the 
army, and as he has claimed many a time 
in my hearing, the one evil to be feared in 
the American forces is that the men will 
carry with them the idea of kinship or 
friendship, and thereby impair the strict dis- 
cipline which should be kept.” 

“Truly a brave lecture, Eliphalet Willett, 
but it is not your own. I can hear Sam 
AntilTs voice in every word, and know who 
has taught the lesson. Were you and I in 
the ranks it might be necessary, while on 
duty, to hold strictly to military rules and 
usages; but I maintain that here on board 
the schooner we are, or should be, the same 
comrades as before entering the service. 
Now what suggestion would you make to me, 
but dare not because I am in command of 
this vessel, and you only a mate?” 

His cheery, friendly manner of speaking 
heartened me to give words to the fears 
which had been aroused in my mind by Sam. 

I could not tell him anything about Cor- 
poral Barnes of my own knowledge, for, as 
has been written, I had failed to note partic- 
ularly the acts of insubordination of which 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


91 


Sam complained, therefore did little more 
than repeat my comrade’s words. 

“I am sorry yon fellows believe I should 
have made a brawling place of the Laughing 
Mary’s deck,” Thad replied. “Although I 
know no more of a soldier’s duty than you or 
Sam, I am certaian such a course would not 
have met with the approval of either Colonel 
Tupper or your uncle. I have noted better 
than you the corporal’s manner, and made up 
my mind, when he refused to assist in the 
loading, to lay the case before his superior 
officer and mine at the first opportunity. 
Unless I am much mistaken he will not be 
aboard the schooner this night.” 

This satisfied me, as it also did Sam when 
I had repeated the conversation to him, and 
both of us felt a sense of great relief because 
of the decided stand Thad proposed to take. 

Before the work of unloading was finished 
a messenger came from the island to ask that 
the captain of the Laughing Mary attend 
upon Colonel Prescott, and Thad, stopping 
only long enough to put on his uniform coat 
and hat, departed, leaving Sam and I in com- 
mand of the schooner. 


^2 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

Our captain was absent half an hour or 
more, and on his return explained that the 
oflScer in command of the fortification desired 
us to go over to Fort Defiance, at Fed Hook, 
for the purpose of bringing back a couple of 
cannon which were to be loaned to the works 
on Governor’s Island. 

“I suppose we are in duty bound to obey 
the request, which was given in such a form 
as to be really a command,” Thad said after 
he had given the information, “and yet we 
should by rights have Colonel Tupper’s 
authority for thus prolonging the voyage.” 

I thought he was overnice in this regard, 
because if we were doing necessary work 
for any portion of the American army it 
mattered little whether the orders came 
from Lieutenant- Colonel Tupper, or Colonel 
Prescott. 

Surely a man who had fought at Charles- 
ton as the commandant of the Governor’s 
Island fortification was said to have fought 
should be obeyed as readily as either of our 
generals, and I for one believed it would be 
akin to mutiny to hesitate. 

Sam shared my opinion to a certain extent, 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


93 


although he did not state it as emphatically 
as I had done, and Thad’s doubts as to his 
proper course seemed to have vanished. 

“Is Corporal Barnes to go with us?” Sam 
asked. 

“He will remain on board the schooner 
until relieved from such duty by his superior 
officer, therefore we shall have him with us 
until our return to New York.” 

“That is to say, you will if he chooses to 
come.” 

“Should he refuse I will see to it that Colo- 
nel Prescott puts him under arrest. I am 
not positive it is within my province to force 
him to assist in loading or unloading the 
schooner ; but when it comes to a question of 
his doing duty as guard on board, I claim to 
have full authority over him.” 

These words, spoken so firmly, drove from 
my mind the fears which had been aroused 
by Sam’s remarks, and I no longer felt any 
anxiety concerning the corporal’s behavior. 

The work of unloading was performed by 
the soldiers stationed on the island, while 
our own force remained lounging idly about 
the decks, and before it was finished the 


94 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


man who had caused such a ruffle of anxiety 
came on board with as many airs and graces 
as if he had suddenly been called upon to 
assume General Washington’s duties. 

I fancied he would be surprised when, sail 
having been made, the Laughing Mary was 
headed down the harbor; but his face be- 
trayed nothing of the kind, and I decided he 
had learned while on shore of the intended 
prolongation of the voyage. 

The wind had fined down until it was of 
barely sufflcient strength to keep our canvas 
full, and the run which should have been 
made in an hour or more occupied the time 
until nearly sunset. 

When we came to an anchor close under 
the guns of Fort Defiance everything was 
made snug for the night, for we should not 
be able to get the cannon on board until 
morning, and the sun was fast disappearing 
in the west when Thad went ashore to ex- 
plain the purpose of our coming. 

Corporal Barnes, who had remained below 
with two of his men while we were running 
down from Governor’s Island, came on deck 
when the anchor was let go, and there he 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


95 


stayed as if it was his duty to see that our 
work was done in a sailor-like fashion, until 
Thad left the schooner. 

No sooner had the boat, rowed by two of 
the soldiers, pushed off, than the corporal 
descended into the hold once more, and Sam 
and I were left alone. 

The cook came aft to know if supper 
should be served, it now being the usual time 
for the meal, and was told we would wait 
until the captain returned. 

He went away apparently content ; but a 
moment later came back to say that Corporal 
Barnes had given orders his men be fed at 
once. 

“He claims to have an independent com- 
mand here, and insists on the right to order 
rations at any time,” the cook added. 

Sam remained silent while one might have 
counted twenty. 

He had believed Thad should be exceed- 
ingly strict in dealing with such a fellow as 
the corporal, but now that the command de- 
volved upon himself, I could see he was in 
doubt as to whether it would be wise to give 
an order which might be disobeyed. 


96 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

Fearing lest he should he weak-kneed in 
the matter, I said quickly: 

“The corporal is trying to see how far he 
can go in his mutinous conduct, and the more 
we give in to him the more we shall be 
obliged to yield.” 

Whether it was my remark which deter- 
mined Sam in his course I am unable to 
say; but of a certainty he said quickly, 
with the air of one who intended to be 
obeyed: 

“Supper will not be served to any one on 
board until the captain’s return, however 
long he may be absent.” 

Suspicious as I had now become, there was 
in the profound salute which the cook gave 
Sam something that I fancied savored of 
impudence, and made me resolve to keep a 
sharp eye on the fellow in the future. 

“Corporal Barnes is bound to make trouble 
for us,” I said to my comrade when the cook 
had disappeared. 

“He won’t have a chance, for now that 
Thad has promised to make complaint to 
Colonel Tupperwhenwe get back to the city, 
I shall insist that he do so, and by this time 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


9 ? 


to-morrow the guard of the schooner will be 
under command of a different man.” 

“I wish he might be sent on shore to- 
night.” 

“So do I; but it cannot be done. It is not 
probable he will do more than affect con- 
tempt of our authority, and that we can bear 
with a few hours longer.” 

Then, as if to put a disagreeable subject 
from his mind, Sam began to talk of what 
move the Britishers might first make toward 
attacking the city, and both he and I had 
become interested in the subject when Cor- 
poral Barnes, with all of his men, came from 
the hold and went directly to the galley. 

“Why has supper not been given out?” we 
heard him ask the cook in an angry tone, 
and could readily distinguish the reply : 

“Because the first mate has ordered that 
no meals be served until the captain comes 
on board.” 

“I have no concern with the infants who 
claim to be in charge of this schooner,” the 
corporal cried savagely. “I am in command 
of the guard on board, and independent of 
babies like them. My orders are that rations 


98 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


be served within ten minutes, or it will be a 
serious matter for you, Mr. Cook.” 

Here was a pretty kettle of fish for Sam 
and I to fry. 

Had Thad been on board we should have 
said boldly it was his duty to give the im- 
pudent trapper- corporal such a lesson as he 
would not forget ; but when it came to our 
taking the matter in hand it was a different 
story, and I, for my part, was at a loss to 
know what should be done. 

Sam remained as if plunged into the same 
state of perplexity that I was, and we two 
stood staring at each other, believing that as 
officers of the Laughing Mary we were higher 
in rank than the corporal of the guard, and 
yet doubtful as to how far we could right- 
fully go in attempting to assert our author- 
ity. 

Then also, it might be a difficult matter for 
us to prevent the corporal and his men, who 
numbered six all told, from doing exactly as 
they pleased. 

To make an effort at enforcing a command, 
and failing, would be worse than allowing 
him his own way during the few hours which 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHINO MARY. 


99 


must pass before we were where he could be 
dealt with in proper fashion. 

While we stood thus deliberating the cook 
came aft again, and at that moment, from the 
expression on his face, I felt confident he was 
in league with Barnes against us. 

“You heard what the commander of the 
guard said,” and the sallow-faced villain was 
impudent in manner, if not in words. “How 
am I to act?” 

“No food is to be given out until the cap- 
tain returns,” and Sam spoke as if positive 
his orders would be obeyed, which was far 
more than I could have done under the 
circumstances*. 

“Corporal Barnes has the same rank as 
either of you, and because of his age must be 
in authority here,” the cook said with the 
same impudent swagger. 

“Captain Burr, who is also a sergeant in 
the army, commands this schooner, and even 
though the commandant of Fort Defiance 
himself was on board he would have no au- 
thority in anything concerning the discipline 
of this vessel.” 

/ 

I could have hugged my comrade for the 


100 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

manly spirit he showed, but at the same time 
observed with alarm that the cook was not 
inclined to take his view of the matter. 

The fellow stood for a moment as if in re- 
flection, and then said sulkily: 

“If the corporal and his men go into the 
galley they can easily take what they choose 
and I am not such a fool as to try to prevent 
them.” 

“That is exactly what you must do, other- 
wise when we arrive at the city you may 
have an opportunity to explain why you dis- 
obeyed orders.” 

“Do you count on going back to the city 
very soon?” the cook asked in a tone which 
startled me, because for the instant I fancied 
there was a double meaning in the words; 
but I put that idea far from my mind almost 
instantly, since it seemed in the highest 
degree foolish. 

Sam looked at the cook angrily as if about 
to make an intemperate reply ; but before he 
could do so I saw Thad coming down from 
the fort to the boat. 

“The captain will soon be on board,” I 
said. 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 101 


“And he will settle this matter after his 
own fashion,” Sam added with a sigh of relief 
that the responsibility had been lifted from 
his shoulders. 


102 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


CHAPTER VI. 

TREACHERY. 

Probably if Thad had known what serious 
danger there was of mutiny on board the 
Laughing Mary, he would have pursued a far 
different course, and then who shall say that 
matters might not have turned out better, 
not only for us, but for that portion of the 
American army on the Brooklyn Heights? 

It hardly seems possible a villain like Cor- 
poral Barnes could have it in his power to 
work indirectly so much mischief as he suc- 
ceeded in working on this day at Red Hook. 

I say it seems impossible he could have 
effected so much, but it is not for me to set 
down my own thoughts or speculations, 
therefore I will leave the might-have-beens 
to take care of themselves, and continue 
this record in as nearly a proper manner as is 
within my ability. 

Thad had set off from the shore with the 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 103* 

air of one who is in very good humor with 
himself and every one around him, and what 
seemed odd to me at the moment was that 
his first words on reaching the deck were 
directed to the cook. 

“You can serve supper now, and in the 
future, unless I give orders to the contrary, 
meals will be set out at the usual hours 
whether I am here or not.” 

If Thad had known all we did he could not 
have settled so effectually that question 
which at one time threatened to become dan- 
gerous, and what was more to the purpose. 
Corporal Barnes was now unable to comfort 
himself with the thought that his bullying 
had been of any avail. 

For the moment it seemed to me as if we 
were well out of a decidedly disagreeable 
position, for I was not such a fool as to think 
that we three aft could oppose those forward 
with any hope of success, if the members of 
the guard were united in mutiny. 

“We will have the guns aboard shortly 
after daylight to-morrow,” Thad said in a 
tone sufficiently loud for all to hear, as he 
joined Sam and I. “Had I not been afraid 


104 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

you fellows would wait supper for me, as I 
see is the case, I should have accepted the 
commandant’s invitation to remain ashore 
for a spell. We have such important news 
to take back to the city that if there w^as 
sufficient wind I would run up at once, and 
make another trip for the guns; but as it is, 
no time will be saved by our knocking about 
the bay all night.” 

“Is it secret information you have been 
intrusted with?” Sam asked, showing un- 
usual respect to Thad at this moment, 
because two members of the guard, having 
heard his announcement, were edging their 
way aft with studied carelessness to hear the 
story. 

“It is no more than will soon be known, 
and has long been anticipated by all of us. The 
indications are that the British are making 
preparations for a decided move, and the 
commandant believes we shall have plenty 
of work cut out for us within the next forty - 
eight hours.” 

“Which means that they count on captur- 
ing the city at once,” I added. 

“Exactly; yet they have allowed our 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 105 

people time enough in which to fortify 
Brooklyn Heights, and the task will not be 
as easy as it might have proven two months 
ago. But let us have supper. There is no 
reason why we can’t talk while eating, and I 
am as hungry as a shark.” 

I noted with no slight satisfaction that 
despite Corporal Barnes’ bullying, the cook 
was about to serve the captain first, as was 
seemly. 

I had feared the insubordination on board 
the schooner might be so strong that we 
would have further proof of it by seeing the 
corporal’s guard waited upon while we re- 
mained hungry. 

Perhaps it would have been better were my 
fears realized, for then we should have con- 
tinued more on the alert. 

Once in the cabin, and confident our con- 
versation would not be overheard because all 
hands were pleasantly engaged with their 
rations, Sam repeated to Thad all that had 
occurred during his absence. 

“He won’t have much opportunity to make 
more trouble,” the captain said after a long 
pause, during which he looked decidedly 


106 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


disturbed. “The soldiers at the fortification 
will attend to slinging the cannon aboard, with 
such assistance as we can render them, and 
that mutinous corporal need not be called 
upon. I am willing to guarantee that in less 
than an hour from the time of our arrival in 
New York he will be under arrest.” 

“I am not certain but that it would be bet- 
ter if I had pushed matters so far that we 
should be warranted in leaving him here at 
the Hook,” Sam said thoughtfully. 

“One could almost fancy you afraid of 
that bullying fellow.” 

“I am afraid of what he may be able to do. 
Kemember, Thad, he and his men make up 
six, and if I am not mistaken the cook is of 
the same kidney. Therefore it would be 
seven against three in case of trouble.” 

“But no great trouble can occur, Sam 
Antill,” Thad replied almost sharply. “He 
may try to make it as disagreeable for us as 
possible, because of jealousy that three lads 
should be in command over him ; but he will 
never dare to create any serious disturb- 
ance.” 

I shared the captain’s opinion, and believed 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 107 

the first mate was allowing himself to enter- 
tain foolish fears. 

From the time we had first taken command 
of the schooner, Sam and I as mates kept 
strict watch and watch during the night, 
whether we were at anchor or under way, 
although at meal time, as in the present case, 
when the Laughing Mary was in harbor, we 
left the decks unguarded. 

Once observing such to be our rule. Colo- 
nel Tupper had laughingly said that we 
were overcautious; that the sentry of the 
guard was suflScient protection for us while 
we lay under the guns of the fort ; but not- 
withstanding this fact our vigilance had not 
been relaxed. 

Therefore it was that as soon as supper 
came to an end I went on deck, it being 
Sam’s watch below. 

The night had fully shut down. 

Far away in the distance I could see the 
riding-lights of the British fleet, but no 
sound broke the silence, which was so pro- 
found that unconsciously I fell to wondering 
why our people were in such a state of 
quietude. 


108 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

Ordinarily the noise of conversation which 
came from the soldiers’ quarters was so great 
as to be heard unpleasantly distinct in the 
cabin; but now I could not detect so much 
as a whisper. 

Under no circumstances would I have 
allowed the men to think I was spying on 
them, and I paced to and fro with unneces- 
sary noise, yet at the same time taking good 
care to confine my walk to the vicinity of the 
hatchway in the hope of learning the cause 
of this unusual quietude. 

I did not succeed in such purpose, how- 
ever; but presently discovered that the cook, 
instead of being in his own quarters, was 
with the corporal’s men, and this seemed to 
me odd, although by no means a suspicious 
circumstance. 

At midnight Sam came on deck to relieve 
me, and as in duty bound I reported to him 
the condition of affairs. 

“Not a man has shown himself since I 
have been here. The cook must yet be in 
the hold, and although on the alert, I have 
not heard a whisper.’’ 

“Perhaps they turned in early,” Sam 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 109 

replied, and I, believing he had been unnec- 
essarily suspicious during the day, would not 
further excite him by a suggestion that such 
a course was unusual; that the guard had 
done nothing to weary themselves during the 
day, and never before had I known them to 
go below willingly during pleasant weather. 

Sam asked no further questions, and I, 
strong with the desire for sleep despite the 
forebodings which would not be banished, 
went below. 

There were but four bunks in the cabin of 
the Laughing Mary. 

Thad occupied the lower one on the star- 
board side, while Sam and I were lodged in 
the two opposite. 

The fourth was kept as a spare one in case 
we should have as passenger some officer of 
the army. 

The captain was asleep, and I would not 
have disturbed him for anything of an ordi- 
nary nature, because it was seldom Thad 
indulged in a protracted rest. He con- 
sidered it his duty to be on deck very fre- 
quently during the night, and in fact stood 
watch longer than either Sam or myself. 


110 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

I turned in “all standing” as the sailors 
say, meaning that I did not remove any por- 
tion of my clothing, and it vras as if I had 
hardly stretched myself out at full length 
before slumber overpowered me. 

How long I remained unconscious it is im- 
possible to say ; but to me it seemed as if I 
had hardly closed my eyes before I was 
awakened by heavy pressure upon the throat, 
and on attempting to spring up found myself 
held firmly down. 

For fully a minute after opening my eyes 
it was impossible to so much as guess what 
was taking place, and then as I became ac- 
customed to the gloom I saw sufificient to 
give me a thorough understanding of the 
situation. 

It was one of the soldiers who grasped my 
throat with his left hand, while in his right 
he held a naked knife. 

On the opposite side of the cabin I could 
see two men occupied with Thad, and I 
believed they were Corporal Barnes and the 
cook. 

From the deck came no sound, and even 
though the peril to myself seemed very great 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. m 

my first connected thought was of wonder- 
ment that Sam had not made an outcry, for 
I now knew that the corporal whose duty it 
was to guard well those on board the 
schooner had turned mutineer, most prob- 
ably traitor to his country. 

“Have you got the gag in so there is no 
chance he can slip it?” I heard that villain 
Barnes ask, and the cook replied : 

“Trust me for that part of the work. So 
long as his hands are tied his mouth will be 
closed.” 

“Lash both arms close, and be quick about 
it, for we must get under way at once. If 
the fool hadn’t told us there was good reason 
for going back to the city we might not find 
such smooth sailing in this work.” 

I was minded to cry out for help, believing 
Sam to be on duty above and ignorant of 
what was going on here; but the pressure 
upon my throat was so great that a low 
gurgling was the only result of my eflPorts. 

“What is that cub tryin’ to do?” Barnes 
asked sharply, turning toward the man who 
held me in his grip. 

“I reckon he allowed to give an alarm, but 


112 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

there’s no fear of that, corporal, while I have 
hold of his windpipe,” and the fellow added 
to me, “I’d like to shake the breath out of 
your body, you little whelp. Because of 
having an uncle who is a colonel you think to 
lord it over your betters.” 

I perforce remained silent, and I thought 
of a verity the man would strangle me, so 
vicious was the grasp he had upon my throat. 

“That is done, and I’ll wager my head he 
don’t do more than wink until the lashings 
are taken off,” the cook said in a tone of 
satisfaction, as if such work pleased him 
hugely. 

“Then make haste and get the other one 
trussed up, for we must take advantage of 
the current.” 

As the man came toward me I noted the 
unpleasant fact that the spare berth had an 
occupant, and now knew why we did not 
hear Sam on deck. 

He had most likely been overpowered first, 
and brought below by some of the other 
mutineers in as helpless a condition as the 
captain now was. 

To gag and bind me was but a simple task, 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 113 

half- strangled as I was, and then the scoun- 
drels went on deck. 

The thoughts which came to me as I lay 
there helpless even to make the slightest out- 
cry were so many and painful as to prevent 
me from realizing the distress caused by the 
gag and the many folds of rope which encir- 
cled my body. 

I think the fact foremost in my mind was 
that we three comrades having, as a reward 
for the small part played in the discovery 
of a plot against General Washington, been 
given command of the trimmest schooner to 
be found in the harbor, had, by carelessness, 
lost her before having done any effective 
work, for I knew beyond a question that the 
corporal and his men would not dare return 
to New York after this rascally piece of 
business. 

How severely I blamed myself for not hav- 
ing been more suspicious it is not necessary 
to set down. 

I realized all too keenly that at the first 
sign of insubordination in Barnes he should 
have been put under arrest — that it was my 
duty as second officer to have insisted, in 


114 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

view of what I knew, on his being left at 
Governor’s Island. 

Far better had Colonel Tupper reproved us 
for being too cautious than for us to have 
allowed this thing to take place. 

Now I doubted not but that Barnes had 
joined the American army for the sole pur- 
pose of giving information to the enemy, and 
I also believed the cook to be of the same 
kidney. 

It was positive that at least two of the 
men were loyal to the cause — those two who 
had rowed the captain ashore — but they 
might have been brought over to this treach- 
ery by force, threats or persuasion, and, 
perhaps, were as helpless as we. 

In trying to set down my thoughts when 
I lay there unable to even protest against the 
work of the traitors, I find I have failed most 
deplorably in making plain the distress 
which was mine at that moment. I knew 
Thad and Sam were suffering equally with 
me, and that three more wretched lads could 
not have been found in this country. 

Everything favored the traitors. 

I knew not if Thad had mentioned to the 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


115 


commandant of Fort Defiance the same idea 
which he gave to us on coming aboard, that 
he would carry to New York the information 
given him concerning the British that night, 
if the wind allowed ; but even though he had 
not, the officer, seeing the schooner depart, 
would, in case a breeze sprang up, naturally 
conclude such to be the captain’s intention, 
and therefore no suspicions could be aroused. 

I knew as well as if the scoundrel Barnes 
had explained to me all his bold plot that 
the Laughing Mary would be headed for 
Staten Island, and on her arrival there be 
given up to our enemies. 

What might become of us I made no con- 
jecture. 

At that moment it seemed of little impor- 
tance, since we had thus through careless- 
ness lost the vessel which we should have 
defended with our lives. 

Now and then I could hear the sound of 
stealthy footsteps on deck, and understood 
that the men had taken off their shoes in 
order to move about as silently as possible. 

I heard the creaking of the blocks which 
told that the sails were being hoisted, and 


116 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

waited to feel the movement of the schooner 
that I might know how strongly the wind 
was blowing. 

The breeze was so sliglrt, if indeed there 
was any, that no motion was perceptible to 
us below ; but I knew the Laughing Mary 
must be carried down past the Hook toward 
the British fleet by the current, even though 
not a breath of air filled her sails. 

Distressed alike both in body and mind, I 
could have no very good idea of the passage 
of time ; but it appeared to me as if an hour 
must have passed before we heard aught 
more of the traitors, and then Barnes, with 
his chief assistant, the cook, entered the 
cabin. 

From the fact that they lighted the candle 
I believed we were some distance past Fort 
Defiance. 

The corporal had evidently come below for 
the purpose of making certain we were yet 
bound securely. 

He looked to the ropes upon our limbs, and 
then, standing in the middle of the cabin as 
if we might know he was addressing all three, 
said with a swagger: 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 117 

“By this time to-morrow Tupper will un- 
derstand that he was not as wise as he 
thought himself to he, when he gave the 
command of this^ craft to hoys. Did you 
think men would he willing to put up with 
your airs and graces? Well, they wouldn’t, 
as you have seen. I held out as long as any 
one could have done, and the result is that 
the so-called American army has lost the 
fleetest schooner in the harhor. But don’t 
think that my plan ends with taking posses- 
sion of the vessel ; I have some old scores to 
settle with you fellows before you are turned 
over as prisoners to Lord Howe, and will 
take good care to square the account in full.’’ 

“What is the satisfaction in threatening 
when they can’t answer?” the cook asked 
with a grin. “Wait till we are far enough 
down the harhor, and then take out the gags. 
I never enjoyed whipping a cur if I couldn’t 
hear him howl.” 

“There’s no harm in giving them something 
to think about,” Barnes replied as he threw 
himself on the locker just beneath my bunk. 
“There wasn’t as much danger in the scheme 
as the men seemed to think.” 


118 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

“It has not amounted to more than the 
baggin’ of three kids, and could as well have 
been done any time while we were layin’ off 
Grand Battery.” 

“True; but then we should have gained 
nothing more than the possession of this 
craft. Now we prevent the news of Lord 
Howe’s movements being carried to the city, 
and that is a trick worth waiting for.” 

“I thought you agreed that we should not 
concern ourselves about the British, once we 
got possession of the Laughing Mary,” and 
now the cook spoke as if he was growing 
angry. 

“I haven’t said anything to the contrary.” 

“But it seems as if you meant it, otherwise 
why crow about what these fellows won’t be 
able to tell? I have no wish to give up a 
craft like this to the British, who will take 
her with not so much as a ‘thank you.’ We 
have a chance now to make a brave venture, 
and I for one shan’t agree to turning her over 
to either army.” 

“Don’t be a fool! We must at least make 
a show of doin’ so, otherwise how do you 
count on our bein’ able to get through the 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 119 

fleet? It is not likely they will allow us to 
sail directly by without so much as a hail.” 

“I told you before we begun the work that 
I had my suspicions as to whether you would 
play fair or not,” the cook cried as he 
stepped directly in front of the corporal. “I 
came into the scheme with the understand- 
ing that once we got possession of the 
schooner we should hold her.” 

“And turn pirate, eh?” 

“We have got as much right to start a war 
of our own as any one else, and there is 
many a rich prize to be had just now, without 
running the risk of being called pirates. Who 
shall know whether we are sailing on our 
own account or for this little government 
which has just sprung up? Have a care, 
Corporal Barnes, how you try to play me 
false ! I am no boy like the fellow who was 
placed in command of the schooner, and 
won’t be trifled with!” 

“Nobody has any idea of trifling, you 
fool!” Barnes replied sulkily, and a great 
joy sprang up in my heart as I understood 
that he was afraid of the cook, for I hoped, 
although I knew not how it might be com- 


120 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

passed, that if these two ringleaders in the 
traitorous work should fall out, there might 
be an opportunity for us to regain what we 
had lost through carelessness. 

The villains continued to converse for some 
time, the cook insisting that the Laughing 
Mary should be used by them as a free- 
booter, and Barnes not daring to say him 
nay, although it evidently was his purpose to 
deliver her up to the British admiral. 

As I reflected upon the matter while they 
were yet in angry discussion, my new-born 
hopes faded gradually away, for I did not 
believe they could take the schooner through 
the British fleet unchallenged. 

As it seemed to me, the least they could 
expect was that the vessel would be hove-to, 
and then some explanation must be made, 
after which there seemed little doubt but 
that she would be seized as a prize. 

The cook worked himself up into such a 
fury that Barnes finally promised most 
solemnly he would do all he could in further- 
ance of the piratical scheme, and swore that 
the thought of breaking the promise given 
had never come into his mind. 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


121 


“I will trust you just so long as you are 
within reach of my arm,” the cook said 
threateni gly, when, the discussion having 
come to an end, the two men arose to go on 
deck; “and at the first show of treachery 
your life shall pay the forfeit even though I 
swing for it.” 

“Don’t make a bigger fool of yourself than 
is necessary,” Barnes grumbled. “My word 
has been passed, and that is enough.” 

“Not for me. I shall take good care you 
don’t play me false.” 

Then the traitor and would-be pirate went 
on deck, and from' the fact that there was 
evidently no attempt at preserving silence, I 
knew our little schooner was beyond the 
reach of the American guns — that it was only 
a question as to whether she would become 
the prize of the British admiral or a free- 
booter. 


122 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


CHAPTER VII. 

FRIGHTENED TRAITORS. 

When we were alone once more even 
anxiety of mind did not prevent me from 
realizing most keenly the agony caused by 
the gag and bonds. 

It was impossible to move hand or foot, 
and save I had rolled out' on to the floor, my 
body must perforce remain motionless. 

Breathing seemed a laborious process, and 
there came to my mind the thought that 
unless I soon had relief suffocation must 
ensue, although most likely a fellow would 
have remained alive very many hours under 
such circumstances. 

The difficulty of breathing was more a 
trick of the imagination than a fact. 

So great was my bodily pain that I ceased 
to bewail the loss of the schooner, which was 
in fact more important than the lives of us 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 123 

three lads, and gave no heed to the agony 
which my companions must also be enduring. 

It was only to self that I gave any thought, 
and when, perhaps half an hour after Barnes 
and the cook had left us, one of the soldiers 
came into the cabin for apparently no other 
purpose than to see if we were secure, I 
implored him, as eloquently as was possible 
with my eyes, for relief. 

The man — Joseph Clark from New Hamp- 
shire — understood that I was in great pain, 
and with an expression of sympathy on his 
face came toward the bunk. 

“I reckon you would like to have that 
block taken out of your mouth?” he asked, 
and I nodded as energetically as I could 
under the circumstances. 

“The orders are, if it so be we’re obliged 
to take orders from the corporal now he has 
ceased to be a soldier by turning traitor, 
that you three shall not be interfered with 
in any way ; but if you promise solemnly to 
make no outcry I’ll do what I can toward 
easin’ up on you a bit.” 

Again I nodded my head, and a most in- 


124 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

tense relief was mine when he quickly 
removed the gag. 

For a moment or more it was impossible to 
speak, so cramped had my jaws become, and 
when I did succeed in doing so it was in a 
mumbling sort of fashion, like one whose 
tongue has been thickened by strong drink. 

Then, knowing by my own experience that 
my comrades were suffering, I implored him 
to relieve them in so far as he had me. 

“I answer for it they remain silent, as I 
have promised to do, and shall make no re- 
sistance if the moment comes when, for your 
own safety, you think it necessary to replace 
the bonds.” 

“It may not be safe, this running counter 
to those who claim to be my masters,” he 
said timidly, and I, eager that my comrades 
should be speedily relieved, added, with an 
inward prayer that I might succeed in con- 
vincing this soldier : 

“Look you, Clark, even though this 
mutiny now seems successful, it may yet 
miscarry, and the time come when you will 
need a friend, for should the fortunes of war 
throw you into the hands of those whom 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 125 

Barnes has betrayed nothing less than hang- 
ing can be the penalty. Then you might be 
served a good turn by having friends in us. 
Besides, I know full well your heart is not in 
this work.” 

“Indeed it isn’t!” was the emphatic reply. 
“When the subject was first broached I re- 
fused to have anything to do with the plot, 
and held out until nearly the whole squad 
had been brought over, though never until 
to-night have we known it was the purpose of 
the corporal and the cook to deliver the 
schooner to the British, or turn freebooters. 
When Barnes opened the matter to us it was 
with the idea that while on the voyage we 
would make you prisoners to be delivered to 
Colonel Tupper, on the grounds that you had 
exceeded lawful authority.” 

I was not willing the man should defend 
himself at any length while my comrades 
were in such pain, and interrupted him 
impatiently by saying : 

cannot believe your heart was ever in 
such a matter, and if you would save the 
lives of Thad and Sam I implore you take 
the gags from their mouths. I think another 


126 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

half-hour of such suffering would have killed 
me. Surely we can do you no harm now, 
the schooner is so far from the Hook.” 

Clark turned as if to grant my request, and 
then stopped an instant. 

“Do you promise they shall make no out- 
cry, and that all hands will remain silent 
when Barnes comes back?” 

“I do, and if either of them refuses when 
it is possible to speak, you will have but 
little trouble in rendering us as helpless 
as before.” 

He hesitated no longer, and by the deep 
sighs which came from my comrades a 
moment later, I understood how great was 
their relief. 

Thad must have hoped some one of the 
squad would prove a friend, and been laying 
his plans accordingly, for he said immedi- 
ately the cramp in his jaws had so far sub- 
sided that it was possible to speak: 

“You have done us a turn that shan’t be 
forgotten, Clark, and just now perhaps it is 
all you can do. I have no question but what 
you said to Eliphalet be true, and implore 
that you consider well all which may result 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 127 

from this mutiny. Even though the British- 
ers reward you richly for the capture of the 
schooner, no one can return to his native 
country, however soon the war might come 
to an end. Think you what the men of New 
Hampshire, who have thus far played a 
brave part in our struggle, would say should 
you present yourself at home after having 
proven traitor to the cause.” 

“Look here, captain, there’s no need of 
talk like that, for I have turned the matter 
over in my mind a dozen times since you 
were made prisoners. I am only one of 
seven, and as powerless as you are at this 
minute.” 

“That I can understand, but the time may 
come when it will be possible to render 
signal service, and I implore you to consider 
well all which this traitorous behavior may 
mean. Don’t allow yourself to be led by a 
renegade like Barnes, for even though you 
should be received in a friendly way by the 
Britishers, there is never a man among them 
who will not despise you for the part that 
has been played. An honest enemy is re- 
spected; a traitor will ever be hated by all, 


128 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

even those whom he benefits by his villainous 
acts.” 

I believe of a verity Thad would have won 
Clark over then and there had he been 
allowed to continue ; but just at that moment 
the man’s name was called loudly from the 
deck, and he hastened up the companion- 
way, glad no doubt to put an end to a con- 
versation which could not have been pleasing 
to him under the circumstances. 

A sudden heel of the schooner as Clark 
disappeared overturned the candle which had 
only been fastened to the swinging -table by 
its own tallow, and told us that the breeze 
was increasing in force. 

“In what direction was the wind when you 
came below?” Thad asked of me, and Sam 
replied : 

“I was the last on deck, and then it was a 
little south of west.” 

“If it still holds from that point they may 
have some trouble in making the fieet. How 
were you overpowered?” 

“The traitors crept up behind and felled 
me to the deck. While half- stunned, they 
gagged and brought me below,” Sam replied. 


CAPTURE OP THE LAUGHING MARY. 129 

“I relieved ’Liphalet at about midnight, and 
during half an hour after he turned in, heard 
no sound from the hold. I was standing 
amidships leaning over the port rail when 
there came a noise as of some one creeping 
across the deck ; but before I could turn the 
blow was struck. Then, when I had been 
trussed up in this fashion, the whole gang 
came below, and I reckon you know the rest. 
Had I done my duty this evening it would 
not have been in Barnes’ power to work such 
mischief!” 

“What do you mean by your duty?” Thad 
asked sharply. 

“I should have insisted that you put him 
under arrest, for I was convinced the fellow 
had it in his heart to work us some harm.” 

“You surely cannot blame yourself because 
of my neglect. Both of you told me enough 
to warrant my sending him ashore at Govern- 
or’s Island; but by so doing it would have 
shown I was unable to enforce discipline on 
the schooner, and I did not feel willing to let 
it appear as if I was afraid of a single man, 
I am the one who is at fault.” 

“The question of who has been careless 


130 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


can be settled later,” I said irritably. “In- 
stead of wasting your breath over what may 
be discussed as well at any other time, we 
had better decide upon some course of action, 
for when Barnes comes into the cabin again 
I reckon these gags will be replaced.” 

“Much good any decision we may come 
at will do,” Sam grumbled, and by the tone 
of his voice I understood he had no hope 
we would be able to better our condition. 
“Barnes has us well in his power, and before 
sunrise we shall be prisoners in the British 
fleet.” 

“That is not so certain,” Thad replied. 
“The cook has it in his mind to turn free- 
booter, which does not accord with the cor- 
poral’s plans, and between the two there is a 
chance matters may veer to our benefit.” 

“But it’s a precious poor chance.” 

“It is better to hope for the best than 
anticipate the worst.” 

“Unless we have assistance from some one 
of the mutineers, which is not probable, what 
can we do? At present our tongues are the 
only members of our body we can so much 


as move. 


CAPTURE OP THE LAUGHING MARY. 131 

“It isn’t certain ” 

Thad was interrupted by a dark form 
which appeared at the companionway, and 
as the mutineer descended I believed that, 
our voices having been overheard, we should 
be forced to submit to the gags again. 

It was Barnes who had come below, and 
with an exclamation of impatience because 
the cabin was in darkness owing to the fact 
that the candle had been overturned when 
the schooner heeled under the breeze, he 
groped his way toward the swinging -table. 

Before he could find that for which he evi- 
dently sought, a second mutineer entered the 
cabin and said quickly, as if he would have a 
disagreeable matter settled without delay : 

“Look here, corporal, I took the gags out 
of those boys’ mouths.” 

“You did?” and Barnes stepped forward 
menacingly, craning his head that he might 
distinguish the face of the speaker. 

“It’s Clark,” the man replied, understand- 
ing the meaning of the movement. 

“What right had you to interfere with the 
prisoners?” 

“The right which any man has who does 


132 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

not care to have murder done where he is 
concerned. Those boys were nigh to being 
strangled, and on their promising not to make 
an outcry I gave them a chance to breathe.” 

“So you are turning traitor! Be careful 
what you’re about, Clark! This is a time 
when life don’t count for much, and you may 
come to the end of your rope too suddenly.” 

“As for turning traitor, that I did when I 
agreed to your plans, so we won’t call any 
harsh names after the pot and kettle fashion. 
The understanding was that no blood should 
be spilled.” 

“Nor would there have been had these 
cubs quietly choked to death.” 

“What we have done is too serious a mat- 
ter to warrant our quibbling with words. 
You shall play fair, Barnes, according to the 
agreement made this evening, or you’ll find 
I’m not the only member of the squad whom 
you can count as an enemy.” 

“So you are threatening, eh? Better wait 
till we are out of the woods, my man.” 

“I threaten in order that we shall get out, 
and warn you to hold to the agreement.” 

“In the same way you have done by sneak- 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 133 

ing down here, loosening the prisoners with- 
out my knowledge?” 

“I came because yon wanted to know if 
they were all right, and found them near to 
death. No harm can come of removing the 
gags, because though they should yell from 
now out, who save Britishers or traitors 
would hear them?” 

“Well, what do you want now?” the cor- 
poral asked as Clark paused. 

“Nothing, except to make sure you don’t 
kill those boys.” 

For a moment I believed the leader in this 
treacherous work was about to spring upon 
his subordinate; but he evidently thought 
better of it, realizing he was not yet on such 
terms of friendship with the cook that he 
could alford to quarrel with any of his squad, 
and said in what he likely counted should be 
a friendly tone : 

“It is all right, Clark. I’ve got no reason 
to kill the cubs, even though they have 
lorded it over their betters till an honest 
man grew sick at the sight of ’em. As you 
say, there is no longer any danger of their 
giving an alarm to those who might interfere 


134 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

with our plans, and perhaps it is well they be 
allowed to breathe comfortably. Now that 
the matter is settled, you can go on deck.” 

“I am as willing to stay here,” Clark replied 
gravely, and this sign of insubordination 
against the leader in the plot heartened me 
wonderfully, for I began to believe should an 
opportunity present itself, the soldier would 
make amends for what he had already done, 
by aiding us. 

Even in the darkness I could understand 
that Barnes found it difficult to refrain from 
replying, but he did succeed, and turned all 
his attention to the tinder-box, by means of 
which he soon had the candle relighted. 

Could I have killed the fellow as he stood 
there looking triumphantly first at the cap- 
tain and Sam, and then at me, I am certain 
at no time in the future would I have be- 
lieved myself guilty of a crime in putting an 
end to his worse than useless life. 

But I was unable to move hand or foot, and 
he for the moment powerful. 

Clark had thrown himself on the locker 
with the- air of one who intends to remain 
whether he be welcome or not, and Barnes, 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 135 

apparently giving no heed to the man, ad- 
dressed himself to Thad. 

“Those who crow loudest do not always 
crow longest,” he said jeeringly. “You fel- 
lows lorded it over us, who are your betters, 
and now the tables have been turned. I am 
the master, and such a one as you could 
never be.” 

“For which I am humbly thankful,” Thad 
replied decidedly, and Clark laughed bois- 
terously, much to the corporal’s annoyance. 

I believed the traitorous villain was about 
to gratify his mean heart by taunting us 
while we were helpless, and nerved myself 
to remain silent, determined not to be 
goaded into an ill-advised word, for much 
might depend upon our language in influenc- 
ing Clark’s wavering mind. 

It is needless to set down here all the 
renegade said. 

He accused us of arrogance, of undue 
pride because we had been put in command 
of the Laughing Mary, and even of a desire 
to injure him; but only once during this 
tirade was he interrupted, when Thad said 
mildly but yet flrmly : 


136 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

“In your heart you know, Barnes, that all 
you have said is false. From the first you 
have intended to betray the cause so far as 
was in your power, and accused us of these 
things simply in order to infiuence men who 
would have remained true to their country 
instead of playing the part of traitors.” 

This was not the sort of talk the corporal 
was willing Clark should hear, for it was too 
true to be palatable, and he yelled as he 
made a menacing gesture : 

“Hold your tongue, you whelp, or ITl put 
it out of your power to so much as whimper!” 

Thad made no attempt at replying, and 
this submission angered the corporal even 
more than words would have done. 

Stepping quickly to the side of the bunk I 
believed the fellow intended to strike Thad, 
helpless though he was, and Clark must have 
fancied the same, for he sprang to his feet 
instantly, when, noting the movement, 
Barnes cried: 

“Keep in your place, my bantam! Don’t 
forget that I am master, and you may go too 
far.” 

“Have a care. Corporal Barnes,” the man 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 137 

replied angrily. “My comrades won’t stand 
idly by if it is known that I tried to prevent 
you from striking a helpless lad. Even 
though I am in this miserable business which 
may lead us all to the gallows, I don’t intend 
to countenance such cowardly work.” 

I was beginning to hope the two might 
come to blows, believing the members of the 
squad would take their comrade’s part rather 
than the corporal’s, but, and at the time it 
seemed unfortunate, there came a diversion 
which caused both men to forget their cause 
of anger. 

The cook’s voice was heard from the deck 
calling imperatively for the corporal, and, 
as Barnes delayed answering for an instant, 
we heard one of the soldiers cry in tones of 
terror : 

“We shall be aground, or, what is worse, 
drift back to the fort if something isn’t done 
speedily!” 

Barnes sprang on deck followed by Clark, 
and then came the noise of men running to 
and fro ; blows on the deck as coils of rope 
were thrown down; the creaking of the cord- 
age, and the Laughing Mary heeled before 


138 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

what was likely a sudden squall of wind until 
I was near to rolling out of the bunk. 

“Perhaps a thunder gust is coming up,” 
Thad suggested; “otherwise we shouldn’t 
have so much of a breeze, for there were no 
signs of a storm when I came below.” 

“And if it should happen while the wind 
remains as it was when they made me pris- 
oner, the Laughing Mary may not be in the 
possession of the British as soon as the cor- 
poral fancies,” Sam said exultantly, while I, 
thinking of the danger to myself, added : 

“With no sailors on deck she is as likely to 
run aground as to drift back toward Fort 
Defiance.” 

“Better she were swamped, and we with 
her, than that Barnes succeed in his treach- 
erous work,” Thad said so emphatically I 
could have no question but that he would 
willingly yield up his life if thereby the plans 
of the traitors could be thwarted. 

It was difficult for us to say, with only the 
trampling to and fro above to give an inkling, 
in what position was the schooner. 

We knew as she heeled over until the lar- 
board rail must have been near to the edge 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


139 


of the water, and then recovered herself, that 
the little craft had been put about, but on 
what tack we could not say. 

Then came cries of alarm, and a moment 
later Barnes entered the cabin. 

“If I take you on deck can we count on 
your telling us what to do?” he asked of 
Thad, and the latter replied so promptly 
and so bravely that I loved him as never 
before: 

“Not while I am your prisoner.” 

“Then the vessel is like to go down, and 
you in her.” 

“I am content that she should, so it spoils 
your traitorous plans.” 

“We shall be ashore here!” the cook 
shouted from the companionway, and I could 
have laughed because there was so much 
terror in his voice. “Bring the captain on 
deck!” 

“Will you go if I set you free?” Barnes 
asked vigorously. 

“If you release my comrades and agree to 
obey orders, but not unless.” 

“You are a fool! You will drown here like 
a rat!” 


140 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

“And I am willing to if you drown with 
me, you traitor!” 

Barnes ran up the companionway like one 
frantic with fear. 

We heard him shout first one order and 
then another so rapidly that none could have 
been obeyed even though skillful sailors were 
on deck, and then there came a sudden shock 
which caused the Laughing Mary to groan 
in every joint of her timbers, and for an 
instant all was silent. 

That she had gone aground we knew full 
well, and, leaning over the edge of the bunk, 
I tried to peer into the gloom, expecting 
each moment to hear the gurgling of waters 
which would tell us we were soon to be 
drowned, but yet, and it seems strange even 
at this day, there was no fear of death in my 
heart. 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 14I 


CHAPTER VIII. 

A CLEVER TRICK. 

Although certain the Laughing Mary was 
aground, and we in a helpless condition 
unable to make any move toward insuring 
our own safety, there was much to hearten 
us in the matter. 

It was evident from the shock that she had 
neither gone on the rocks nor been stove 
very badly, and therefore not impossible she 
might be gotten afloat. 

“We’re ashore, and perhaps wrecked,’^ 
Thad said, forced almost to shout because of 
the tumult on the deck, “and according to 
my way of thinking a good deal better off 
than if the plan of either Barnes or the cook 
had been carried out.” 

“I do not see how our condition has been 
bettered, for the chances are ten to one that 
the schooner will All where she is, and unless 


143 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

the pirates carry ns on deck we stand a good 
chance of being drowned,” Sam shouted, but 
there was no longer either fear or despond- 
ency in his tone. 

I fancied we had taken the shore head on, 
because the surf appeared to beat directly 
upon the schooner’s stern, and also from the 
fact that we had no very great list either to 
starboard or larboard, but the aftermost part 
of the vessel was so depressed that it would 
have been like climbing uphill to go from 
the companionway to the table. 

It was as if each of the traitorous muti- 
neers was trying to outscream the other, and 
after we had listened to the shrieking a 
moment, trying in vain to distinguish the 
words, Sam suggested: 

“We must have gone aground on some por- 
tion of the shore that is inhabited. Those 
fellows appear to be crying for help, which 
they would not do unless there were signs 
of life near about.” 

“I’ll venture to say the cook would yell if 
he was in the middle of the Atlantic Ocean, 
for the fellow is a rank coward if there ever 
was one,” Thad replied, and added a moment 


CAPTURE OP THE LAUGHING MARY. 143 

later: “There doesn’t seem to be any water 
coming in, and if she was strained badly we 
should see it here first. I only hope we may 
be able to make some sort of a trade with 
them.” 

A horrible thought came to me at this 
moment, and I gave it words. 

“Their first idea will be to leave the 
schooner, fearing she may go down, and if 
they should do so, allowing us to remain 
where we are, it might be a case of starving 
to death.” 

Thad and Sam suddenly fell silent; most 
likely that which I suggested had not been 
anticipated by them, and the possibility was 
decidedly unpleasant. 

How long the uproar on the deck continued 
uninterrupted, I know not. It might equally 
well have been five minutes or twenty before 
the mutineers showed signs of remembering 
us, and then Clark came below. 

“Where are you?” he shouted nervously, 
as if fearing he might be entering the pres- 
ence of death. 

“Here where you left us,” Sam replied, 
“What’s being done on deck?” 


144 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

“Nothing to any effect. Barnes and the 
cook are acting like crazy men.” 

“Do you know where we have gone 
ashore?” 

“No; it is so dark because of the clouds 
that you can’t see an inch before your nose, 
and if I am not mistaken the storm has but 
just begun.” 

Even as Clark spoke a vivid flash of light- 
ning illumined the cabin, almost instantly 
followed by a crash of thunder that seemed 
to shake the stranded schooner from stem to 
stern. 

“Can you say which shore we are on?” 
Thad asked as soon as it was possible to 
make his voice heard, for the warring of the 
elements had increased the terrors of those 
above, causing a fresh outburst of cries and 
imprecations. 

“It may be that flash of lightning showed 
something, but when I came below we 
couldn’t see the land, although the schooner 
must have driven high upon it. The cook, 
so scared as not to know what he was doing, 
attempted to launch the boat just after we 
struck, with the result that she was stove.” 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 145 

“What does Barnes count on doing?” 

“I don’t believe he can answer that ques- 
tion even to himself. When Leggett was 
drowned ” 

“Drowned!” I cried in astonishment. 

“Yes; he was helping the cook, and in the 
boat at the time she was stove. Of course 
he must have been drowned, for we didn’t 
hear of him save for one cry. After the 
poor fellow went under the corporal lost his 
head entirely, and not until I insisted upon 
its being done were the sails lowered.” 

“If Barnes isn’t capable of doing anything, 
why don’t some of you take the matter in 
hand?” 

“That’s what I’m here to do,” Clark re- 
plied, as if having forgotten the purpose of 
his visit and the question had but just been 
recalled to mind. “I want you who know 
something about such work to come on 
deck.” 

“I should have been there long before this 
if it had been possible to move.” 

“Will you come now if I take off the 
ropes?” 

“Is there any bargain you intend to make 


146 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

in payment for giving us our liberty?” Thad 
asked sternly, and the soldier replied in a 
tone of perplexity : 

“I don’t know what you mean.” 

“Do you expect any promise from us, other 
than that we shall set about doing what we 
can toward saving the vessel and your own 
useless lives?” 

“We could not expect you to do more.” 

“And you have no reason to suppose we 
will do even that much. But what I am 
driving at is that once we are free it will be 
a dangerous piece of business if any of you 
should try to make a prisoner of me again. 
After we are on deck it will be your lives or 
ours, if you attempt to interfere with our 
movements in any way.” 

“You needn’t be afraid of my trying to do 
anything of the kind, and I can speak for one 
of my mates. As matters look now we’ve 
but precious little show of getting on shore 
unaided, and I don’t want any more part in 
such work as has already been done on 
board this schooner.” 

“Does Barnes know of the proposition you 
are making?” 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


“I told him; but it is a question whether 
he understood or not.” 

“Cast off these ropes, and we’ll go on 
deck.” 

Clark made no delay in obeying the 
order. 

The thunder was almost continuous, and 
the lightning came so rapidly as to illumine 
the cabin, save at brief intervals. 

It was such a storm as I had never known, 
and little wonder that the mutineers were 
ready to ask assistance even from those they 
had injured. 

Once the lashings were removed it was 
necessary we should chafe our arms and legs 
vigorously several moments before it was 
possible to use them, for the ropes had been 
drawn -so tightly as to stop the circulation of 
blood, and we were temporarily crippled. 

Thad was the first to regain the use of his 
limbs, and I hobbled after him as he as- 
cended the companionway, for there was in 
my mind the fear lest Barnes, seeing we had 
been set free, should make an attempt to 
drive us back, in which case I was deter- 
mined to do battle even to the death. 


148 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

At this moment life seemed to be of but 
little account. 

Thanks to the flashes of lightning we could 
distinguish surrounding objects with reason- 
able distinctness, and before many seconds 
had passed there was in my heart a hymn of 
thanksgiving that He who watches even the 
sparrows fall had not permitted serious 
disaster to come upon us. 

True it was that the Laughing Mary was 
hard and fast aground ; but she could not have 
been in a more easy and safe position had 
she been steered by careful hands to her 
present resting place. 

On what shore we were I knew not; but it 
seemed certain there were no inhabitants 
near by, otherwise we must have seen some- 
thing in the shape of houses, and looking 
over the rail when the lightning was most 
vivid, I learned that the little vessel rested 
on a sandy beach. 

It was not likely she had so much as 
scraped the paint from her bottom. The surf 
which beat against the stern, sounding so 
heavy while we were in the cabin, was a mat- 
ter which need cause little uneasiness, for as 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


149 


yet the waves were not running high, and the 
tide was falling every moment. 

“She is as sound as a nut, and save for 
the labor of launching her, no worse olf than 
when we left port,” Thad whispered to me, 
gripping my hand in token of thankfulness. 

The mutineers did not appear to be aston- 
ished at seeing us after we had been made 
such close prisoners. In fact, I question 
whether several of them were really aware 
of our being on deck, so frenzied were they 
with terror. 

Barnes was running forward and aft like a 
madman, giving heed neither to his comrades 
nor us, while the cook, his sallow face 
illumined by the lightning until it was the 
color of sulphur, stood in the galley trem- 
bling so violently that I could see the quaking 
of his limbs even while I remained near the 
companionway aft. 

Sam joined us before I had taken in all the 
surroundings, and an exclamation of surprise 
and joy burst from his lips as he realized our 
position. 

“They simply let the wind put her ashore,” 
he said. 


150 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

“ She must have been headed fair for the 
land with all sails full, to have gone so high 
on,” I suggested, and then came the question 
in my mind as to how near might be the 
British fleet. 

Now more eagerly than ever I scanned the 
waters when the lights in the heavens 
flashed out brightly. 

I could see no forest of spars as would 
have been the case if Lord Howe’s fleet was 
within our range of vision, and even had the 
darkness been unrelieved by the lightning, 
the riding-lights of the warships should have 
been seen were they within a circle of three 
miles — perhaps more. 

“We are as like to be above the Hook as 
below it,” Thad said, and I understood that 
he also had been searching with his eyes for 
the enemy. 

“There is no knowing how many times the 
schooner was put about after the breeze 
freshened enough to scare the traitors, and 
from whatever point they lost command of 
her she must have scudded in the same 
direction as the wind. Allowing that it held 
on from the same direction as when you were 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


151 


on deck, we should be somewhere near the 
Hook or Gravesend.” 

“Wherever we may be it is necessary to 
wait for daylight and the tide,” Sam sug- 
gested. “There is nothing we can do, nor 
any danger of the schooner’s breaking up, for 
in an hour or more she will be lying high 
and dry.” 

“And between now and daylight we have 
considerable work before us,” Thad said 
cheerily, as if all our troubles were at an 
end. “Once these villains realize that there 
is nothing of which to be afraid, they will 
turn their attention to us in order to save 
their own necks, and when that moment 
comes we must be fully prepared. Just now 
they believe death to be close at hand, and 
we may do much as we please.” 

“If you have any plan in your head, ex- 
plain it,” and I could not prevent myself 
from speaking in a tone of irritation, so 
nervous was I lest the opportunity we now 
had to regain our liberty should be lost 
through our own negligence. 

Thad reflected so long before speaking 
that I was nigh to railing at him because of 


152 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

his moderation, and when he finally ex- 
plained I could have thrown my arms 
around him for very joy, so perfect was the 
plan proposed. 

“The soldiers’ arms, and all the ammuni- 
tion are of course in the hold. These must 
be secured first, and once that has been done 
we three will stand a better chance in case 
of a battle. Then we have but to remain 
together, and if the Laughing Mary is not in 
our possession, or we in position to take her 
whenever we choose after sunrise, it will be 
only because the British fieet are nearer than 
we now think. Sam, you go to the pump; 
make all possible noise while working it. 
There is likely bilge -water enough to give a 
brave show of a leak. ’Liphalet, take one of 
the axes, follow me into the hold, and then 
pay no attention to what I am doing ; but 
burst your way through the bulkhead into 
the cabin. That done, help me carry the 
weapons and ammunition aft.” 

There was no need for him to explain more ; 
I understood how readily we might gain the 
whip hand providing the traitors did not take 
it into their heads to follow us to the hold. 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 153 

and I had little fear of any save Clark, who 
appeared to be the coolest-headed among 
them all. 

As I read over what is here set down it is 
evident I have failed signally in trying to 
picture the scene. 

One would suppose from the words that 
while my comrade and I had been talking 
the Laughing Mary was resting quietly on 
the sands, with nothing save the lightning 
to cause alarm. 

The reality was far different, and wild in 
the extreme to one not accustomed to such 
things. 

The beating of the surf against the 
schooner’s stern, while not dangerous, was 
so loud as to give a landsman the idea that 
the timbers were being battered. The wind 
swept across the deck, tossing wildly every 
loose end of rope until it appeared as if the 
rigging was in tatters, and the rain seemed 
to come in sheets. 

One needed to know something of seaman- 
ship to understand that all this apparent con- 
fusion was nothing more serious than noise. 

When you add to the tumult of the storm 


154 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY, 

and the waves the shrieking of the terrified 
traitors, for they had not ceased their out- 
cries save when forced to do so from sheer 
exhaustion, it can be better understood why 
they should be in a panic of fear while we 
were as calm as I have represented. 

Once Thad had mapped out his plan we 
lost no time in carrying it into execution. 

Held in straps under the overhanging roof 
of the cabin were axes, and one of these I 
unloosed as Thad shouted in a voice well 
calculated to increase rather than allay the 
terror of our late captors : 

“Get to the pumps, Sam! Our lives may 
depend upon it! Follow me, Eliphalet, and 
work as you never have before! We have 
only to keep the schooner above water until 
daylight, and then all may be well!” 

Even though the situation was so fraught 
with danger to ourselves — or would be when 
the mutineers came to their senses — I failed 
to keep a sober face- as I dashed wildly for- 
ward to obey the order, for the idea of keep- 
ing the schooner above water when she could 
not have been driven, by force of man deeper 
than she was excited my mirth. 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 155 

As we descended the ladder which had 
been built from the deck to the hold for the 
accommodation of the soldiers, Clark shouted 
in a frenzied tone : 

“Do you want any help? What can we do 
down there?” 

“Nothing. Only a sailor can be of any use 
here ; but those who are willing may tail on 
to the pump with Sam, for he’ll need plenty 
of help between now and daylight.” 

There was no time for idle words just then, 
much as I would have liked to congratulate 
my comrade on the success of his plan. 

In this portion of the schooner the glare of 
the lightning did not penetrate, and we were 
forced to grope around in dense darkness, 
fearing to spend such time as would be nec- 
essary to make a light lest some of the 
traitors should come below. 

I felt my way aft toward the bulkhead, 
giving no heed to Thad’s movements, and 
there by sense of touch found that portion 
of the planking which I believed would offer 
the least resistance to my efforts. 

Owing to the thunder and the beating of 
the surf against the stern, I doubt if the 


156 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


blows of the ax sounded in the ears of those 
on deck louder than the tapping of a ham- 
mer, and I struck right and left, cutting deep 
into the timbers at every blow — making no 
attempt at stifling the noise. 

I don’t think there is alive to-day any lad 
who could perform more quickly or more 
deftly Thad’s portion of the task than he 
did. 

That which he had set himself to do was 
far more difiicult than my work, for I had 
simply to chop away at the timbers, and if a 
blow was made amiss it mattered little, 
while he must grope about in the darkness 
so black it was as if one could feel it, in 
search of the weapons, with no knowledge 
regarding their whereabouts. 

Yet before I had half hewn my way 
through the bulkhead he brought an armful 
of powder-horns and shot-pouches, together 
with three or four muskets, laying down the 
whole at my feet as he whispered encourage 
ingly: 

“Everything is favoring us, ’Liphalet. I 
doubt if the blows of your ax can be heard 
on deck, and before those stupids gain an 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 157 

idea of our plan we shall be prepared to meet 
them.” 

There seemed no question but that we 
should sueceed in our purpose and by morn- 
ing be in possession, or prepared to take pos- 
session whenever we chose, of the Laughing 
Mary. 

But even then we would only be masters 
of a stranded schooner located, it might be, 
within a short distance of the British fleet, in 
which case we should soon be made prisoners 
again, for at the best it would require much 
time and labor to move the little vessel from 
her jesting place. 

However, I tried to put these thoughts 
from me, resolving to think only of the 
present needs, and determined to get the 
upper hands of the traitors whatever might 
be the cost. 

Before Thad brought the second load I had 
effected such an entrance as would permit of 
my passing through the bulkhead after some 
difficulty, and clambering into the cabin, 
taking my ax with me, as can be fancied, lest 
it might serve one of the mutineers for a 
weapon, I stood there while my comrade 


158 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

handed me the spoils he had collected until, 
as we firmly believed, all the muskets and 
ammunition of the soldiers had been removed 
from the hold. 

“Now strike a light and see what you can 
do toward barricading the hole you have just 
made,” Thad ordered. “I am going on deck.” 

“But it will arouse suspicion if you go 
back alone and a light is made in the cabin 
by me immediately afterward.” 

“I warrant you the cowards on deck will 
never think of the matter — certainly not 
till after they have gotten over their scare in 
a measure. By that time we care not how 
much is known of our work.” 

“There are three axes on deck which 
should be looked after, and the capstan 
bars ” 

“ITl see to them. Stay here in the cabin 
till I call, and load the weapons as soon as 
you have lighted the candles.” 

Although it has taken long in the telling, I 
question if Thad and I were in the hold more 
than ten minutes, and during this time the 
storm continued with unabated fury; but 
the tumult on deck had subsided. 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 159 

The traitors were either recovering from 
their fright or had become benumbed with 
terror. 

The clang of the pump could be heard 
above the din of the surf, and while using 
the tinder-box I laughed as heartily as 
though there were no danger menacing, at 
the thought of those valiant soldiers turned 
pirates, toiling at the pumps to free a 
stranded schooner from bilge water. 

After the candle was lighted I loaded three 
of the muskets, and stored the others, to- 
gether with the ammunition, in my bunk. 

It was a very respectable armory, the pos- 
session of which made us masters of the 
situation, unless I was much mistaken in the 
temper of the traitors. 

While they were the possessors of firearms 
and we unarmed, the whole, boiling of them 
could be very courageous ; but now I fancied 
that even a show of the unloaded muskets 
would bring a panic upon them, and my 
mirth increased until it was almost boister- 
ous when Sam came down the companion- 
wayo 

“You are making merry, ’Liphalet, even 


160 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

though we are ashore and with a crew of 
mutineers aboard.” 

“One can well afford to be merry after 
having tricked in so simple a manner the 
gallant Corporal Barnes and his lieutenant, 
the cook. It was no more than child’s play 
to turn the tables on them, and I am eager 
for the moment to come when they shall 
understand what has been done.” 

“Perhaps then you won’t feel so much like 
laughing, for if it so chance the Britishers 
know where the schooner lays we shall likely 
remain with Lord Howe’s fleet longer than 
will be pleasant.” 

I was sobered instantly. 

That my comrade should have the same 
forebodings as I had tried to banish made it 
appear as if they must be true, and for the 
moment I saw myself a prisoner, confined 
between the decks of one of the frigates. 

Understanding how thoroughly he had 
quenched my joy, Sam made haste to say: 

“There is mo reason, ’Liphalet, why we 
should cross a bridge before we come to it. 
It is not certain we are any nearer the 
British than we are our friends, and until 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 161 

that question is settled we’ll get all the sat- 
isfaction possible out of knowing that the 
brave Corporal Barnes has been so easily 
fooled. Those fellows are working the 
pump brakes as though their lives depended 
upon it, while Thad is running here and there 
busy as a bee in doing nothing.” 

“But he was to look out for the axes and 
capstan-bars.” 

“I brought some of them down myself,” 
and Sam pointed behind him. “The cor- 
poral’s guard are getting a little the best of 
their fear; but Thad will finish his work 
before they are in fighting trim, and then we 
will give them as heavy a dose as is needed.” 

“Are we to stay here?” 

“So Thad said, and if any of the traitors 
happen to come below, it is our duty to truss 
them up after the same fashion they did us.” 

We were not so fortunate as to cage any of 
the birds, and when ten minutes or more had 
passed Thad came into the cabin staggering 
under the weight of the belaying pins. 

“It may be we shall have trouble sooner 
than I expected,” he said, throwing his bur- 
den into one of the bunks. “Barnes looked 


162 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

as if he was growing suspicious when I 
passed him ; but now that we are prepared 
for work he can open the battle whenever he 
sees fit, and the sport won’t begin any too 
quickly to please me,” 


CAPTURE OP THE LAUGHIKO MARY. 163 


CHAPTER IX. 

TURNING THE TABLES. 

The storm cleared away as suddenly as it 
had begun. 

While my comrades and I were speaking of 
the possible fact that Corporal Barnes was 
beginning to suspect we might have been 
doing more to aid ourselves than to save the 
schooner, the rain ceased falling, and the 
wind was hushed. 

Now had come the time when the traitors 
might see for themselves that the Laughing 
Mary was in no danger of foundering, and I 
was not minded to remain below when that 
discovery was made. 

“We should be on deck,” I said, going to- 
ward the companionway, a loaded musket in 
hand. “There will be a rush aft when the 
villains understand how we have tricked 
them, and we must not allow ourselves to be 
shut up here.” 


164 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

“’Liphalet is right,” and Thad seized a 
weapon as if until that instant he had for- 
gotten it might he necessary to use one. 
“We will make our stand aft on the deck, 
where we can at the same time keep our eyes 
on this opening,” and he pointed to the 
aperture I had made through the bulkhead. 
“It is at this place that the danger is 
greatest, and each must watch out on it 
sharply.” 

I remained in the cabin only so long as 
was needed to hear these words, and then 
ran on deck, arriving there none too soon, 
as it appeared to me. 

Barnes had at that instant ordered the 
men to cease pumping, and said angrily as 
he pointed toward the shore : 

“Look over the rail if you want to under- 
stand how much need there is to work at that 
job. We are high and dry on the sand.” 

With exclamations of surprise the fellows 
ran to the rail, and there, now that the storm 
clouds no longer darkened the sky, they 
could readily see how comfortably the 
Laughing Mary was situated. 

Each man in turn looked aft at us after 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 165 

learning he had been tricked, and I fancied 
from the different expressions on their faces 
it was possible to decide who among them 
we might count on for help under certain 
circumstances. 

Clark, after gazing at the shore and realiz- 
ing that they had been working the pumps 
of a craft which was already sunken as deep 
as possible, burst into a loud laugh as he 
turned toward us who were lounging about 
with our weapons concealed behind the rise 
of the companionway. 

A man who could see anything comical in 
the way the tables had turned upon himself 
would not be a very dangerous enemy, and I 
watched intently the face of each, for by 
this time the clouds had been blown from the 
sky until it was possible to distinguish sur- 
rounding objects almost as clearly as if by 
moonlight. 

Clark and one other were the only men 
who laughed when they realized the situa- 
tion, and I at once decided that it would not 
be a hard task to win them back from Barnes. 

When the cook began to have an idea of 
the trick he was almost beside himself with 


166 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

rage. His sallow face seemed to take on a 
greenish tinge as he shook his clinched fist 
in the air ; but he did not so much as look at 
us after the first quick, furtive glance. 

It must nob be supposed that we three re- 
mained aft of the companionway amusing 
ourselves by watching the traitors when the 
truth dawned upon them. 

Had we been in less danger all this would 
have been extremely entertaining, but now 
we gazed at the men rather for the purpose 
of trying to detect what was to be their first 
move. 

It can well be imagined that the chief 
thought in our minds was as to how near 
might be the British fieet, and when the 
clouds broke we gazed anxiously in every 
direction. 

As before, we could see nothing to cause 
alarm, but we knew only too well that the 
rise of the land on which we were stranded 
might hide the ships from view, and when 
day dawned it was not impossible we should 
find ourselves within easy striking distance 
of the lion’s paw. 

The first evidence that the traitors had 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 167 

recovered from their terror and bewilderment 
sufficiently to be ripe for more mischief was 
shown when Barnes, as if seized by a sudden 
thought, quickly descended the ladder to his 
quarters in the hold, and seeing it, I whis- 
pered to Thad: 

“The villain is beginning to understand 
what we may have done, and we shall soon 
get an idea of his temper.” 

“Step halfway down the stairs,” Thad said 
in a low tone to Sam. “ Keep your eye 
on the bulkhead, and fire if the scoundrel 
shows himself there. Take careful aim, for 
we must shoot with good purpose when the 
work begins ; to miss your mark would en- 
courage the traitors to make a sudden rush.” 

I kept my eyes fixed steadily upon the 
group forward, determined they should not 
catch us napping, and expecting an attack 
each instant; but in this I was disappointed. 

Barnes was even more cowardly than we 
had supposed. 

He could play the pirate while the odds 
were all in his favor, but when the chances 
were equal he had no desire to risk his 
worthless life. 


168 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

Instead of attempting to enter the cabin 
through the bulkhead, he returned to the 
deck after learning, as he must have done, 
that the weapons had been seized, and whis- 
pered eagerly to his fellows. 

Then we were treated to an exhibition of 
silent rage, not one of the pirates daring to 
so much as raise his voice. 

“They are cowed now,” Thad whispered 
to me, “and we must take good care to keep 
them in that condition. Do not make a 
boasting display of your musket, but look to 
it that they see you are armed and deter- 
mined to shoot.” 

I did as he commanded, though there was 
little need, for the mutineers could not but 
know we were in possession of all the weap- 
ons, and immediately they moved further 
forward as if fearing we would open fire 
upon them. 

Sam was recalled from his post on the 
companionway stairs, for the scoundrels 
would not be able to get into the hold with- 
out our knowledge, and we three stood, 
muskets in hand, waiting for the next move, 
which could not be long delayed even though 



HALT THERH! ” THAD SHOUTED, WHEN THE A\AN WAS FIVE OR SIX FEET 
FORWARD OF THE MAIN HATCH. 


Laughing Mary, p. 169. 









CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


169 


every man among them was as cowardly as 
we knew Barnes to be. 

We were not kept long in suspense. 

After they had discussed the situation in 
whispers for five minutes or more Clark came 
forward, holding his hands above his head to 
show he was unarmed. 

“Halt there!” Thad shouted when the man 
was five or six feet forward of the main 
hatch, and in order that there might be no 
delay in obeying the command, he raised his 
musket. Clark suddenly stood still, but re- 
mained silent, and after a brief pause Thad 
asked impatiently: 

“What do you want?” 

“To make a bargain whereby we agree to 
let you go free.” 

“It strikes me we can’t be more free than 
we are now,” Thad replied with a laugh. 
“But why are you making the proposition? 
Has your leader suddenly grown dumb?” 

Clark knew not what reply to make, but 
turned toward his companions, when, as if 
moving much against his will, the corporal 
advanced until he stood by the soldier’s side. 

“Best your muskets over the cabin deck. 


170 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

and take careful aim,” the captain said in 
a tone so loud that the mutineers could not 
fail to hear. “Let each cover a man, and 
fire without waiting for further command if 
either of them advances so much as an inch.” 

“What are you doing that for?” Barnes 
cried in alarm as he stepped back a pace. 
“We don’t count on fighting.” 

“I reckon you are speaking the truth now; 
but don’t intend to take any chances when 
dealing with traitors. There is nothing to 
fear unless you attempt to play some trick, 
therefore the fact that Sam and ’Liphalet are 
ready for business need not disturb you.” 

For the moment I believed Barnes would 
beat a cowardly retreat; he even made a 
motion as if to back away to the shelter of 
the galley, but a few words, accompanied by 
a meaning gesture, from Clark induced him 
to remain. 

“I am waiting to hear what you have to 
say,” Thad cried sharply as the mutineers 
remained silent. 

Clark turned toward his leader, but the 
corporal did not open his mouth, and the sol- 
dier said angrily: 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 171 


“He wants to make a trade with you, but 
if he can’t speak we may as well go forward 
again, for I don’t relish standing here while 
those muskets are aimed at me.” 

“You can please yourselves. There is no 
trade we are anxious to make, although I am 
willing to hear what such villains may have 
to say.” 

“Why don’t you make your talk?” the 
cook cried angrily from behind the galley, 
and these words from the yellow-faced 
traitor who wished to turn pirate liberated 
the corporal’s tongue. 

“We are willing to give you fellows your 
liberty if you will agree to our terms,” 
Barnes cried, speaking very loud, as if the 
sound of his voice would give him courage. 

“You are very kind,” Thad replied mock- 
ingly; “but I believe that just now we are 
more at liberty than you. What are your 
terms?” 

“You shall be allowed to go on shore, and 
we agree not to fire upon or follow you if our 
muskets are given up.” 

“And suppose we refuse, thinking that a 
one-sided bargain?” 


172 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

“Then the British will soon make short 
work of you.” 

“Perhaps so, if they are anywhere near; 
but so far we haven’t heard very much from 
them.” 

“They can’t be far away, and it won’t be a 
long job for one of us to tell them where the 
schooner is stranded. Think you they would 
leave her here unharmed?” 

“Most likely not; but I have yet to learn 
that they can be told of our plight.” 

“One of us can carry the information, no 
matter where they may be, for we didn’t 
leave New York Bay during the storm.” 

“That is true, you sneaking traitor, and it 
is also true that neither you nor any member 
of your party can leave this vessel without 
our permission. The first man who makes 
an attempt at going over the rail will be 
killed.” 

“Perhaps there may be no need of our try- 
ing to do anything of the kind,” Barnes re- 
plied after a pause, and I fancied it had not 
entered into his calculations until Thad 
' spoke that we might prevent them from 
leaving the schooner. “When the sun rises 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 173 

you may find Lord Howe’s fleet within gun- 
shot.” 

“In which case we shall be made prisoners 
of war by the British admiral, which is a far 
different matter from that of two hours ago.” 

Barnes stepped back as if to consult with 
his companions, and Clark followed the ex- 
ample, thus giving Sam and I an opportunity 
of rising to our feet, of which we took 
immediate advantage, for it was not com- 
fortable kneeling there with muskets sighted, 
realizing that at any moment it might 
become necessary to Are with accurate aim. 

While one could have counted twenty Thad 
remained slightly in advance of us, waiting 
for the traitors to return to the conference, 
and then, as they gave no sign of resuming 
the business, he called out sharply; 

“Now it is my turn to say a word, and I 
want all you scoundrels to hear, otherwise 
some of the rules I am going to make may be 
broken, in which case ignorance would mean 
death.” 

The mutineers showed themselves from 
behind the galley, but did not advance 


nearer. 


174 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

“We have all the weapons and ammunition 
and full authority, because of having been 
placed in command of this vessel, to shoot 
down without warning any who may try to 
hinder us in the performance of duty. As a 
matter of fact I should be warranted, and 
perhaps will be blamed for not thus doing, 
in settling this matter by killing every one of 
you ; but that would be too much like your 
own way of arranging matters. Therefore 
you shall have a chance for life. First, any 
man who tries to leave this schooner without 
my permission will be fired at, and we shall 
take good aim. The same penalty at- 
taches to an attempt to come aft further 
than you now are, unless especially sum- 
moned.” 

Thad paused, and the cook said with a 
whine : 

“How long do you count on keeping us 
here?” 

“So long as it pleases me, and now I have 
something to say directly to you. How 
great a supply of provisions have we on 
board?” 


“I don’t know.” 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 175 

“You can guess if it is enough to provide us 
with food for one day, or one week.” 

“Perhaps there are six days’ full rations 
here.” 

“Where are they?” 

“Mostly in the fore-peak.” 

“How much have you in the galley?” 

“The fresh meat and vegetables.” 

“Set about cooking it at once, and if so 
much as a pound is wasted or spoiled, you 
shall suffer for it.” 

The cook delayed as if trying to decide 
whether he would obey or not, until Thad 
raised his musket. 

“If you are not out of that before I can 
count ten, we shall open fire on the whole 
crowd.” This threat was sufficient to make 
the fellow move, for his companions took it 
upon themselves to see that the command 
was obeyed, and he advanced sulkily. 

“Boil the meat, and while it is being done 
make all the bread you can. I shall be the 
judge of whether you loiter in the task or 
not.” 

The cook entered the galley. 

There could be no question but that we 


176 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

had cowed the mutineers for the time being ; 
but I was at a loss to understand the mean- 
ing of Thad’s move so far as concerned the 
food. 

It seemed to me, thick-headed as I am, 
tAat our first task should be to set about 
getting the schooner off the shore, and this 
messing with the provisions appeared to me 
little better than child’s play; but I soon 
realized how wise was my comrade. 

A moment later Barnes would have fol- 
lowed the cook, but that Thad stopped him 
very suddenly by shouting : 

“Eeady, Sam! Fire if he comes nearer!” 

“I was only going into the galley,” the 
corporal cried as he came to a full stop. 

“You were warned against coming further 
aft, and in the future one or the other of us 
will fire at first sight of you without giving 
the word.” 

Barnes disappeared, and Sam said in a low 
tone: 

“It seems to me we would be in better 
shape by obliging them to remain in full 
view. No one knows what they may be up 
to while hidden by the galley.” 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 177 

“We’ll have them out in line after a time; 
but for awhile I don’t care to have them 
watching our movements.” 

“What was your idea in setting the cook to 
work?” I asked. 

“We have no use for raw meat.” 

“Neither do we care to eat at one meal all 
he has on hand.” 

“Very true; but we propose to have every- 
thing in our possession. Suppose Barnes 
had it in his power to destroy the rations, 
how long could we hold out?” 

I now understood full well why the cook 
had been set to work. 

Thad ever had his wits about him, and this 
was but another proof of the fact. 

He had spoken as if we might remain on 
board some time guarding the mutineers, 
and now while we had nothing better with 
which to occupy our time I thought it a good 
opportunity to learn what he proposed doing, 
therefore asked for an explanation. 

“We must keep those fellows with us until 
the schooner is afloat, providing we are able 
to accomplish that work, for as Barnes said, 
the British are somewhere in the neighbor- 


178 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

hood, and will pay us a visit if the position 
of the Laughing Mary is known.” 

“When day conies they may find out that 
much without assistance,” Sam suggested. 

“True, and yet again it is possible we can 
remain concealed, therefore weTl keep a 
tight rein over the traitorous crew. I intend, 
providing we are allowed to work un- 
molested, that they shall aid in launching 
the schooner ; but before that task be begun 
it stands us in hand to be prepared. All the 
provisions must be brought aft, and we will 
deal out such rations as we think necessary. 
If the fellows turn to heartily, they shall be 
well fed ; but if any one indulges in shirking, 
or fails to do his best, he will go hungry. 
All this is with the belief we are some dis- 
tance from Lord Howe’s fieet, and shall not 
be molested. In case the enemy discover us 
we can do no better than submit.” 

Then Thad ordered Sam and I to go into 
the fore-peak, which could be gained only 
through the hold, and begin the work of 
bringing the stores aft. 

His part was to remain on deck and keep 
our precious crew in subjection. 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. I79 

“Do not lay down your muskets for an 
instant, ” he said as we were descending 
the companionway stairs; “and at the first 
suspicious sound from the deck one is to 
come up through the cabin, while the other 
remains in the hold to prevent the villains 
from effecting an entrance there. Should 
they get below, we would have hard work to 
keep our own.” 

We had no desire to delay in our portion 
of the task. 

Although we were seemingly masters of 
the situation, no one could say that the 
tables might not be suddenly turned by some 
accident, and it would go hard with us if we 
should again find ourselves in the corporal’s 
power. 

The cook had made a poor guess when he 
said we had six days’ rations on hand, as 
Sam and I soon learned. 

Although I was a poor judge of such mat- 
ters, it seemed positive to me nine persons — 
the number now on board the Laughing 
Mary — would on ordinary allowance dispose 
of the entire stock in forty-eight hours. 

The supply in the galley I could not esti- 


180 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

mate ; but the store here in the hold was at 
the best so small that I believed Thad should 
know of what it consisted at once, and I 
made a report accordingly as soon as we had 
obeyed orders. 

He seemed startled by the information, 
and after reflecting on the matter a moment, 
said : 

“I must make certain how much there is 
in the galley. Come forward with me, keep- 
ing your muskets ready, and remember that 
in case a rush is made we must check it at 
once or be overcome. If those fellows had 
the courage of cats we would soon be prison- 
ers again.” ^ 

As we marched forward the mutineers, 
hearing our footsteps, peered out from behind 
the galley as if afraid we were about to do 
them some harm, but other than that no 
move was made. 

Although we had done little more than 
bluster, they were subdued as though each 
had received a sound flogging. 

When we had approached where it was 
possible to have a view of the interior of the 
galley, we saw the sallow-faced cook sitting 


' CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 181 

indolently on a locker with folded arms, 
having apparently made no effort to obey the 
captain’s orders, and I said to myself that 
here was the only man among all the muti- 
neers whom we had cause to fear. Although 
not overstocked with courage, he dared do 
many things which would have frightened 
Barnes, and might be an ugly customer to 
deal with at close quarters. 

Thad pushed open the half-closed door, and 
asked in a quiet tone which had in it more of 
menace than could have been crowded into 
an hour of bluster : 

“Have you done that which I ordered?” 

“No,” the cook began in a surly way, and 
then, on seeing the three of us standing in 
front of him with leveled muskets, he sud- 
denly changed his manner, adding in a re- 
spectful tone, “ I am waiting for the fire to 
startup.” 

“Where is the meat you are about to boil?” 

He took from a locker nearly a whole 
sheep cut into quarters, and laid it on the 
bench which was used for such purpose. 

“Get it ready for the pot at once, and then 
set about making bread. I shall be sorry if 


182 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

there is any delay in this work, for I do not 
like to cause any one trouble ; but until we 
arrive once more in New York it is my firm 
resolve to inflict punishment upon those who 
neglect their duty, and, situated as we are 
now, I can only enforce discipline with 
powder and lead. There will be no sparing 
of ammunition if signs of insubordination are 
shown.” 

Having said this in a tone as mild as any 
girl’s, Thad walked aft, motioning us to fol- 
low, and once we were where our voices 
could not be overheard, I cautioned him 
against giving the cook the slightest oppor- 
tunity to do harm. 

“He is a dangerous man,” I said in con- 
clusion, “and all the more so because he will 
strike from behind, rather than meet a fellow 
face to face.” 

“I believe you, ’Liphalet,” Thad replied 
gravely. “That we shall have trouble with 
the cook before we’re many hours older I do 
not doubt; but he won’t catch me na^pping, 
and if an example is to be made of any of 
the crew I would rather it should be Barnes 
or that yellow-faced scoundrel we tackle.” 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 183 


CHAPTER X. 

PELEG SYMONDS. 

Until daylight we three remained aft on 
the alert for the slightest show of mischief 
on the part of the mutineers; but seeing 
nothing to betoken that they had other desire 
than to do as we commanded, yet knowing 
full well should an opportunity arise when 
Barnes believed the odds to be in his favor, 
an attack would be made upon us imme- 
diately. 

Twice during the remainder of the night 
did the three of us march forward to the 
galley ; but there was no further reason to 
reprove the cook for neglect of duty. 

He had worked industriously since Thad 
hinted that his only means of enforcing 
obedience was with powder and lead, and in 
fact, he was right in so doing, for at the first 
sign of trouble he and Barnes were the ones 
who would be used as targets for our bullets. 


184 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

since these two being out of the way the 
soldiers would speedily abandon all idea of 
insubordination. 

The one fear in our minds was, as can well 
be imagined, that we had been stranded 
within easy range of the British fleet, and 
when the gloom of night began to give way 
before the shafts of gray light sent to warn 
the world that a new day was about to dawn, 
we gazed anxiously out over the waters for 
some signs of the enemy. 

I had decided in my own mind that we 
were beached in Gowanus Cove, and^ was 
strengthened in this belief when, the sun 
having risen, nothing met our gaze but a 
broad expanse of water. 

If the Laughing Mary was in the position I 
fancied, the high land of Brooklyn Heights 
would shut us off from a view of the Narrows, 
where was the British fleet, but we could not 
hope to remain undiscovered very many 
hours because of the fact that the enemy 
were constantly sending out boat expeditions 
for the purpose of reconnoitering. 

My comrades shared this opinion with me, 
as I learned when Thad said after a long 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


185 


time of silence, during which he had been 
aloft twice scanning the surrounding land 
and waters : 

“We should be in the Cove, and there yet 
remains a chance we shall be able to get out 
of the scrape before the Britishers discover 
us. The tide will be at its height in a couple 
of hours, and we must take advantage of it 
at that moment, or wait until night comes 
again.” 

“There is little chance the schooner can 
be floated this afternoon,” Sam replied. 
“If we had a boat in which to carry out the 
anchors it might be different, but we shall 
hardly build a raft stout enough for our pur- 
pose in that length of time.” 

“Then we will trust to remaining undis- 
covered during this day, and make the most 
of our time. ’Liphalet, go forward and tell 
the cook he is to have breakfast ready at 
once. Let him serve out some boiled meat, 
bread, and anything else he may have ready. 
While you stand guard Sam will bring aft 
all the remainder of the cooked provisions 
which remain in the galley.” 

I obeyed without loss of time, carrying my 


186 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

musket in such manner that it could be dis- 
charged on the instant, and halting ten paces 
abaft the galley, for I had no idea of giving 
the yellow-faced scoundrel an opportunity of 
leaping upon me. 

The cook saw me advancing, of that I was 
certain, yet he would make me believe him 
to be ignorant of my whereabouts until I 
repeated the captain’s orders in a loud 
tone. 

Then he started in surprise, and appeared 
as if about to come out of the galley; but I 
halted him at once, saying as I did so : 

“There is no reason why you should leave 
that place; remain where you are, and set 
about the work at once.” 

He made no reply, and, unable to deter- 
mine exactly what he was doing, I had no 
other resource than to believe the order was 
being obeyed. 

The fellow was not so passive when Sam 
approached for the purpose of carrying aft 
such of the provisions as might not be needed 
for the morning meal. 

“How am I to say what part of this the 
men will want?” he asked in a surly tone, 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


187 


flourishing a huge knife with which he had 
been cutting the meat. 

“Drop that!” I cried, and the coward 
obeyed on the instant, when Thad, who had 
overheard all that was said, shouted: 

“Set out the regular rations, but no more, 
and send the remainder here.” 

For a moment I believed he would refuse 
to do as he was bidden, and had my finger on 
the trigger of the musket ready to shoot him 
down at the first suspicious movement; but 
he evidently knew who would be the first to 
suffer if there was any show of resistance, 
and began to push toward the door certain 
articles of food. 

“None of that!” Sam cried sharply. “I 
don’t count on taking any chances from such 
as you have shown yourself to be.” 

“What do you want?” 

“You to hand me the stuff through the 
doorway.” 

I saw Barnes’ ugly face peering out from 
behind the galley, but a single movement of 
the musket was sufficient hint for him to 
hide it again very quickly, and by this time 
Sam was going aft with his hands full. 


188 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

Three times did my comrade take a load 
from the galley, and then the cook swore he 
had given all the provisions save what would 
be needed for breakfast. 

Then Thad ordered me aft, and when I was 
by his side, Sam yet being in the cabin stow- 
ing the food away, the captain shouted: 

“Now you fellows forward will come one 
at a time to get your rations. Be careful not 
to loiter at the galley; but move lively.” 

It was not necessary to repeat the com- 
mand. 

Clark was the first to show himself, and he 
took good care we should see he did not 
speak with the cook. 

Then, one after another, the soldiers came 
to the galley door until only Barnes remained 
unserved. 

“Step out, corporal, and be quick about 
it, unless you coant on fasting till noon,” 
Thad cried, and Barnes showed himself at 
once. 

I knew he would try to have speech with 
the cook, and stood ready to prevent it. 

The fellow slouched out from behind the 
galley, trying to appear unconcerned, and 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


189 


halted at the door of the cookhouse in such 
a position we could not see his face. 

“Turn half around, corporal!” Thad 
shouted, quick to note the possibilities. “I 
don’t intend you shall have a chance to hold 
a conference with your mate while we have 
the upper hands.” 

Barnes glanced over his shoulder furtively, 
but seeing me with leveled musket, wheeled 
about in proper shape, and I can answer for 
it that he spoke no word to the one whom of 
all the others I most feared. 

Then Sam and I went forward for our 
rations and Thad’s, and during the next ten 
minutes or more all hands gave strict atten- 
tion to the meal. 

When we who were aft had satisfied hun- 
ger, all three went to the galley. 

The cook was ordered to come out on deck, 
and while Sam and I stood where we could 
cover him with our weapons and at the same 
time be on the alert against a possible attack 
from the others, Thad made a thorough 
search of the place. 

He found hidden in this spot or that a 
greater amount of provisions than had been 


190 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

sent aft, and when the entire store was set 
out on the deck the captain said sternly to 
the mutinous villain: 

“I felt certain you had done something of 
this kind, although I don’t know what you 
expected to gain by it. Situated as we three 
are it would be folly to keep warning you 
fellows and never acting. From this moment 
if you give me cause for suspicion I shall 
first have you shot dowm like a dog, and 
then inquire into the matter. It is your lives 
against ours, and I will take no chances.” 

At this moment I believe I could have 
killed the cook and never accused myself of 
blood-guiltiness. While he was allowed to 
plot our lives were not safe a single moment, 
and it seemed necessary to put him where 
he could work no more mischief. 

Sam shared my opinion, for when the fel- 
low had gone into the galley again in obe- 
dience to Thad’s orders, he asked in a low 
tone: 

“Why not truss the cook and Barnes up as 
they did us, and leave them where they can’t 
be freed by the others?” 

“Because I propose that they do their full 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 19] 


share of the work in getting the schooner 
afloat. We need all hands in the labor, and 
they shall not be allowed to lie still from 
now out, until we are either in deep water, 
or the British have made of the Laughing 
Mary a prize.” 

All this required that we keep the muti- 
neers within reach of a musket-ball every 
moment, and would make our own share of 
the work so much the harder, but I knew 
from Thad’s manner of speaking that he 
could not be persuaded to do other than was 
announced, and held my peace. 

It is not necessary I should set down here 
all which was done this day. 

We three comrades stood hourly watches 
in turn over the laborers, and at such times 
were ever ready to Are upon the first of the 
mutineers who disobeyed orders. ^ 

The cook and Barnes were forced to per- 
form even more than their full share of the 
work, and at no time did we allow them to 
approach each other sufficiently near to hold 
a conversation. 

The first task was to make a raft heavy 
enough for the work, and then both anchors 


192 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

were loaded on it, together with all the cable 
we had aboard. 

When these had been carried into deep 
water and there thrown over, the cables were 
brought to the windlass, where the slack was 
taken in until they were as taut as we could 
contrive to make them. 

It was nearly noon before this portion of 
the task was done, and then the tide had 
ebbed for at least two hours. 

Dinner was served from the cabin, Sam 
bringing up each man’s rations as he came 
aft to receive it, and all were forced to re- 
main on deck in front of the galley where we 
could keep them well in view. 

When the short morning had come to an 
end every movable thing on board was 
brought aft, for there remained plenty of 
water under the keel at this point. 

I should say the afternoon was half spent 
when we had done all that was possible until 
the tide rose again, and during this time we 
saw nothing to cause alarm. 

Not even so much as a boat had come 
within our range of vision, and it no longer 
seemed possible we had gone ashore in 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 193 

Gowanus Cove, otherwise the enemy must 
have shown himself in some manner. 

The mutineers were allowed to lounge 
around the deck much as they chose provid- 
ing all hands remained well in view, and the 
two whom we looked upon as ringleaders 
kept each by himself at such a distance from 
the others that no private conversation could 
be held. 

Barnes, cowed by our display of weapons, 
had obeyed every command, but from the 
look in his eyes we knew full well what 
sweet revenge he would take should the 
chance present itself. 

The cook was no less submissive and sulky ; 
as ready to take advantage of us as we were 
determined not to give either him or his fel- 
lows an opportunity. 

It was dreary work remaining idle, watch- 
ing every movement of the mutineers lest 
when we least suspected it they would begin 
an assault. 

Had I been in command of the schooner I 
would have bound each in such a fashion 
that there would be no possibility of mischief, 
and this even though they were needed when 


194 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

the moment arrived for us to set about pul- 
ling the Laughing Mary off the shore. 

Once during the afternoon I suggested such 
a plan to Thad ; but he would not listen to it, 
and even Sam appeared doubtful if it would 
be wise until the schooner was afloat, urging 
against it that at present we had the fellows 
in such condition as to be able to make them 
work, whereas it was hardly probable they 
would be of the same mind after being 
trussed up several hours. 

It was not for me to urge the matter while 
both my comrades were against it, and I held 
my peace. 

The tide was within about two hours of 
being at its height, and we were still watch- 
ing our prisoners as cats watch mice, when 
from around the point of what we believed 
to be the mainland a boat appeared, rowed 
by one man. 

For a single moment it was as if my heart 
leaped into my throat, and I could scarcely 
breathe because of fear and excitement, but 
when I noted the welcome fact that he did 
not wear a red coat my courage returned. 

“Boat ahoy!” Thad shouted, and as he did 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHINC MARY. 195 

SO the mutineers sprang to their feet, believ- 
ing, perhaps, that the Britishers had found 
us at last. 

“Keep back!” Thad cried. “The first one 
who speaks to this stranger will wish he had 
kept his mouth shut!” 

All obeyed save the cook, who continued 
to advance toward the rail, and the captain 
cried out for me to fire. 

The fellow dropped to the deck before I 
could press the trigger; but I had already 
aimed so high above his head that I knew 
the ball would not hit him, and, thinking it 
would teach the scoundrel a good lesson, 
discharged the weapon. 

I believe of a truth the coward thought he 
was shot, for he rolled as if in mortal agony, 
and his face took on a green tinge which was 
sickening to look upon. 

Even I feared my aim had been truer than 
was intended, and for the instant was sick at 
heart with the thought of having fired upon 
an unarmed man ; but this sensation had no 
sooner come upon me than I realized he was 
only badly frightened, and so told Thad. 

“Keep your eyes on them, and don’t hesi- 


196 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

tate to shoot again,” he said in a tone such 
as all might hear. “If you have disabled 
one we shall have so much the less work to 
do in the way of guarding them, and can 
spare a few more as well as not.” 

Any one hearing this remark would have 
said the captain was as vindictive as a pirate ; 
but I understood full well he had no desire to 
stain his hands with blood unless it should 
be absolutely necessary in the saving of our 
own lives. 

Frightened by the report of the musket, 
and perhaps thinking it was intended for 
him, the stranger began to pull his boat 
around in a hurry, and might have left us 
then and there but that Thad implored him 
to wait. 

“This schooner belongs to the Continental 
army, and has been cast ashore by those 
who would deliver her up to the enemy,” he 
shouted, and Sam and I looked at each other 
in alarm that he should have told so much 
before learning whether the stranger was 
friend or foe. 

“If he’s an enemy he’d give information of 
our plight anyway,” Thad said as if reading 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 197 

our thoughts, “therefore we can work our- 
selves no harm.” 

The man looked at us intently a moment, 
and then began to row cautiously toward the 
schooner once more, but while yet at a con- 
siderable distance asked : 

“If you are friends how does it happen 
that you got past the fleet?” 

“Are we past it?” Thad cried in surprise. 

“I should say you was, seein’s how this is 
Barren Island, an’ there’s quite a stretch of 
water ’twixt here an’ the Narrows.” 

Barren Island! If the man’s statement 
was true the Laughing Mary must have 
passed through Lord Howe’s fleet while we 
three were prisoners in the cabin, and the 
mutineers had not so much as seen the 
riding-lights of the vessels. 

It seemed impossible such could be the 
fact, and yet the man spoke with an honest 
voice. He could well understand that we 
were bewildered, but before trusting himself 
too near, asked when we left New York. 

Thad told him, and then in the fewest 
words possible explained what had happened 
on board, saying in conclusion: 


198 CAPTURE OP THE LAUGHING MARY. 

“If you be a friend to the cause, as I 
believe, come on board and I will show you 
our written orders from Colonel Tupper to 
go to Governor’s Island, and also the order 
from Colonel Prescott of that post to the 
commandant of Fort Defiance.” 

“Where are the mutineers?” 

“Here on deck, kept in subjection by our 
muskets, as you can see by coming aboard.” 

The stranger hung in the wind a moment 
longer, and then seeming to gather courage 
from the fact of our being boys, pulled 
alongside. 

Thad took his painter, and as he came over 
the rail aft his face expressed the liveliest 
surprise at a view of the mutineers. 

“It looks like as if you boys had done a 
mighty neat job in gettin’ the best of that 
crowd, an’ I allow it was a cute trick.” 

“But one that won’t count for much if the 
Britishers happen to learn we are here,” 
Thad said grimly. 

“There’s small chance of that for a spell 
yet. Lord Howe is makin’ a move, an’ I 
reckon his hands are too full to let him bother 
with this craft ” 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 199 

“Has he sailed up to the city?” Sam 
asked in alarm. 

“No, an’ that seems odd. He is landin’ 
the troops in Gravesend Bay, an’ most likely 
counts on makin’ it hot for General Putnam’s 
troops on the Heights.” 

“This should be told to our friends in the 
city!” Thad cried excitedly, and then as he 
realized how helpless we were to do any- 
thing of the kind, he exclaimed sorrowfully, 
“It was in my mind to try to get back last 
night, without waiting to take the cannon 
aboard! Would that I had done it!” 

“There’s no use in cryin’ for milk that’s 
been spilled,” the stranger said. “I’ve been 
tryin’ to do that same job myself, but haven’t 
made much of a fist at it so far.” 

“You couldn’t have tried very hard if you 
were willing to waste time pulling around 
here.” 

“I saw the schooner’s spars, an’ hoped she 
might be some craft that had run in waitin’ 
for a chance to sneak up past the fleet.” 

“And suppose she had been?” 

“I’d have done my best to coax the captain 
into makin’ a try of it this night.” 


200 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


Thad looked at Sam and me, and then asked 
as if speaking to himself : 

“Why can’t we try that very thing? If 
there is any wind at all we should be able to 
do it, although the chances are against us.” 

“But you’re hard and fast aground,” the 
stranger objected. 

“Look at our cables. We’ve carried out 
both anchors ; it must have been two hours 
past high water when she took the ground, 
and we ought to make short work of pulling 
her off when the tide is full.” 

“What’s your name?” the man asked after 
gazing critically at the schooner’s position. 

Thad answered the question, and then told 
him who Sam and I were, winding up the 
information by asking: 

“Who may you be, sir?” 

“Peleg Symonds, an’ I’m no ‘sir,’ but an 
honest fisherman who would have turned 
soldier long before this but that I’ve got a 
wife an’ four children to look after.” 

“Do you know the location of the fleet?” 

“As well as I do the channel. With the 
city market shut out from me. I’ve been 
forced to sell to the Britishers, an’ cruised 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 201 

in an’ out among the war vessels till I could 
put this craft through with my eyes shut.” 

“Will you try it?” Thad asked excitedly. 
“If we are successful I guarantee you shall 
be paid more money than could be earned by 
a week of fishing.” 

“I’m willin’ to make the venture for the 
good of the cause, an’ only ask that you give 
me grub enough to keep the family from 
starvin’.” 

“Take what you want from here, if it so 
be you can get to your home and back before 
high water.” 

“That can be done easy.” 

I was so ungenerous as to say to myself 
that this Symonds would take of our store of 
provisions without intending to fulfill his 
promise, and chuckle to himself at having 
gotten the best of three boys ; but when he 
went below with Thad and save for the cap- 
tain’s insistence would have selected what 
seemed only a beggarly supply, I changed 
my opinion. 

Thad forced him to take a generous store, 
and he hurried away as if eager to be with 
us again, which behavior heartened me till I 


202 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

believed we would of a verity be lying off 
Grand Battery again by the time another day 
had dawned. 

While we were holding this conversation 
with Symonds the prisoners had had good 
chance to talk with each other, yet I do not 
fancy such opportunity caused them to feel 
any better in mind. 

They knew from what the visitors said 
that no hope remained the Britishers would 
capture the schooner while she was yet 
ashore, and must have begun to realize there 
was good show of soon being forced to 
answer to the American forces for their 
misdoings. 

“We must keep as sharp a watch as ever,” 
Thad said, speaking in a low tone lest he be 
overheard by the villains; “but I reckon 
they won’t try to do anything very desperate 
now it is known we are so far from those 
who might have aided them.” 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 203 


CHAPTER XL 

MAROONING MUTINEERS. 

It was disheartening to think that we 
might have carried to the city early infor- 
mation regarding the advance of the British 
forces if we had set sail instantly after 
learning that which the commandant of Fort 
Defiance had to tell. 

It is true there was no wind at the time ; 
but the storm which came on after we had 
been overpowered would have carried the 
little schooner up the bay like a bird. 

However, as I said to myself then while 
we were awaiting Symonds’ return, it would 
do little good to grow sad over a mistake 
which could not be set right, and I tried to 
console myself with the thought that we 
might soon be on our way there, arriving in 
season to be of assistance in the battle which 
must of a necessity come. 

Thad economized time by serving out sup- 


204 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

per, and on this occasion Clark was the last 
to come forward for his rations. 

“I’d like to talk a little, captain,” he said 
before taking up the food Sam set in front 
of him. 

“About what?” 

“Myself, an’ it has been on my mind since 
before we learned what kind of a trick had 
been played upon us, so don’t think it’s only 
because of what the fisherman said.” 

“Getting sick of playing the traitor?” 

“I was that even before I begun, and have 
been waiting for a good chance to say I’m 
mighty sorry at being found in such com- 
pany.” 

“Would you have said the same if we 
hadn’t turned the tables on your crowd?” 

“I don’t suppose so, for I wouldn’t have 
had the chance ; but I was minded to give 
these fellows the slip whenever the oppor- 
tunity came. I didn’t go into the plan till 
all the others had been brought over, and 
I’d have been made a prisoner as you were, 
but for consenting. This ain’t a case of 
cryin’ baby just because I’ve been whipped, 
for if we’d carried the scheme through as it 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 205 

was planned, I’d have slipped away from my 
mates at the first good show,” 

“What do you want to do?” 

“Turn to like a man, instead of bein’ driven 
to it by loaded muskets, and then, if it so be 
we get back to the city, take my punishment 
for turning renegade. I can’t say I could 
walk to the gallows willingly; but I’d gladly 
go into jail for a long spell if it was possible 
to be put back where I was forty-eight 
hours ago.” 

“You want us to give over watching you — 
is that it?” Thad asked sharply. 

“Not a bit of it; watch me as you do the 
others, but think while doing it that it ain’t 
needed. If it so happens there’s a show of 
proving I’m downright sorry, an’ there may 
be if we’re to run past the fieet, give me the 
chance — that’s all I ask for.” 

Thad turned to Sam and me as if to ask 
what we thought of the matter, and I an- 
swered the question in his eyes before he 
could speak. 

“I’m willing to trust him, as much so be- 
cause of what he did in the night as for his 
words now.” 


206 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

Sam nodded his head in token that he 
agreed with me, and Thad turned to the re- 
pentant mutineer. 

“I believe you, Clark, and to show that I 
do give you full liberty of the deck, but with 
the understanding that you aid us in keeping 
watch over the prisoners.” 

“I thank you, captain, an’ you too,” he 
added, looking at Sam and me. “There’s 
yet a chance I may win my way back to 
what I was before failin’ in with Barnes, and 
that’s an honest man; but except for the 
corporal and the cook, I don’t think you’ve 
much to fear in the way of mischief — two of 
my mates are sick of this job as I am.” 

Thad did not ask who they were, but 
began to eat his supper, and I turned to look 
at the cook, who had swung half-around when 
Clark, leaving us, went forward once more 
as if to show he would not presume upon the 
privilege the captain had granted him. 

It was in my mind that the cook wanted to 
speak with The repentant man, and, being 
willing he should in order that the soldier’s 
honesty be tested, I feigned to look in 
another direction. 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 207 

I could see from out the corner of my eye 
something of what was going on, but, not 
suspecting mischief, came very near to mak- 
ing the mistake of my life. 

The cook had, as I have said, turned just 
as Clark passed him, and suddenly I saw the 
gleam of steel in his upraised hand. 

As the thought came upon me that the 
villain was about to do murder because the 
man had been trying to atone for his mis- 
deeds, I fired almost at random, but it was 
providentially permitted that the ball should 
speed as truly as if my aim had been 
careful. 

The bullet struck the scoundrel on the arm 
that held the weapon, and he was spun 
around like a top. 

Again I thought I had killed him ; but this 
time I did not shudder at the possibility, for 
nothing save God’s mercy and my shot had 
saved Clark’s life. 

Thad had seen some portion of the busi- 
ness, and when the cook fell he cried out to 
Barnes : 

“Attend to that man, corporal, and if he 
isn’t hurt seriously we’ll trice him up in such 


208 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

a fashion that he can’t play any more 
tricks! Clark, bring that knife aft!” 

Barnes was not minded to play the part of 
nurse even to his comrade, but Sam made a 
threatening gesture, and he obeyed with a 
mighty poor grace. 

Clark would have returned when he laid 
the knife on the deck in front of the captain, 
but Thad bade him remain where he was. 

“We’ll trust you aft, and I promise to say 
to Colonel Tupper all I can in your favor if 
you do your best fiom this time out.” 

I had reloaded my musket, and the captain 
sent me forward to learn in what condition 
the cook was. 

Although I had never seen many gunshot 
wounds, I knew at one glance that the man 
was not hurt seriously, for the bullet had 
passed through the fleshy part of his arm 
without cutting an artery, as could be told 
by the moderate flow of blood. 

However, I considered that it would be 
brutal to fetter him in such way as Thad 
had suggested, and so reported. 

“If we search to make certain he has no 
other weapons, I think he might be left on 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 209 

deck — of course it won’t do to trust him out 
of our sight.” 

It was decided the fellow should be allowed 
to remain amidships near the port rail, and 
orders were given that no one venture within 
speaking distance. 

By the time the excitement caused by this 
event had subsided, Peleg Symonds rowed 
around the point again, and the muzzle of a 
gun which could be seen above the side of 
the boat told that he was prepared for 
serious business. 

“Anybody been shootin’?” he asked as he 
came over the rail. “I allowed I heard a 
musket-shot not long ago.” 

Thad explained what had occurred, and 
Peleg went forward to where the wounded 
man lay. 

The shirt-sleeve had been torn away, but 
as yet no bandage was put on, and the fisher- 
man said in a matter-of-fact tone as he pro- 
ceeded to dress the injury in a certain rude 
manner, but deftly: 

“It don’t amount to much else than a deep 
scratch, more’s the pity. If you’d killed the 
traitor outright it would been a savin’ of 


210 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


rope, though he don’t by no means deserve 
sich a easy death.” 

With Symonds, who in ability would count 
for any three of the party, and Clark, whom , 
I believed we could trust implicitly, the j 
force in possession of the Laughing Mary j 

was so great that we no longer had any | 

reason to fear what the mutineers might do, 
particularly while they remained in full view | 
on the deck, and thus we were relieved in a ] 
measure from the strain of watching them so ; 
closely. ] 

Peleg did not make light of the danger to 
which we would be exposed while trying to 
make our way past the British fleet; but ; 
appeared firm in the belief that it was possi- : 
ble to accomplish the task. ! 

“If they slap a shot into the schooner at 
the proper place, she’ll go down mighty 
quick,” he said thoughtfully, “an’ there’s 
nothin’ we can do to guard against it, so it’s 
a case of takin’ chances. ’Cordin’ to my 
way of thinkin’ the hottest part of the work 
will come from the small arms, for it’ll be 
their interest to pick off the man at the 
tiller.” 


CAPTURE OP THE LAUGHING MARY. 211 

“I’ll do that part of the work, and you can 
act as pilot without being exposed all the 
time,” Thad said quickly, and the fisherman 
did not appear overly well pleased with the 
remark. 

“If I can’t do my share of the work tnere’s 
still time enough for me to go home. I don’t 
count on bein’ much of a fighter when all 
hands are usin’ powder an’ ball, but I’d hate 
to think there was anything of the coward 
in me.” 

“It shall be as you say,” Thad replied; 
“but I claim the right to do my full share.” 

“An’ that’s what I allow all three of you 
lads can do. If you were smart enough to 
get the best of seven, an’ after they’d rigged 
you up with rope jackets. I’ll answer for it 
there’s pluck in the crowd that’ll keep every 
one standin’ mighty nigh straight while the 
Britishers are havin’ their little joke.” 

“How long before the tide will be full?” I 
asked, thinking we had had enough of com- 
pliments. 

“In less’n half an hour, an’ if the captain 
says the word I reckon it won’t do any harm 
to take in the slack of them hawsers. A 


212 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHINO MARY. 

pound or two now will help along amazingly 
when the water lifts her a bit more.” 

Strong in numbers though we were, Thad 
did not think it safe to relax his vigilance 
entirely, and Sam was left aft on guard while 
we set about the task. 

Peleg took it upon himself to see that 
Barnes did a full share of the work. He 
ranged himself alongside the corporal with 
an air that told how well he would enjoy 
spurring him up now and then, and the 
traitor understood it, for he worked as he 
never had before. 

Tug and strain as we might, and all save 
Sam and the cook were at the windlass, we 
could not budge the schooner from her rest- 
ing place, but the cables were now drawn so 
taut that there would be a constant strain 
upon her while the tide was rising. 

“I reckon there’s nothin’ for it but to loaf 
awhile,” Peleg said as he wiped the perspi- 
ration from his face with the sleeve of his 
shirt, “though it does seem too bad that this 
’ere crowd what allowed the craft to run her 
nose into the sand shouldn’t be made to 
buckle on a spell longer.” 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 213 

The soldiers, who had been doing but little 
work during the past four months, were limp 
as rags because of the unusually hard labor, 
and needed a rest badly ; but I verily believe 
they would have continued the work had 
Thad ordered them to do so. 

Clark had really done more than his share, 
and as he bent to the windlass-bars it seemed 
as if there was the strength of half a dozen 
men in his arms. 

He was trying to atone in a manly fashion 
for the wrong he would not have done under 
other circumstances. 

While we were forced to remain idle Peleg 
told us what he knew concerning the move- 
ments of the enemy, and I set it down here 
that all may see how accurate were his 
statements. 

“Two frigates an’ a couple of bomb ketches 
run into Gravesend Bay this mornin’ ’long 
’bout sunrise, towin’ eighty or more flat- 
boats, an’ nobody was there to say them nay. 
The small craft was rowed to the wharf 
loaded with soldiers, in ten squads, an’ that’s 
how I know so near the exact number what 
landed.” 


214 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

“Then you saw it all?” Thad asked in sur- 
prise. 

“If I hadn’t, I’d been out fishin’ this day. 
Seein’ the frigates gettin’ under way was 
what made me keep my eyes open, an’ I had 
sense enough to know what might happen if 
the Britishers found out I was spyin’. I had 
come up along the shore to sell last night’s 
take of fish, an’ was countin’ on tackin’ 
across from Denice’s ferry. After catchin’ 
sight of the movements I allowed the time 
had come when it would be wise to keep 
under cover, an’ from that minute I didn’t 
show myself to any great extent.” 

“How did you get back?” 

“Sneaked down close in shore while the 
soldiers were landin’, an’ had it in my mind 
that there was a bare chance I might walk 
from the upper end of Jamacia Bay across 
to Brooklyn in time to save our folks from 
bein’ surprised outright, though perhaps it’s 
known to them long before this. Then I saw 
the spars of this craft, an’ kinder run of the 
idee she might be hidin’ from the fieet.” 

“If it is known in the city that the British 
have landed, we shall be taking all the risks 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 215 

of passing the fleet for nothing,” Sarn sug- 
gested, and Thad said promptly: 

“It won’t be for nothing, since we shall be 
performing our duty, and even though we do 
not give the earliest information, there may 
be much work for the Laughing Mary in the 
way of carrying troops. It ” 

Thad ceased speaking very suddenly as an 
odd sound was heard coming apparently 
from beneath the water, and at the same in- 
stant we felt a certain jar, as if the earth had 
been shaken by a heavy explosion. 

Peleg leaped to his feet with a loud cry, 
and ran toward the windlass. 

“Buckle to her, my hearties, an’ if we can 
make her groan once more in the same way 
the trick will be done!” 

Now I understood that the' noise which 
we both heard and felt was caused by the 
schooner herself as she yielded to the strain 
of the hawsers, and I added my voice to that 
of the flsherman. 

Sam would have joined us in the work 
which promised to be so near an end but 
that Thad reminded him of his duty, and he 
was forced to remain aft watching the 


216 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

scoundrelly mutineers as they assisted in the 
labor which might result in their being de- 
livered up to justice. 

How we tugged and strained at the bars, 
knowing if the Laughing Mary was not afloat 
within the next thirty minutes she must 
remain on the sand another twelve hours at 
the least ! 

Then how we shouted — that is to say, how 
all save those who had run her ashore 
shouted — when she gradually yielded to the 
pull of the cables until, with a quick courtesy 
to the land, she slipped off the beach, swing- 
ing round to her anchors as if in delight at 
being free once more ! 

Then Thad, eager to be under sail, gave the 
word to weigh anchor, and one was taken 
in board that we might use it to trim ship, 
but before the second could be tripped Peleg 
said to the captain: 

“You surely don’t count on carryin’ all 
that useless lumber with us, eh?” 

“The men, do you mean? We can’t help 
ourselves, so far as I see, and besides, they 
should be delivered over to their command- 
ing officers.” 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 217 

“I reckon there won’t be many tears shed 
if they never come back; but in case you 
hold to it that they must go, it will stand us 
in hand to see not a single villain of ’em is 
loose.” 

“I don’t think there’s much chance they 
can play any tricks while all hands are on 
the lookout.” 

“There’s no tollin’ what may be done,” 
Peleg said gravely. “We’re countin’ on 
takin’ mighty big risks, an’ it won’t do to 
run any more than is called for. ’Cordin’ to 
my figgerin’ we’ll sneak up on the fleet, 
lettin’ the Britishers think we’re fishermen 
ready to trade, as long as they’ll believe it, 
when we must make a bold dash providin’ 
there is wind enough an’ in our favor. Now 
one of these sneaks might do us a bad turn 
by yellin’, or kickin’ up a row.” 

“There is noplace where they could be 
left,” Thad replied thoughtfully. 

“This ’ere island will hold ’em, I reckon, 
an’ there’s small chance of their gettin’ off 
for quite a spell, unless they are mighty 
good at swimmin’. If they was ashore we’d 
have what you might call a clean craft. 


218 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

which would count big in case we had any 
trouble.” 

Thad realized the force of this last argu- 
ment, as did both Sam and I, but yet he felt 
it his duty to deliver the mutineers to the 
proper authorities. 

“If the British have landed it is certain 
there’ll be a battle soon — perhaps before we 
can get back to New York, and in that case 
our people couldn’t spend much time over 
prisoners, even though they are traitors. I 
think the mutineers should be put ashore as 
Master Symonds suggests.” 

Sam was not wont to give his opinion un- 
asked unless he believed there was urgent 
reason for so doing, therefore his words had 
more weight with Thad than anything I could 
have said. 

After some discussion it was decided that 
all save Clark be put ashore, with a sufficient 
amount of provisions to last them at least 
two days. 

Peleg insisted strongly that it would serve 
them right if they were marooned without 
so much as a loaf of bread, but this Thad 
would not allow after he learned from the 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 219 


fisherman that the fellows might remain 
there a couple of weeks or more before hav- 
ing an opportunity to gain the mainland. 

Even though all knew that death might be 
the penalty for what they had done, every 
one except the cook pleaded to be allowed to 
stay on board. The desolate island had for 
them more terrors than a jail, and before we 
were rid of them I began to think the punish- 
ment would not be slight. 

Clark and Peleg rowed the mutineers 
ashore, and I felt a wonderful sense of relief 
when I saw these two returning, for now we 
no longer had enemies as messmates. 

The night had come by the time we were 
ready to make sail, and no further delay was 
made before setting out on the voyage which 
promised death for all hands. 

The canvas was set; Peleg took the helm, 
and Clark busied himself with getting some- 
thing hot for a second supper, which we 
would need as soon as it could be made 
ready. 

The wind was by no means as strong as we 
could have wished; but the fisherman de- 
clared we would have plenty before arriving 


220 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


at the Narrows, and I hoped most devoutly 
he might prove a true prophet. 

In less than an hour the clouds began to 
gather, and our hopes arose in a wonderful 
degree. 

“The breeze is close at hand,” Peleg said 
gleefully, “an’ by the time we’re well into 
the Narrows the schooner will be boomin’ 
along at a ten -knot gait. I allow we shall be 
close aboard of ’em before they know we’re 
anywhere near, an’ the Britisher what can 
aim a gun true on this night is a better man 
than I have ever allowed could be found 
wearin’ a red coat.” 

“They won’t have to aim very close to 
strike us if you run as near as may be nec- 
essary,” Sam said grimly. “A couple of 
balls from those big guns would play mis- 
chief with the Laughing Mary.” 

I won’t confess that I was really afraid be- 
cause of the danger we must face, but certain 
it is I would have felt more comfortable in 
mind if my companions had not speculated 
at such length upon the possibilities. 

There was no good reason why they 
should argue as to whether we were most 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


221 


likely to be sunk by cannon balls or by com- 
ing in collision with a vessel of the fleet; 
neither did I care to hear just then that under 
the most fortunate circumstances we would 
be exposed to the Britishers’ Are not less 
than twenty minutes. 

But my wishes in the matter were not con- 
sulted, and I was forced to listen to such talk 
for an hour or more, after which my com- 
panions fell silent as if their own specula- 
tions had alarmed them. 

We were not yet within sight of the lights 
of the fleet when Clark came aft to say he 
had the fourth meal ready, and Sam and 
Peleg went forward for their share while 
Thad and I looked after the schooner. 

There was little to be done save keep the 
sails full, for the wind was free, and we 
talked of what might have been accomplished 
had the mutineers not made us prisoners, 
until my thoughts were taken from our own 
danger as I trembled for the safety of 
those who served the cause on Brooklyn 
Heights. 

We had heard it said that the American 
army was composed of no more than eighteen 


222 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

thousand men, and only half that number 
were on the Heights. 

According to what Peleg had told us, twice 
as many Britishers must have landed in 
Gravesend Bay, and much as we hated the 
redcoats, there was no question but that 
they were well-trained soldiers with able 
officers. 

“The danger we must encounter while 
passing the fleet is not greater than that to 
which General Putnam’s troops are exposed,” 
Thad said as if he believed I needed heart- 
ening, and he might have continued in the 
same strain a long while but for the fact that 
Peleg and Sam returned to take our places 
while we partook of the meal prepared by 
Clark. 

In the galley the conversation was more 
cheerful, for we spoke of our success in float- 
ing the Laughing Mary, and I took good care 
the subject should not be changed until our 
hunger had been fully satisfied. 

As we stepped out on deck again Peleg, 
who had taken up his station forward that he 
might the better con the ship, said in a half- 
whisper: 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY 


223 


“Yonder are the lights of the fleet. Please 
God the squall breaks before we are sighted.” 

Straining my eyes to peer into the dark- 
ness, which seemed doubly black after com- 
ing from the lighted galley, I was soon able 
to distinguish the tiny specks toward which 
he pointed, and then I stepped back to blow 
out the candle in the cook’s quarters. 


224 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


CHAPTER XII. 

PAST THE FLEET. 

I HEARD Peleg say to Thad that the fleet 
was not more than two miles away, and since 
the Laughing Mary was swarming on at a 
rate that a frigate might have been proud of, 
with everything forward in a smother, we 
would be among our enemies soon, and, as 
I thought with thankfulness, it could not be 
very long until we were in safety, or at the 
bottom of the sea. 

Before leaving our anchorage the schooner 
had been trimmed to a nicety, and on the 
course we were then running it was possible 
to get every pound’s weight there was in the 
wind. 

Many times in the past while we were sail- 
ing around the upper bay I believed the 
schooner had shown all the speed of which 
she was capable, but her best previous efforts 


CAPTURE OP THE LAUGHING MARY. 225 

were slow as compared with what she was 
now doing. 

The wind sent forth spiteful gusts at short 
intervals as if bent on knocking the spars out 
of the little craft, but she seemed rather to 
enjoy such rough treatment. Keeling under 
the weight of the canvas until the starboard 
rail was awash, she dashed through the sur- 
face of the waves rather than over them, 
throwing showers of spray masthead high, 
but forging ahead all the while as if realizing 
fully that our safety depended upon her 
heels. 

“The squall will break before we’re clear 
of the fleet, an’ what the schooner’s doin’ 
now is enough to make a man believe she’s 
alive,” Peleg said in a half- whisper, and 
although such statement does not sound 
really true, it is a fact that I almost forgot 
the danger which menaced as I watched the 
Laughing Mary swarming along with the 
speed of a racehorse. 

While everything held there was no fear 
the Britishers had any craft that could over- 
take us, but should one rope prove defective 
our undoing would be certain. 


226 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

Under ordinary circumstances it would 
have been little less than madness to carry 
such a press of canvas as we were now show- 
ing; but it was a case of risking everything, 
including our own lives, and we would as 
soon have thought of surrendering before it 
became necessary as to propose that sail be 
shortened. 

Even as I stood gazing aloft at the strain- 
ing cloths a huge, black object loomed up 
alongside, and my heart leaped into my 
throat like to suffocate me, for I knew we 
were in the very midst of our enemies. 

Peleg, having gone aft some time previous, 
was now standing firm as a statue gripping 
the tiller, a fair mark for the enemy, and 
beside him I could perceive the figures of 
Thad and Sam. 

That I should have suddenly forgotten my 
fears seems strange even at this day, but it 
is a fact that I seemed to lose all sense of 
danger instantly it was nigh at hand. 

As we swept past the huge lump of black- 
ness which I knew to be one of the frigates, 
something like a cry of alarm was heard, but 
the schooner was half a cable’s length away 


CAPTURE OP THE LAUGHINO MARY. 22*? 

before the sudden leaping up of lights told 
that the enemy was alive to what we would 
do. 

Then came a vivid flash, followed by a 
report which the wind smothered and carried 
down to leeward. 

There was in my mind a dim idea that a 
shot had been sent after us, but I no longer 
gave heed to what lay in our wake. 

We were heading on for another dark mass 
as if we would run it down, but when it 
seemed that the Laughing Mary was close 
aboard the warship, she sheered suddenly 
under Peleg’s skillful touch, and we were 
gliding with the swiftness of the wind away 
from a second danger. 

It could not be, however, that we should 
pass all the ships as we had the first two. 

The report of the gun, which in my excite- 
ment I had hardly heard, was the signal for 
the fleet to be on the alert, and by the time 
the second vessel had been left astern it was 
as if the Narrows had become a playground 
for lightning. 

All around could be seen spoutings of flame 
as the huge guns were discharged full at the 


22S CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHINO MARY. 

schooner, and within such a range that she 
must have gone down like a lump of lead 
had but one of the iron missiles struck her 
fairly, while the very air shook with the 
thunder of the reports. 

That we could run through that sheet of 
fire and shot unharmed seemed absolutely 
impossible, and without thought of fear, 
because of the excitement which had seized 
upon me like a fever, I waited to hear and 
feel the crashing of the ball which would 
destroy us. 

“Lie down!” I heard Peleg shout; but I 
heeded not the command. 

To have moved so much as an inch from 
where I stood spellbound by the spectacle 
would have been impossible — I was like unto 
one in a trance, and yet remained bewildered 
when the danger had passed. 

The British fleet was in our wake, and as 
the Laughing Mary dashed on up the bay, 
exultant in her escape, I breathed once more. 

How long we had been exposed to the fire 
of the enemy I cannot say, nor are my com- 
panions willing to make any guess, save so 
far as may be done by estimating the speed 


CAPTURE OP THE LAUGHING MARY. 229 

of the schooner aiLd the length of roadstead 
occupied by the fleet. 

Of our own knowledge we knew nothing, 
for the fever which was upon us drowned 
every sensation except that as of flying 
through the air. 

Had our peril been one whit less we should 
have burst into cheers of triumph when we 
were so far up the bay that there was no fear 
a shot would hit us, but as it was, no one 
spoke. 

Sam came forward and seized me by the 
hand, gripping it in silence till the pain of 
the pressure brought me out from the whirl 
into which I had been plunged ; but not until 
some time had passed was it possible for me 
to speak. 

“While passing the ships at close quarters 
we were too low in the water for their shots 
to strike us, and once the schooner had 
forged ahead she was swallowed up by the 
gloom!” he said as if thinking it necessary to 
explain why we had come unharmed out of 
the iron shower. 

“I can hardly believe we have really done 
it,” I managed to say after some difficulty. 


230 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

and then both of us were roused into activity 
by Thad’s voice, which rang out sharp and 
distinct. 

“Stand by the fore halliards ! Lower away 
smartly there, lads, smartly, or we may have 
taken all the chances of the Britishers’ guns 
for naught!” 

Sam and I sprang to obey the order, Clark 
bounding out of the galley to aid in the 
work, and when, after a hard battle with the 
rebellious canvas, it was snugged down to 
the boom in such fashion that it could do no 
harm, clumsily though it was stowed, we 
understood why the order to shorten sail had 
been given. 

The squall which threatened when we ap- 
proached the enemy had held off till we 
were past the danger point, but now it was 
like to burst upon us, and if we would save 
the gallant little vessel which had borne us 
so bravely, the pressure on the spars must 
be reduced. 

Peleg was like unto three men at this 
moment. 

Giving up the tiller to Thad, he joined us 
when we would put a reef in the mainsail. 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 231 


and but for his efforts we might have been 
defeated even in the hour of victory. 

Every man’s strength was needed then, 
and Clark tried to outdo the fisherman, green 
hand at such work though he was, thereby 
proving his right to be pardoned for the mis- 
chief he had really been forced into. 

Bravely as the Laughing Mary had carried 
us past the British guns, so did she now bear 
us on against the furious blasts of wind 
which threatened to deprive her of the spars, 
and the short-lived tempest was yet at its 
height when we dropped anchor under the 
guns of Grand Battery, our perilous voyage 
at an end. 

It was not yet midnight; there might still 
be time to give valuable information, and 
Thad determined to go on shore at once, even 
though it seemed little less than folly to put 
off in Peleg’s dory, which had been towing 
astern during the exciting passage. 

“We can land at White Hall Slip, and 
must make a try for it,” Thad said instantly 
the anchor was on the ground. “Sam, you 
shall remain in charge of the schooner, while 
’Liphalet and I go to headquarters.” 


232 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


Our comrade made no remonstrance to this 
plan, although I knew he must be eager as I 
to be present when the story of what had 
been encountered was told, and we set out, 
fighting every inch of the way to the shore, 
arriving there finally, drenched to the skin. 

The sentinel at headquarters would have 
refused to take in our request for an inter- 
view with Colonel Tupper but that Thad 
insisted so bravely it should be done, and as 
soon as might be afterward we were standing 
before our commanding officer, who gazed at 
us sternly. 

“Your orders were to go to Governor’s 
Island, and return at once,” he said as Thad 
and I saluted in the best military fashion. 

For reply to this remark, which was an 
accusation, Thad handed him Colonel Pres- 
cott’s orders that we proceed to Fort De- 
fiance. 

“I am glad to know the delay was not 
caused by your own carelessness or neglect 
of duty,” he said in a more friendly tone 
after reading the paper. 

Then Thad, not attempting any preamble, 
repeated all which had happened much as 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 233 

though reading the words from a logbook, 
and before the recital was finished Colonel 
Tapper motioned us to be seated. 

“You have done well,” he said when my 
comrade was at an end of the story. “The 
mutineers should have been brought back for 
punishment, but in view of all the circum- 
stances I am inclined to the belief that you 
acted wisely. As to the man Clark, who has 
rendered good assistance, we will say 
nothing. I am satisfied to leave him in your 
charge.” 

The colonel questioned us closely regard- 
ing what Peleg had told concerning the move- 
ments of the enemy, and although the land- 
ing at Gravesend Bay was already known, I 
understood that the information we brought 
was of no slight value. 

We remained at headquarters two hours 
before being dismissed, and then our orders 
were to be ready for getting under way at a 
moment’s notice. 

“We are likely to see warm work within 
the next twenty-four hours, and you need be 
prepared for any command. If it is possi- 
ble, keep the fisherman with you. Money is 


234 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

not plentiful, but he shall be paid in accord- 
ance with the service he renders.” 

The storm had cleared away when we came 
out of headquarters, and the stars were 
twinkling with a friendly glow at the yet 
angry waters. 

Save for the fact that our comrade would 
be eager to learn the result of the interview, 
there was no reason why we should return 
to the schooner at once, and both of us were 
so excited by the events of the night that 
there was no pleasure in the thought of shut- 
ting ourselves up in the cabin of the Laugh- 
ing Mary. 

“If there is much work on hand we may 
not have an opportunity to walk through the 
city again for many days,” Thad said to me 
as we involuntarily halted on gaining the 
open air. “What say you to strolling up 
Broadway?” 

“I would like of all things to speak with 
my mother.” 

“We will stop there five minutes, and 
allow ourselves half an hour for the entire 
outing.” 

Although we should, perhaps, have re- 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 235 

turned to the schooner at once because of 
Sam, I have never regretted the time we stole 
from slumber on that night; 

I had heard that the streets of the city 
were barricaded in expectation the Britishers 
would make a landing on the island, but we 
had been kept so close aboard the Laughing 
Mary from the hour of taking command as to 
have seen nothing of what had been done. 

On this night we had a better idea of what 
our independence might cost, as we viewed 
the preparations made by the citizens and 
soldiery. 

Across Broadway near Wall Street was a 
beastwork of logs, rocks, and barrels filled 
with sand, behind which stood a squad of 
soldiers who demanded an explanation of 
why we were on the street at that hour. 

It was necessary we should answer the 
questions, and it mention of the schooner to 
which we belonged the sergeant on duty 
became very friendly, so much so that I 
could not but believe we were well thought 
of by those of the army. 

On Beekman Street another barricade was 
found, and we were again forced to make 


236 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

explanations of why we were abroad, but at 
this point it was John Sinclair, Sam’s cousin, 
who halted us. 

Knowing me, he was very courteous, and 
explained that at Veseys, Barkly, Murrays, 
and Warrens Streets like barricades were 
erected and manned. He even extended his 
hospitality so far as to go with us to the Com- 
mon, and point out there the fortifications 
which had been hurriedly set up for the 
better protection of the town. 

It seemed as if we were in the midst of a 
city where war was already being waged, 
and it needed but the rattle of musketry and 
cries of the wounded to make the illusion 
perfect. 

Because of John Sinclair’s kindness we 
remained abroad much longer than had been 
agreed upon, and the result was that I had 
but scant time in which to greet my mother. 

She, dear soul, knew nothing of our having 
been delayed in the lower bay, but fancied 
the Laughing Mary remained at her anchor- 
age all this time while we had been very 
near death, and I did not undeceive her. 

She cautioned Thad and I against being 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 237 

reckless, as if believing we could come or go 
as we pleased, and cried out on discovering 
our garments were yet wet, insisting that 
we put on other clothes before returning to 
the vessel. 

It was a saving of time to do as she de- 
manded, and while we were shifting from 
damp to dry garments of mine, the dear 
woman set out on the kitchen table the best 
of all her stores. 

To have refused to partake of the unsea- 
sonable repast would have been to cause her 
pain, and both feigned hunger we had not, 
thereby affording her the last pleasure it has 
been in my power to confer since that 
night. 

If God in his great goodness permits me to 
see her once more in this world, I will speak 
hearty words of repentance for every sad 
thought I have ever caused her, although it 
is only since I am not permitted to see the 
dear face that I have realized how far short 
of what a son might be to a mother I have 
fallen. 

It was near daylight when we pulled off to 
the Laughing Mary, and Clark was standing 


238 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

watch, Peleg and Sam having turned in an 
hour after we went ashore. 

My mind was so filled with thoughts of 
mother, whom 1 might never see again, and 
of the preparations for war as shown in the 
city, that for the moment I forgot how eager 
this man must be to hear what Colonel Tap- 
per had decided should be done in his case, 
and would have gone below without other 
word than that of friendly greeting, but he 
stopped me at the companionway as Thad 
descended the stairs. 

“Am I to be sent on shore as a prisoner, or 
will the colonel allow me to perform my share 
of the work that is to be done so soon?” he 
asked in a tremulous voice. “I am ready to 
stand up like a man and take my punish- 
ment; but it will be hard if I do not have a 
chance to redeem myself when every arm 
that can be raised for the cause is needed.” 

I soon gave the anxious man the pleasing 
information that, so far as he was concerned, 
it might be as if the schooner had never been 
seized, and then went below hurriedly, for 
the tears which came from his eyes gave me 
an uncomfortable sensation in the throat. 


CAPTURE OP THE LAUGHINO MARY. 239 

Thad and I had little sleep on this night. 

It was not yet daylight when orders came 
for us to pull around to Peck’s Slip, and there 
take on board troops to be carried to the 
Brooklyn shore. 

And with such work as this were we kept 
busy until far into the night, meanwhile 
expecting each instant to hear the booming 
of cannon which would tell us that the 
battle had begun ; but it was as if the enemy 
had no thought of making an attack. 

Another day dawned and closed, and we 
had no more important task than playing the 
part of ferrymen. 

For myself I would have been better satis- 
fied to serve in the ranks, but a soldier may 
not act as seems to him best, and we tried 
to do our whole duty in this humble capacity. 

As yet the British had made no sign they 
were bent on mischief, and I began to doubt 
if Peleg had really seen as many men set 
ashore at Gravesend as he stated. 

“Never doubt but they’ll soon let us know 
where they are,” he said when I suggested 
on this second evening that a mistake had 
been made. “After the fight at Charlestown, 


240 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

Lord Howe won’t move in a hurry ; but when 
he does strike a blow I'm fearin’ our friends 
will feel it. I’ve agreed to stay on board 
the Laughing Mary till the scrimmage is 
over, an’ shall hold to my word ; but by so 
doin’ I’m losin’ the chance of bein’ where 
men are most needed.” 

With an army twice as large as ours, and 
a fleet which could soon lay the city in ashes 
despite all our poor show of defense, I failed 
to understand why the Britishers delayed 
the blow, and in my folly began to fancy 
they were afraid. 

I went on deck, leaving Thad, Sam and 
Peleg discussing the question of where the 
battle would be fought, for it was my watch, 
even though we were at anchor off Grand 
Battery, and lying much nearer the shore 
than was usual lest an attempt be made at 
cutting us out. 

Clark, who now acted as cook, was in the 
galley, and I went forward to speak with 
him. 

It was not yet dark, and one could see 
plainly the faces of the loungers ashore who 
were gazing down the harbor as if expecting 



“ DON’T A\OVE, BUT LOOK ON SHORE WHERE STANDS THAT FELLOW WITH 

THE SCARLET SHIRT.” 


Laughing Mary, p. 2ltl. 









CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 241 

each instant to see the whole British fleet sail 
up to open Are on the city. 

I stopped in front of the cook’s quarters 
just as Clark came out of the door with some- 
thing in his hands which he evidently in- 
tended to throw overboard, and as he turned 
toward the rail I saw his face pale suddenly, 
at the same instant that a low exclamation of 
mingled surprise and fear burst from his lips. 

“What is the matter?” I cried, and was on 
the point of going toward him when he said 
sharply, but in a low tone: 

“Don’t move! Do not show surprise; but 
look on shore where stands that fellow with 
the scarlet shirt.” 

But for the warning I should have shouted 
for Thad to come on deck as I gazed in the 
direction indicated, and saw the face of Cor- 
poral Barnes ! 

Although he was not dressed in uniform, 
and in general appearance differed greatly 
from the soldier I had known to my sorrow, 
there could be no question as to his identity. 

“Do not look in that direction long enough 
to allow the villain to suspect we have recog- 
nized him,” I whispered, forcing myself to 


242 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

gaze up and down the water front carelessly. 
“Thad must see him, otherwise he will 
insist that you and I are mistaken, for it 
does not seem possible the fellow could have 
followed us so quickly.” 

“No one would persuade me I had been 
mistaken in the face,” Clark replied em- 
phatically as he returned to the galley. “I 
have too good reason for remembering it.” 

“Keep your eye on him if it is possible to 
do so without his knowing he is being 
watched,” I said, and then affected to stroll 
carelessly aft. 

My comrades and Peleg were still ear- 
nestly engaged in their discussion when I 
leaned over the companion-hatch and said : 

“Corporal Barnes stands on shore keeping 
a lookout on this schooner!” 

Thad leaped to his feet as if he had been 
shot, and would have run up the stairs fran- 
tically, but that I checked him. 

“The traitor will know he has been dis- 
covered if you come on deck in that fashion,” 
I said, and instantly Thad calmed himself, 
walking out a moment later as if for no other 
purpose than to get the air. 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 243 

It was too late for a second view of the 
scoundrel. 

“He turned and went up the water front as 
you started aft,” Clark said hurriedly when 
the captain emerged. 

“Jump into the boat, ’Liphalet! We must 
make him prisoner since he has been bold 
enough to follow so soon.” 

It would have been folly for us to attempt 
anything of the kind at that hour, when 
night was approaching so rapidly. The 
only result a chase could have had would be 
to warn Barnes we knew of his presence in 
the city, and then all hope of capturing him 
had vanished. 

This I began to explain to Thad in as few 
words as possible, and had no more than 
begun to speak when he, recognizing the 
force of the argument, interrupted me by 
saying: 

“You are right, ’Liphalet. He could soon 
give us the slip among the throng, and in ten 
minutes it will be too dark to keep a man in 
view unless we might be close at his heels.” 

“There’s bound to be something wrong 
’bout this ’ere thing,” Peleg interrupted as 


244 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

he came from the cabin. “That mutineer of 
yours couldn’t have got up this far since we 
left him on Barren Island, for it ain’t once 
in a week a vessel runs near enough to be 
hailed. A man on that strip of sand would 
stay quite a spell, ’cordin’ to my way of 
thinkin’.” 

“It’s a mistake, of course,” Sam added 
quite confidently, and then he returned to 
his seat on the locker as if satisfied with his 
own settlement of the matter. 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY 


245 


CHAPTER XIIL 

BROOKLYN HEIGHTS. 

My comrades might as well have tried to 
convince me I was not on board the Laugh- 
ing Mary as to insist I had been mistaken in 
believing I saw Barnes, and it was not my 
purpose to let the matter drop in that 
fashion. 

Calling Clark into the cabin, I asked him 
to tell what he had seen, and to repeat that 
he could not have been in error regarding the 
corporal’s face. 

“When I first noticed him he stood a little 
back from the others, and I had the thought 
he was getting a general idea of the lay of 
the schooner. Even though it was possible 
to see only a portion of his face, I knew him 
at once. He kept edging nearer the water 
till he was in full view, and there’s no mis- 
take about its being him.” 

“Clark did not say to me whom he had 


246 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

seen, but asked me to look at the fellow with 
the scarlet shirt,” I added. “Instantly I 
recognized Barnes, and it is certain, Thad, 
that he is in New York at this moment.” 

My comrades could not fail to be convinced 
by this time, but Peleg continued to repeat 
that it would not have been possible for the 
mutineers to leave Barren Island, until I 
asked sharply: 

“How can you say a vessel or a boat did 
not put in at the island within five minutes 
after we set them ashore? You insist that 
no craft comes that way oftener than once 
in two or three weeks, all of which may be 
true, and yet remain equally a fact that our 
prisoners found a chance to escape within a 
few hours after we left.” 

“You may be right,” Peleg replied thought- 
fully; “but allowin’ it be true, how could 
they get up to the city? The Britishers are 
in the Narrows, an’ you know by this time 
that they don’t let people sail back an’ forth 
at will.” 

This question staggered me an instant, 
although it did not shake my belief in the 
identity of Barnes, and I was about to sug- 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 247 

gest he might have come across the country, 
when it was as if the whole matter had been 
spread out before my eyes. 

“If, as I have believed since the hour he 
succeeded in getting possession of the 
schooner, he is a spy in the pay of the 
British, it would be little trouble for him to 
come through the Narrows.” 

“Now you’ve hit the truth!” Thad cried 
emphatically as he leaped to his feet. “He 
has proposed to come back to New York for 
the purpose of seizing this schooner, and by 
such means will not only be working in the 
interest of those who are paying him, but at 
the same time be gaining his own revenge, 
for it is not likely he looks upon us other 
than as enemies.” 

I believed, as indeed all did, that Thad had 
made a true guess, and it was by no means 
pleasant to thus know some blow would be 
aimed directly at us. 

“It stands this crew in hand to keep their 
eyes open mighty wide,” Peleg said after we 
had remained silent fully a minute contem- 
plating all the possibilities, “for I count 
myself as one of you till I’ve been regularly 


248 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

discharged. That scoundrel ain’t alone in the 
city, but most likely has plenty to back him.” 

“Tin the man he’ll strike for first,” Clark 
said in a low tone as if almost ashamed to 
give words to his fears. “Neither he nor 
the cook will forgive me for having set you 
free when the storm was raging.” 

“I reckon he’ll think most of cutting out 
the schooner, an’ after that’s been done he’ll 
have good chance to ’tend to private grudges. 
Captain,” and now Peleg spoke gravely, “it 
ain’t for me, who’s only what you might 
call a ’foremast hand, to say anything ’bout 
how the ship should be run; but I’m makin’ 
bold enough to hint that while we’re at 
anchor it’ll be safer to have two on watch 
than one.” 

“You are right, Peleg. ’Liphalet and 
Clark shall take the first trick to-night, with 
you and Sam to relieve them. Colonel Tup- 
per ought to know that Barnes is in town, 
and I am going over to headquarters. I can 
row ashore alone.” 

“Better let us set you off, an’ then we’ll be 
more certain of findin* my dory when we 
want her again.” 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 249 

Thad was not one to neglect any precau- 
tion, however useless it might seem at the 
time, and Sam and Peleg pulled him ashore 
a few moments later, leaving me at leisure 
to think over how we could best guard 
against a surprise. 

The captain was not absent more than an 
hour, and on his return reported that the 
colonel had appeared considerably excited 
when told of Barnes’ return. 

“But for the fact that a battle is imminent 
he declares he would have the city searched 
from one end to the other,” Thad said. “He 
wanted to send a squad of men on board to 
help us if a large force became necessary; 
but I begged off, telling him we were able to 
defend the schooner, and, what was better, 
knew there were no traitors among our num- 
ber, which might not be the case if strangers 
were added to the crew.” 

During my watch on deck this night I did 
not remain below a single moment, and it can 
readily be understood that neither Clark nor 
I had any desire for sleep while on duty. 

At midnight we were relieved by Peleg 
and Sam, and when morning came each 


250 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY.’ 

watch reported that nothing suspicious had 
been seen. 

On this day and the next we were provided 
with plenty of work, and on the night of the 
26 th all hands had begun to fancy we were 
needlessly alarmed about Barnes. 

Very likely he was yet in the city playing 
the part of spy, but because nothing had 
occurred during the forty -eight hours while 
such vigilant watch had been kept, we were 
so foolish as to believe no real danger 
threatened. 

That the British had not made an attack 
seemed more odd than Barnes’ inaction, and 
among very many of our troops the idea 
gained ground that there would be no battle 
in the vicinity of New York. 

Clark and I had the last watch this night, 
and when I came on deck at twelve o’clock 
Sam reported that everything was quiet. 

“The fact of Barnes not having shown him- 
self since that evening either proves he saw 
he was discovered, or Lord Howe’s plans 
have been so changed as to abandon the at- 
tack on Brooklyn Heights, and in any case 
the scoundrel will be more cautious,” Sam 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 251 


said in the tone of one who is convinced he 
has hit upon the truth of a matter. “Most 
likely he counted on being able to work 
some mischief while a battle was being 
fought.” 

Although I did not apprehend any im- 
mediate danger either to our friends or our- 
selves, there was no carelessness on my part 
or that of Clark. 

We paced the deck regularly, taking good 
care to understand the cause of every un- 
usual noise, but hearing nothing until an 
hour before dawn, when the sound of oars 
quickened our senses. 

A boat in which were four men was pulled 
almost entirely around the Laughing Mary, 
and I hailed her. 

Almost at the same instant I spoke the 
strangers steered sharply out into the stream 
and, owing to the darkness, it was impos- 
sible for us to say in which direction they 
went after that. 

There may have been nothing to excite 
suspicion in this maneuver ; the early visitors 
might have come from some one of the many 
vessels in the harbor, or were farmers bent 


252 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


on taking their wares to the British fleet, 
and there were not a few who would sell 
supplies to the enemy because he was willing 
to pay a higher price than the citizens. 

However, whether we had cause to be sus- 
picious or not, there was nothing more to be 
learned regarding the boat, and when our 
watch Anally came to an end I reported the 
fact to Sam as if I did not consider it of 
great importance. 

Then, as was our right because of having 
stood a flve-hour trick, Clark and I turned in. 

Expecting Sam would call me when break- 
fast was ready, I did not get up immediately 
on awakening, but lay in the bunk idly, 
knowing full well if any service was needed 
I should be promptly informed of the fact. 

After a certain time, however, it seenjed 
as if I could remain there no longer, and I 
went on deck, discovering to my great sur- 
prise that although it was late in the day my 
comrades appeared to be thinking of any- 
thing rather than their duty. 

“What is the matter?” I asked. “Is there 
nothing to be done to-day? Why are you 
fellows walking around with your heads in 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


253 


the air as if something startling could be 
heard?” 

“We do hear something,” Thad replied 
gravely. “Listen!” 

His manner, quite as much as his words, 
caused me to obey, and I heard a noise as of 
distant thunder. 

Even now I did not realize what this heavy 
rumbling might mean, and said stupidly: 

“I don’t hear anything to disturb us. Why 
do we remain at anchor so long?” 

“Because no orders to the contrary have 
been received. Can’t you understand that 
the British are attacking our people? That 
you are listening to the noise of a battle?” 

Now that the matter had been thus forced 
through my thick head I was in a fever of 
excitement. 

The enemy had not been afraid to open an 
engagement, but simply waited until they 
were ready, and like a flash of light the 
thought came to my mind that but a short 
distance away our friends were engaged in 
deadly struggle against an overwhelming 
force, braving and meeting death that the 
cause might triumph. 


254 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


“Are we to lie here idle while a battle is 
being fought?” I cried as if in frenzy. “If 
the British outnumber our friends two to 
one, why is not every man and boy called 
upon to do his full share of the work?” 

“That is for our commanders to say. It is 
as much our duty to remain here at anchor 
ready for whatever orders come as to be on 
Long Island confronting the redcoats,” Thad 
said gravely. “Could I have my choice we 
would be there this moment.” 

Even as he spoke I noted the fact that 
Peleg was not on deck, and asked concerning 
him. 

“He was sent for shortly after you turned 
in, and I heard the messenger ask if he was 
acquainted with the roads on Long Island, 
therefore concluded his services were re- 
quired as a guide.” 

Then Thad fell silent, as indeed we all did, 
for there was something positively painful in 
the enforced inactivity while we knew be- 
yond a peradventure that our friends were 
struggling against overwhelming odds. 

It is not possible for me to set down here 
of my own knowledge very much of what 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


255 


we did during the long, wearisome hours of 
this day. There were very many times when 
it seemed as if I was no more than a pair of 
huge ears, so intent was every faculty in the 
act of listening. 

Now and then one or the other of us would 
cry out as some man passed along the water 
front, asking if any news of the battle had 
been gained, and our questions were un- 
heeded more often than answered — it was as 
if a panic of fear, perhaps I should say ap- 
prehension, had seized upon those who yet 
remained in the city. 

It might have been two hours after noon 
when occurred that to which we have since 
looked back many times with pride. 

A party of horsemen — eighteen in all, I 
think — came at full speed down the street, 
and Sam cried excitedly as he pointed 
toward them: 

“Look! It is General Washington himself! 
Now, please God, we shall have work to do!” 

Colonel Tupper rode with the party, and 
he it was who shouted for us to warp the 
schooner into White Hall Slip that the horse- 
men might embark. 


256 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

The tide was at such height that the deck 
of the Laughing Mary stood nearly flush 
with the slip, and the officers leaped their 
horses aboard, one of the generals — I don’t 
remember which, but am certain it was not 
the commander-in-chief — giving the word for 
us to cast ofl* and make sail for the Brooklyn 
shore with the least possible delay. 

We had a free wind, not strong, but suffi- 
cient to send the schooner onward faster than 
a ten-oared galley could have been rowed, 
and it can well be fancied that we in charge 
of the Laughing Mary, proud with the 
thought of conveying such passengers, ex- 
erted ourselves to the utmost that the voyage 
should be speedy. 

Even now as I look back on that time it 
seems as if we had hardly left the slip when 
we arrived at the opposite shore, and as the 
horsemen landed Colonel Tupper gave orders 
that the schooner lay where she was then 
moored until word to the contrary was sent, 
unless, peradventure, the enemy should 
appear, in which case we were to take due 
measures to save the vessel from capture. 

We spent the hours until perhaps nine 


CAPTURE OP THE LAUGHING MARY. 257 

o’clock pacing to and fro on the deck, be- 
wailing the fact that our part in this day’s 
work was so insignificant, and were startled 
even though on the alert, when hailed by 
some one from the shore. 

“Ahoy!” Thad replied, and we heard Peleg 
Symonds’ voice as he said half to himself: 

“It’s a case of clear luck, my stumblin’ 
upon the schooner without havin’ a notion of 
where she laid!” 

Now at last we would hear of what had 
been done, and I warrant you the fisherman 
had never received a more hearty welcome 
than we gave him as he came over the rail. 

“We are beaten!” he exclaimed without 
waiting for our questions. “Not whipped 
straight out of our boots, but still have had a 
pretty stiff dose, and to-morrow it may be 
worse than to-day.” 

We were almost stunned by the news he 
brought. 

Because of not having seen our friends 
retreating, we believed them to be victorious, 
or at least to have held their own with the 
Britishers, and it was as if Peleg’s words had 
deprived us of the power of speech. 


^58 CAPTURE OP THE LAUGHINa MARY. 

“I reckon I can give you about as good an 
idee of what has been done as Colonel Tup- 
per himself could,” the fisherman said as he 
threw himself on the deck like one ex- 
hausted. “I have been hither and yon since 
leaving the schooner, till it seems that I have 
traveled over every foot of ground on Long 
Island, an’ haven’t lost a single chance to 
ask questions. Here is the story of the 
battle, an’ when it’s finished Clark must set 
out my full day’s rations, for, barrin’ a little 
water now an’ then, nothin’ has passed my 
lips since I went ashore this mornin’.” 

“Come into the galley,” Thad said, “and 
while supper is being made ready we can 
hear the story.” 

It can well be imagined that all hands of 
us did our best at making Peleg comfortable, 
and when he was ready to give an account of 
the day’s work, I stationed myself just out- 
side the galley to keep watch lest any evil- 
disposed person should approach from the 
shore ; yet not so far from the speaker but 
that I could hear his story. 

“Early this mornin’, an’ these words came 
from General Putnam himself when he was 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 259 

explainin’ to the commander-in-chief what 
had happened,” Peleg began, “the British 
General Grant, with what they call the High- 
land regiments, came up the coast road to 
our outposts, where was commanding Will- 
iam Alexander, of New Jersey, whom some 
call Lord Stirling. General von Heister led 
the Hessians along the Bedford and Flatbush 
road toward General Sullivan’s position, and 
a host of the redcoats under Howe himself, 
with Clinton, Percy, and Cornwallis in the 
train, made a night march on the Jamaica 
road to take our people in flank.” 

“What do you mean by ‘flank?’ Sam 
asked, and Peleg replied carelessly: 

“It is because I could not rightly make out 
myself that I remember the words so well. 
At all events, that is the way General Put- 
nam put it, an’ I allow it comes mighty nigh 
bein’ straight. It seems, accordin’ to all 
accounts, that there was a patrol of flve men 
on the Jamaica road, sent to that point for 
the special purpose of watchin’ out on the 
Britishers. But them flve, not content with 
obeyin’ orders, an’ believin’ they knew a 
little more’n the commandin’ officers did. 


260 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


left their posts to push forward on the road 
with the idee of discoverin’ the redcoats 
sooner. 

“They found ’em; but not until after some 
of Clinton’s men had made them prisoners, 
an’ that settled all chance of our friends bein’ 
warned in time. Consequently General Sulli- 
van had no sooner begun fightin’ with the 
Hessians under Yon Heister than Howe’s 
troops tackled him in the rear. That settled 
his part of the battle. 

“Then him as they call Lord Stirling 
caught it thick an’ fast. He showed good 
plucky so I’ve heard said, though he was in a 
trap where it didn’t seem possible any of his 
troops could get out. But a good part of ’em 
did reach the Heights again, by breakin’ 
ranks an’ crossin’ the marshes the best way 
they knew how, while the Scotchman, with 
some Maryland men, held the redcoats in 
check.” 

“Is that all you have to tell?” Thad asked 
as Peleg paused. 

“It comes pretty nigh to bein’ the whole of 
it. Lord Stirling has been captured, more 
than a thousand of our people are in the 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 261 

Britishers’ hands, an’ four or five hundred 
have fought their last battle.” 

“Killed, do you mean?” Sam asked in 
horror. 

“Yes, lad, killed an’ wounded. It is said 
the redcoats have suffered, except so far as 
prisoners go, in about the same figgers. We 
still hold Brooklyn Heights, an’ General 
Howe’s men are in front of us ready for 
work to-morrow morning. I have always 
had an idee I would like to see a battle ; 
but that is gone out of my head from this day. 
It don’t sound very terrible as we set round 
here talkin’, to say that this ’ere force came 
up on the other, an’ forty or fifty were killed. 
To know what them few words mean a man 
needs to be on the ground — to see the brave 
fellows mowed down till great gaps are left 
in the line, an’ hear the cries of them as are 
mangled or dyin’ — to understand that all 
hands are tryin’ to butcher each other. 

“There don’t seem to be much glory left in 
war after that. I allow them as are fightin’ 
haven’t the time to look at it, or else they 
come so nigh bein’ wild with excitement as 
not to hear or see all that’s terrible; but I 


262 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

was there only to show others the way, an’ 
please God I may never play such a part 
again.” 

Peleg covered his face with his hands as 
if to shut out the remembrance, and thus I 
had a better idea of the horrors he had seen, 
for the fisherman was not one who might be 
easily moved. 

Each of us in turn asked some question, 
hoping there might be a bright side to his 
story, but we received no encouraging 
information. 

That our forces were beaten there appeared 
to be no doubt in his mind, and one would 
have said, judging from Peleg’ s words and 
manner, that the end of the struggle for in- 
dependence had' come here on Brooklyn 
Heights, before our people had really had 
time to measure strength with the foe. 

There came to me the question as to why 
our army did not retreat, for then I knew 
very little regarding military matters. 

“If we stay here who shall say the British- 
ers will not capture us also?” I asked, and 
perhaps my voice trembled, for my heart was 
quaking with fear. 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 263 

“If we stay here?” Thad exclaimed. 
“There can be no question about it. The 
orders were for us to remain, and here we 
shall stop whether the British come or not.” 

“The redcoats won’t get over the Heights 
without a struggle, that I warrant you, lads!” 
Peleg cried excitedly. “We have had a 
drubbin’ this day; but there’s none among 
our friends who can be called cowards, an’ 
all hands are bound to give a good account of 
themselves before the end comes. If things 
turn as now it seems they must, we on board 
the Laughing Mary will have plenty of work, 
considerin’ as how there’s such a stretch of 
water between the American troops an’ New 
York.” 

Then it was as if we could no longer talk 
quietly regarding what had happened, or 
listen one to the other; but each put forth 
his own opinion until we realized our foolish- 
ness, when a silence like that of despair fell 
upon us. 

Peleg forgot that he was hungry, and we 
gave no heed to the fact that he had not 
eaten the food set before him until an hour 
must have passed, and then Thad, as if sud- 


264 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

denly aroused to a sense of duty, said 
sharply : 

“If all our people were like us, the Ameri- 
can army would have been whipped before 
the British advanced. We have been left in 
charge of a schooner with the idea our serv- 
ices may be needed, and now more than 
ever is it necessary each one should be on 
the alert, ready to succor our friends, or to 
inflict some injury upon those who would 
deprive us of our rights. We must be pre- 
pared to sail at a moment’s notice, and there 
is work to be done instead of sitting here 
quaking with fear because the king’s troops 
have gained one victory!” 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 265 


CHAPTER XIV. 

A NIGHT ATTACK. 

Thad’s brave words heartened us all, and 
indeed on that night we needed to be 
cheered, for the knowledge that the British- 
ers had gained a victory made it appear as if 
the cause was doomed. 

It is true we knew before the battle began 
that our troops were outnumbered nearly 
two to one, and that they were unaccustomed 
to military duties, while the enemy’s ranks 
were made up of well-seasoned, well-tried 
soldiers. 

Yet because we wished it so we had be- 
lieved all such odds would be overcome, and 
fighting as our friends were, not only for 
liberty, but for their homes and those dear 
to them, it had been in our minds that they 
must be victorious. 

Now, as I have stated, the fact that the 


266 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

American troops had been overcome — it 
cannot be said they were vanquished, since 
according to Peleg’s story we still held the 
position assumed in the morning, and were 
keeping the redcoats at bay — plunged us into 
a state of greatest despondency, and we were 
ready to believe most serious misfortunes 
would be ours on the following day. 

When, however, Thad reminded us on 
board the Laughing Mary of the fact that 
regardless of what had happened we had yet 
a duty to perform, it quickened us out of our 
gloom, and in a brief space of time each one, 
with the exception of Peleg, who had already 
done more than a day’s work, was about 
some task for the better defense of the 
schooner, or on the alert for possible danger. 

We believed General Washington and his 
staff would, if a retreat was made, look to 
us for conveyance to the other side, and, 
according to Sam’s suggestion, we made a 
brave show of lights fore and aft, heeding not 
the fact that we were proclaiming our where- 
abouts to the enemy, but setting the signals 
boldly that there might be no difficulty in 
finding the Laughing Mary should need arise. 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 267 

It was, perhaps, a little past midnight when 
we had completed all the preparations for 
defense which could be devised, and then 
came those hours which pass most painfully 
at such times — the hours when one is forced 
to remain inactive, although knowing there 
is much to*do were he in the proper place. 

Thad, mindful of the fact that our services 
would be needed on the morrow more than 
now, insisted we make it a duty to get such 
rest as might be possible, and to this end 
divided the crew into two watches, each of 
which was to stand an hour’s trick. 

It was decided the captain and Sam should 
go first on duty, Thad having insisted upon 
doing his share because of the fact that 
Peleg could not rightfully be called upon 
after his day of excessive labor. 

Clark and I went below, but there was no 
heaviness of slumber upon our eyelids. We 
had been so thoroughly awakened by the 
knowledge of the disasters that it seemed 
impossible we could close our eyes in sleep 
this night. 

However, after a certain time the languor 
of weariness began to creep over me, and I 


268 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

became dimly conscious of the fact that I 
would soon be overpowered by slumber, 
when a sharp cry from the deck and the 
heavy trampling of feet brought me out of 
the bunk in an instant. 

Clark was staring wildly about him ; but 
without having attempted to arise, and, 
shouting for him to follow, I ran up the com- 
panionway at full speed. 

On coming into the open air it was for a 
moment difficult to make out what was being 
done. 

I saw Thad and Sam standing by the star- 
board rail, and it seemed to me as if they 
were alone, for all was darkness beyond the 
glare of the lanterns. 

At the same instant I gained the deck 
Peleg came from the galley where we had 
left him lying down, and, quicker-witted 
than I, appeared to realize at once the cause 
of the alarm. 

I saw him seize a capstan bar which was 
standing against the water cask, and with 
that as a weapon rush toward my comrades. 

Then it was I distinguished forms in the 
darkness, as if men were swarming up over 



Laughing Mart/, p. 2G9. 







vr 









It 

• / ’ i 




« * 


' ..'^ I 


>* 


Pl»l 





?► 

ii’\k‘p# . ' > *u 

” f *■■■ 

B ^ -. > . X ' 1 


iU 

,-V 

1 < 




" V .T.K ' ^ 


1 



:• 1 , < 




.i;». 













f A/*‘ 

»j£ ; * 


m 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 269 

the side, and I ran forward at full speed, now 
beginning to have an inkling of what was 
going on. 

Arriving at the rail by Thad’s side I saw 
that a boat which seemed to be filled with 
men was alongside the schooner, and then 
came the thought that Corporal Barnes had 
led a party here to the Laughing Mary. 

It would be impossible for me to set down 
of my own knowledge all which occurred 
during the next ten minutes, for I had but 
little idea of anything save the fact that I 
was straining every muscle to prevent the 
schooner from being boarded. 

During this time the battle was waged 
silently, and later I came to understand that 
the enemy, whoever they might be, were not 
overanxious to make a noise lest our 
friends, being perhaps near by on the shore, 
should come to the rescue. 

On our part we made no outcry simply 
because at that moment it did not seem as if 
an appeal for aid would be of any avail. 

I had a belaying-pin, and with it beat off*, 
I know not how, a fellow with a knife who 
was doing his utmost to run me through. 


270 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

It had been a long battle, or seemed so to 
me, when two of our assailants gained the 
deck by dropping into the water and swim- 
ming forward, and as they made a dash aft 
over the bow I recognized Barnes. 

Then it was I yelled, not in the hope of 
attracting assistance, but to warn my com- 
rades that the traitor was one of the foe, and 
it was as if in a twinkling my cries changed 
the tide of battle. 

“Hold on a minute longer, my hearties!” 
Thad shouted as he ran into the cabin, and 
was still urging us to renewed exertions 
when he reappeared. 

Then I^heard a report immediately behind 
me, followed by a cry of pain, and Thad 
shouted again: 

“Get aft here, lads, and arm yourselves! 
It is not for us to fight with sticks at such a 
time as this!” 

The enemy was pressing us hard. 

Already had we retreated step by step from 
the moment the first two appeared over the 
bow until all the occupants of the boat were 
on deck, and it was high time indeed we had 
recourse to more deadly weapons. 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 271 

Luckily the muskets were loaded, that 
having been a portion of our work when we 
prepared for defense, and as we broke and 
ran Thad stood ready to pass each a weapon, 
thrusting the arms into our hands so expedi- 
tiously that we were facing the renegades 
before they were within striking distance. 

I waited, as did my companions, for the 
word “fire” to be given; but in a twinkling 
the decks were cleared, for, seeing how well 
we were now prepared, the scoundrels beat a 
hasty retreat by leaping over the rail into 
the water. 

Their hope had most likely been to take us 
by surprise, believing not more than two 
would be above at that time in the night, 
when it might be an easy matter for a boat’s 
crew to make their way on to the deck, and 
once having gained the hold unobserved, the 
Laughing Mary would be in their possession 
with hardly so much as a blow. 

Peleg rushed to the rail as the fellows 
leaped over, and would have fired upon them 
while they were in the water, but that Thad 
struck up his weapon as he cried: 

“That is not the way we’ve been taught to 


272 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

fight, Symonds. They have retreated, and 
are defenseless. It would be little less than 
murder to shoot them now.” 

“It is no more than they’d do to us. How 
long do you reckon that scoundrel Barnes 
would stand idle if you were swimmin’ out 
yonder, an’ he here with a musket in his 
hands?” 

“There are many things he is willing to do 
which would put us to shame if we took 
pattern by him. It is enough that they have 
retreated.” 

Peleg was far from being satisfied with this 
decision, and I could not but sympathize with 
him in his grumbling, for it seemed a waste 
of opportunity to allow those who would 
have worked us so much harm to swim off at 
their leisure. 

“I reckon we are not obliged to carry their 
boat out to them,” Sam said in a tone which 
told that he also disapproved of the captain’s 
command, and at the same moment he leaped 
into the craft which, having been moored to 
the fore-rigging, was close alongside. 

The boat was no mean prize for us, as we 
soon learned. 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 273 

From out of her Sam threw on to the deck 
three uniforms, a goodly store of provisions 
in the shape of smoked fish, hams and bacon, 
four muskets, a keg of powder and a 
quantity of bullets. 

“Well, that beats me!” Peleg said as he 
stood with us surveying the spoils. “Why 
in the name of all that’s good did those 
scoundrels fight so long with clubs, when 
they might have ended the battle in their 
favor by a dozen of these ’ere balls?” 

There was indeed good reason for surprise, 
and we could make no reasonable explanation 
as to why they refrained from using arms, 
until we were hailed from the shore by one 
who spoke impatiently, as if wearied with 
trying to attract our attention. 

“Ahoy on the vessel!” the voice cried. 
“Answer, or we’ll open fire!” 

“Ahoy!” Thad shouted. 

“What vessel is that?” 

“The Continental schooner Laughing 
Mary.” 

“What has been going on out there?” said 
the voice on shore. 

“A boat’s crew attempted to board us, and 


274 CAPTUKE OP THE LAUGHING MARY. 

we have just beaten them off. Did you hail 
before?” 

“Yes; a dozen times. Do you know who 
attacked you? Was it a party of British 
soldiers or sailors?” 

“The leader is a deserter from the Ameri- 
can army by the name of Barnes, and I think 
his following were Tories from New York. 
There may have been a soldier or two among 
them, for we found four uniforms in the boat 
they left behind.” 

“Which way did they go?” 

“Overboard, and must have landed close 
around somewhere.” 

We heard the command given for the guard 
to turn out, and soon a hum of voices here 
and there told that soldiers were searching 
along the shore for those who had attacked 
us. 

Now we understood why Barnes and his 
party did not use their muskets. 

They doubtless knew that some of our 
forces were encamped close by on the shore, 
and understood that the discharge of fire- 
arms would betray their purpose. 

We hoisted the boat inboard, determined 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 275 


the scoundrels should not regain possession 
of it, and then gave ourselves up to listening 
for those sounds which would betoken that our 
assailants had been captured. 

In this we were not to be gratified, for the 
noise on shore soon died away, and all was 
silent again until it was difficult to persuade 
oneself that armed men were encamped 
close at hand. 

When we had waited half an hour or more, 
hearing nothing, and Peleg was on the point 
of betaking himself again to his hard bed in 
the galley, we were hailed from the shore, 
this time by a voice which we [recognized as 
Colonel Tapper’s. 

“Send a boat in for me,” was the order 
given after Thad had replied to the cry, and 
from that moment until twenty-four hours 
had elapsed we had no idle time on our 
hands. 

Colonel Tapper had come with orders for 
us to return to New York to bring over rein- 
forcements, which work we began before 
daylight and continued until night. 

General Howe’s forces had made no at- 
tempt to storm Brooklyn Heights again, which 


276 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

showed, to my satisfaction at least, that their 
victory on the day before was not counted by 
them as complete as it had seemed to us, 
otherwise they would have pressed their 
advantage. 

It was sunset on this twenty-eighth of 
August in the first year of our independence 
— if indeed we can call it our independence 
when we are flying hither and yon before 
the British soldiery. I say, it was sunset on 
this day when we of the Laughing Mary 
ceased our work as ferrymen, and once more 
lay at anchor hard by the Brooklyn shore at 
a short distance from the ferry-way. 

Peleg, who appeared not to need rest, 
begged of Thad permission to make a short 
cruise on shore in search of news, for mind 
you, we had been ferrying men across from 
New York, seeing no one who could tell us of 
what was being done at the Heights, although 
we knew full well an engagement had not 
taken place. 

The fisherman remained absent no more 
than two hours, and when he returned was 
but little wiser than before. 

“Our people don’t seem overly well pleased 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 277 

at seein’ strangers, even though they might 
be friends,” Peleg said gravely when ques- 
tioned as to the result of his mission. ‘‘I 
reckoned it wouldn’t be much of a job to 
tramp out to the front; but bless you, at 
every hundred yards or so some popinjay of 
an officer would jump out an’ ask for the 
countersign. I was willin’ enough to tell 
’em who I was, an’ why I’d come; but that 
didn’t seem to make any difference. The 
upshot of the whole thing is that I haven’t 
been very far from the ferry in all this time, 
an’ it’s precious little news I’ve got.” 

“Why didn’t the British attack our peo- 
ple?” Thad asked impatiently. 

“That’s what I can’t say, an’ I ain’t so 
certain General Washington himself knows. 
The redcoats are layin’ in front of the 
Heights, while we’ve been pourin’ in men till 
it’s said there are nigh to ten thousand 
Americans inside the fortifications.” 

“Will there be a battle in the morning?” I 
asked. 

“That is what everybody seems to believe, 
an’ for my part I don’t see what’s to 
prevent.” 


278 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

More than this we could not learn, closely 
though we questioned the fisherman, and 
again we made preparations for guarding the 
schooner during the night. 

Now, however, the camp fires of our people 
could be seen close at hand, and we had little 
fear of another attack from Barnes and his 
followers, even though they had escaped, 
which last did not seem probable. 

I believed, as did my companions, that the 
scoundrels had been captured somewhere 
along the shore when they landed ; but this 
we had no means of ascertaining. 

Two of us were constantly on deck during 
the night without seeing anything to cause 
alarm. 

Until noon of the next day, which would 
be the 29th, the two armies remained facing 
each other, neither disposed to strike the first 
blow. 

Our work began shortly after twelve 
o’clock, when we carried Colonel Trumble to 
New York, and understood from what he said 
that some important movement was about to 
begin. 

That which follows may sound tame and 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 279 


uninteresting should any one read this record 
who did not take part in the retreat from 
Long Island ; but to us who were there it was 
indeed most exciting, for by sunset even we 
in command of the Laughing Mary under- 
stood that General Washington’s purpose 
was to transfer all his troops from one shore 
to the other secretly. 

Never before have I seen such a fleet of 
boats as gathered near the ferry -way from 
two hours after we landed Colonel Trumble 
in New York, until sunset. 

I believe of a verity that every craft which 
could be kept afloat, from a punt to an eight- 
oared galley, was collected from the water 
front of the city as far up as King’s Bridge, 
and then, troop after troop, our men came 
silently down, taking their places in the boat 
nearest at hand, and pulling off from shore 
instantly she had a load. 

The Laughing Mary was of but little serv- 
ice that night because of the absence of 
wind; but Peleg’s dory, manned by himself 
and Clark, and the boat which Barnes’ party 
had abandoned, pulled by Sam and myself 
with such assistance from our passengers as 


280 CAPTURE OF I'HE LAUGHING MARY. 

we could get, plied back and forth with the 
hundreds of other craft until of all that vast 
army none remained on Long Island at sun- 
rise save the six regiments which held the 
redoubts under General Mifflin’s command. 

Wearied almost to exhaustion, my com- 
rades and myself clambered over the rail of 
the schooner when the day had fully dawned, 
and tired and hungry though we were, there 
was but one thought in our minds: How 
were the brave men who had been left be- 
hind to be brought away in safety, for but 
little time could elapse now before the 
Britishers must understand what had been 
done during the hours of darkness? 

“They have sacrificed themselves to save 
the main army,” Thad said in a voice chok- 
ing with emotion, and it was as if the words 
had but just been spoken when Peleg cried 
excitedly : 

“If that don’t beat all creation!” 

He stood staring toward the harbor, and 
we gathered around him asking an explana- 
tion, for we saw nothing which should have 
caused surprise until he said : 

“Can’t you see that fog bank rolling up? 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 281 

Don’t you know what it means to our friends 
in the redoubt? In less than ten minutes 
we shall be in a smother here that will puzzle 
Admiral Howe to see through, an’ Mifflin’s 
jnen can cross as safely as if they were on 
the other side this blessed minute!” 

It did not seem possible Peleg had spoken 
truly, and yet as we gazed the gray bank 
came nearer and nearer until it crept down 
upon the Laughing Mary, hiding from us 
who stood aft, first the bowsprit, then the 
galley, and still onward until we were in the 
midst of a wool-like vapor which appeared 
as if sent by God himself. 

Up to this moment we of the Laughing 
Mary had done no more than hundreds and 
hundreds of others who rowed to and fro 
from one shore to the other ; but now we were 
able, as I hoped, to be of material assistance. 

Understanding that all the movements 
must be made quietly, and that it would be 
difficult for our friends to determine the 
location of any craft save those drawn up on 
the shore, Peleg forgot weariness of body 
and leaped into the dory to push off, as he 
said hurriedly: 


282 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

“I’ll pull in an’ be ready when the first of 
the troops that have been left behind appear 
on the shore, and meanwhile do you lads 
work the schooner as near the ferry-way as 
may be safe. This smother will confuse the 
landsmen until all are bewildered, unless 
some one is at hand to show them the way 
out.” 

While we were thus engaged there came 
from the dense vapor low, cautious hails, 
which we knew to be from the opposite 
shore, and Clark was stationed at the rail to 
answer these and thus lead the advancing 
boats in the right direction. 

Not more than half the day had passed 
before it was said the last man of the Ameri- 
can army had come down from the Heights, 
and then it was that General Washington 
with his stafi*, all looking as if ready to drop 
from fatigue, rode to the landing, and we of 
the Laughing Mary had the honor of ferry- 
ing the party across. 

It was a long passage, and but for Peleg I 
fear we might have gone sadly out of our 
way, which would have been a misfortune 
while we had such passengers on board. 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 283 

I had hoped to hear the commander -in- 
chief say something which might give us an 
inkling of how desperate he believed the 
situation to be ; but my duty was forward as 
a lookout while we almost felt our way 
across, and I did not so much as see him 
after he came on board, until he landed at 
Ten Eyck’s wharf. 

We who were as tired as lads well could be 
understood why there was no tarrying on the 
part of the commander and his staff when it 
was possible for them to go on shore, and 
therefore it was that we took it as all the 
more kindly when Colonel Tupper lingered 
to say, as he placed his hand on Thad’s 
shoulder, but looked around at us all as if 
we should know he was speaking to every 
one: 

“You have done good work, lads — work 
such as men need not be ashamed of, and 
although these days seem dark and without 
promise, the hour will yet come when there 
shall be more of brightness for all of us who 
love the cause, and then your share in this 
task so well performed will not be for- 
gotten.” 


284 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

Saying this he followed his fellow -officers, 
and as we three comrades stood looking into 
each others’ faces, proud of what had been 
said to us, I saw Clark moving slowly, I 
almost fancied sadly, forward toward the 
galley. 

Thad also noted his action, and calling 
him back to us said heartily : 

“Those words spoken by Colonel Tupper 
were meant as much for you and Peleg as 
for us.” 

“For Peleg, yes; but for me who once 
turned traitor they could not be meant.” 

“All that is as if it never had been,” Thad 
replied quickly, and Sam and I held out our 
hands to show we were of the same mind, 
when Peleg added: 

“You are the mildest-mannered traitor I 
ever ran across, Clark, an’ if it so be there 
had been a hundred more of the same kind, 
who could do such work, the American 
troops would have got across the river in 
better time. Take my advice, man, an’ from 
this day out cease callin’ yourself a traitor, 
for that which you did when the villain 
Barnes had the upper hand has been atoned 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 285 

for, accordin’ to my way of thinkin’. Barrin’ 
Colonel Tapper, an’ we of this ’ere schooner, 
nobody is any the wiser for what happened 
’twixt Red Hook an’ Barren Island, an’ I’ll 
venture to promise in the names of us all that 
it’ll never be told as against you.” 


286 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


CHAPTEK XV. 

MYSTERIOUS ORDERS. 

During the two days following the retreat 
of our army from Long Island, we of the 
Laughing Mary had but little public work to 
do, and perhaps it was well that the members 
of the “fleet” were allowed a breathing 
spell, for Colonel Tupper had never a man 
under his command who was not well-nigh 
exhausted on the morning all the craft 
anchored or moored near Grand Battery. 

Although we who called ourselves mem- 
bers of the navy had had no flghting to do, 
neither were we required to aid in the task 
of throwing up breastworks when Brooklyn 
Heights was put into shape to receive the 
redcoats properly, yet every man and boy of 
us had worked to his utmost from the hour 
the battle began until all our troops were 
safe once more on the New York shore. 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 287 


I for one would not have been surprised at 
anything Lord Howe might have done on that 
morning after discovering we had given him 
the slip. 

As a matter of fact I fully expected the 
entire fleet would sail up and open Are on the 
city, as did my comrades, and we were as- 
tonished when the hours went by and he 
remained inactive. 

“It will come before we are many days 
older,” Thad said in the tone of one who has 
fully settled the question in his own mind. 
“ We should all prove ourselves simples if 
we believed my Lord Howe intended to hold 
his hand at this time, when we are very 
nearly the same as whipped, and once the 
work does begin, it will be all the hotter 
because of having been delayed a little.” 

“Then you think the cause is lost,” I said 
sadly, for it was in my mind before the cap- 
tain spoke that we Americans could not hold 
out much longer against the great force 
which the king had sent against us. 

“Indeed I think nothing of the kind!” 
Thad exclaimed with more Are than he had 
ever displayed toward me. “If you were 


288 CAPTUEE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

not my comrade I could have it in my heart 
to flog you for such despondency. So long 
as we hold our courage the cause will pro- 
gress ; it is lost only after those who now 
support it have turned cowards. Think you 
we of New York are the only Americans in 
arms? The people of Boston and of South 
Carolina did not show the white feather 
when they were hard pressed, else had that 
brave show of words which we heard read 
at the city hall never been written.” 

Heated as he was, Thad would have given 
me a yet warmer scorching for having ven- 
tured to so much as suggest that we were 
whipped, but for the coming of a soldier to 
the dock opposite where we were anchored, 
who displayed a signal for us to send a boat 
ashore. 

“There is more work for us!” Thad cried 
as he sprang toward Peleg’s dory, which was 
hauled alongside. 

“Let Sam and I go ashore. As the cap- 
tain, you should stay here,” I cried, trying 
to scramble into the boat before it was possi- 
ble for him to do so; but he swept me aside 
with his arm as one might remove a trouble- 


CAPTURE OP THE LAUGHING MARY. 289 

some child, and I knew that for the first 
time in our lives his heart was filled with 
anger against me. 

He repented of the act almost before it was 
committed, however, and said in a kindly 
tone as he paused to give me his hand : 

“I meant not those words for you, ’Liph- 
alet. What you said was in the same vein 
with all that had been in my own mind a few 
moments before, and I turned the matter 
over till I saw plainly what might be the 
result if we lost heart in these dark days. 
Forgive me.” 

“There is no need of that between us, 
Thad,” I said, and the tears of relief were 
very near my eyelids. “I know you could 
not be angry with me, understanding how 
cowardly and stupid lam.” 

“You shall not abuse yourself, ’Liphalet. 
You are as brave as the bravest when the 
moment of danger comes, as I have good 
reasons for saying.” 

Such praise was even harder to bear than 
had been his words of anger, knowing as I 
did that I deserved one no more than the 
other, and, failing in finding speech to please 


m CAPTURE OP THE LAUGHING MARY. 


me, I held him by the arm as I threw one 
leg over the rail. 

“Let me see what the messenger wants. 
You should remain on board, and not answer 
the beck and call of a private soldier,” I 
said. 

“What a stickler you have suddenly be- 
come for the rights of rank, ’Liphalet ! I had 
best go myself; the others are sleeping 
soundly, and it would be cruel to arouse 
them after such work as has been done. 
Eemain in charge of the schooner, and I will 
meet the messenger. But for your jealousy 
regarding a sergeant’s dignity, I would have 
finished the business before this.” 

He had leaped into the boat while speak- 
ing, and there was nothing left for me but to 
watch him as he pulled with vigorous strokes 
toward the landing place, like one who has 
been refreshed with rest and food, instead of, 
as was the case, a lad who had worked 
incessantly forty-eight hours. 

Sam, Peleg and Clark had turned in as 
soon as might be after the Laughing Mary’s 
anchor was down, leaving Thad and I on 
watch, and he was, as I have shown, far 


CAPTURE OP THE LAUGHING MARY. 291 

more mindful of their comfort than of his 
own privileges as captain of the schooner. 

I saw him step ashore, hold a short con- 
verse with the soldier, and then return 
hurriedly. 

It seemed certain more work had been 
found for us, and but for the fact that he 
pulled alongside so quickly I might have 
aroused the others of the crew, believing 
we were to get under way at once. 

“Where are we going?” I cried as he came 
over the rail. 

“We shall stay here. You are the one who 
is to go,” he said with a smile, and I stood 
looking at him stupidly. “Colonel Tupper 
has sent the messenger to say that ’Colonel 
Willett would have speech with Corporal 
Willett at headquarters, and at once.” 

“It must be you whom he wants to see,” 
I stammered, for I doubted not that my uncle 
had work cut out for the Laughing Mary, 
and it was with her commander he wished 
to talk. 

“The soldier has come for you, and I 
reckon it will be safer to obey the summons 
at once than to stand there on the chance of 


292 CAPTURE OP THE LAUGHING MARY. 

Colonel Willett’s having made a mistake,” 
Thad said laughingly, and by this time 1 
began to get my wits together. 

I knew full well there must be no delay, 
even though it should be proven I was not 
the one wanted, and because so much time 
had already been spent through my thick- 
headedness, I did not wait for other furbish- 
ing than to slip into my uniform coat. 

Thad, still unwilling to call either of the 
others from below, rowed me ashore, and 
said while doing so : 

“Eemember, ’Liphalet, that we are ready 
for anything Colonel Willett may want done. 
He thinks we are tired out, and has sent for 
you instead of me that he shall have no 
trouble about learning exactly our condition. 
Don’t let on that any of us need sleep, but 
make it appear as if we were rusting for lack 
of work.” 

“You need not be afraid, Thad, that I shall 
put on a poor mouth, or betray my coward- 
ice. I will represent the Laughing Mary as 
ready for sea at a moment’s notice, with the 
crew standing by the halliards hoping for 
sailing orders.” 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 293 


Then we were at the landing place, and as 
I stepped ashore Thad said to the soldier : 

“This is Corporal Willett.” 

“You are required to come to headquarters 
at once,” the man said as he saluted, and I 
bade him lead the way, meaning to have 
him where he could give evidence in case it 
should be proven I was not the person 
wanted. 

While following the messenger I was 
struck by the air of confusion on every hand. 

Squads of soldiers loitered around the 
streets, or disposed themselves indolently in 
the doorways of warehouses as if not know- 
ing where to go, or what to do. The side- 
walks were littered with camp equipage of 
every kind until one would have said the 
American army had dropped all its baggage 
in New York that the men might continue 
their flight unimpeded. 

It was a sight to sicken one who had the 
good of the cause at heart, for it told that 
our soldiers were now little better than 
stragglers — that the army had become a 
rabble. 

Had Lord Howe made an attack on the 


294 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

city that day I believe of a verity he could 
have worked his will with but little opp osi- 
tion. 

“Is there no regular place of encamp- 
ment?” I asked of the man who was guiding 
me. 

“Yes, and these fellows will soon find their 
way to it; but just now discipline is forgot- 
ten even by many of the officers.” 

“Suppose the enemy come this very hour?” 

“These men might fight ,> but I should 
sooner say all hands would run away. How- 
ever cleverly General Washington has con- 
trived to bring our troops off* from Long 
Island, it is none the less a retreat, and every 
private knows it as well as does his superior 
officer. The soldiers are dispirited because 
of the failure.” 

“It will be disaster, instead of a failure 
that can soon be remedied, if the men lose 
heart so readily,” I said, speaking as stoutly 
as I could, but wishing Thad was there to 
talk as he had to me a few moments before. 

The soldier shrugged his shoulders much 
as if to intimate that disaster was already 
upon us; but he held his peace, and I was 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 295 

too sore in mind, because of what could be 
seen on every hand, to say anything more, 
even though 1 realized it was my duty to 
arouse his courage. 

Arriving at the headquarters where my 
comrades and I attended the military court, 
I found matters much as they were on the 
streets through which we had passed, except 
that there was a greater show of activity, 
and in a short time I was standing before 
Colonel Willett, saluting him in proper 
fashion. 

“You are in command of the schooner 
Laughing Mary,” he said as if speaking to a 
stranger. 

“Thad Burr is the captain, sir,” I replied 
quickly, knowing now of a truth that he had 
sent for me under a misapprehension. “I 
am only the second mate.” 

“Yes, yes, I understand all that. You 
three are comrades, and it has been simply 
decided among you that he is to be in com- 
mand.” 

I bowed, not knowing what to say, for I 
was growing bewildered again. 

Surely Thad was the captain, whether we 


296 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

had elected him or he been given that posi- 
tion by Colonel Tupper, and if my uncle 
wanted to talk with the commander of the 
schooner I had no business there. 

“How many men have you on board now?” 
he asked suddenly. 

When I replied to this question he bade me 
tell him more regarding Peleg and Clark. 

“What I want to know,” he added, “is if 
they may be trusted as I can trust you?” 

I answered this by assuring him I was con- 
vinced Clark to be honest and loyal ; that he 
had had no hand in the mutiny until forced 
to it by press of numbers. As for Peleg, 
what he had already done was suflScient 
proof of his devotion to the cause. 

Colonel Willett listened patiently while I 
talked, and seemed convinced by my words, 
for when I had come to an end, having praised 
the fisherman and the soldier until nothing 
more could be said, he took my hand. 

“There is work to be done, and I am 
charged with its performance, Eliphalet,” he 
said in a most kindly tone. “Those who 
engage in it must be such as can be trusted 
implicitly, and I know of no one for whose 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 297 

honor and honesty I can vouch better than 
the son of my brother. Will you and your 
comrades undertake what may be in the 
highest degree dangerous?” 

I could make no better reply than to repeat 
what Thad had said to me before I came 
away, and he seemed pleased. 

“Your mother left the city this morning 
with my family, therefore you ” 

“Why has she gone?” I cried, forgetting 
my manners as I thus interrupted him. 

“It was by my advice — I might almost say 
my commands. It appears positive we shall 
have hot work here before many days have 
passed, and all the non-combatants who can 
do so have fled. I only spoke of her depar- 
ture that you might know you no longer had 
any ties to hold you here.” 

“Are we going very far away, sir?” I 
asked, growing bewildered again, and almost 
disheartened, for I now understood that my 
uncle believed the cause to be in desperate 
straits. 

“Not many miles; but it may be some time 
before you can return, and there must be no 
delay in setting forth.” 


298 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

I could have cried out with impatience be- 
cause he did not tell what it was we were 
called upon to do, and yet dared not ask him 
to hasten the explanation. 

“I will take your word for it that all on 
board the schooner are as willing to serve in 
a desperate undertaking as you, therefore 
return to your comrades, and call on the 
commandant of the battery for the supply of 
ammunition and arms which Colonel Tupper 
has bespoken. See to it you have a goodly 
store of provisions, and that everything is in 
readiness for sailing as soon after the sun has 
set as may be required.” 

He ceased speaking as if having finished 
with the matter on hand, and after waiting a 
moment I asked : 

“Where are we to go, sir?” 

“That you will know later. There is no 
reason why the secret should be in your keep- 
ing a single moment before it is necessary to 
impart it.” 

Had Thad been in my place he would not 
have asked this last question, and, therefore, 
it would not have been told us that even we 
ourselves were not to be trusted concerning 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 299 


the work for us one whit more than could be 
avoided. 

I still lingered stupidly, not having my 
wits about me sufficiently to go after I had 
been dismissed, and Colonel Willett, a trifle 
more kindly perhaps because of the kinship, 
said as he again took me by the hand : 

“I desired to speak with you first, Eliph- 
alet, so that you might tell me if there was 
any question your comrades would not em- 
bark willingly in what can bring little or no 
glory, and yet be beset with danger. Had 
you doubted the temper of your friends I 
should have cast about for others ; but as it is 
I am convinced the work will be done faith- 
fully, and you should not be hurt because the 
explanations are left until later. When older 
grown, you will understand that precaution 
is better than cure.” . 

He walked, still holding my hand, toward 
the door while speaking, and having come to 
an end I found myself not only dismissed, 
but put out of the apartment very neatly. 

It can well be believed that I made all 
speed to rejoin my comrades, once I was on 
the street, and on arriving at the shore there 


300 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

was no need to signal, for Thad leaped into 
the dory instantly I came in view. 

Without waiting until we were on board 
the schooner, I told him the result of the 
interview, repeating so far as I was able 
the exact conversation which had ensued 
between my uncle and myself. 

“We could ask for nothing better,” he said 
in a tone of satisfaction when my story had 
come to an end. 

“You say that even before learning what 
we called upon to do,” I cried impatiently. 

“We know it is of great importance, other- 
wise your uncle would not be so cautious, all 
of which is enough for me. He shall see 
that, though we be only boys, we can do the 
work of men.” 

“Then you are satisfied to go ahead 
blindly?” 

“We shall not be doing so. The secret 
must be told before we leave, and what more 
is needed?” 

I was irritated that he had no more 
curiosity, and was nigh to having a fit of the 
sulks because of his rejoicing at something 
he knew not of; but even though I raved 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 301 

Thad would hardly have taken heed, so in- 
tent was he on making the Laughing Mary 
ready for this secret expedition. 

“Call all hands,” he said as we came 
alongside the schooner. “We will soon warp 
her in to the dock and take on our supplies. 
Clark must see to the rations.” 

Before five minutes had passed we of the 
Laughing Mary were working as busily as 
though bound on a voyage of pleasure, and 
all the while I wondered and puzzled my 
brain over what it might be my uncle pro- 
posed that we should do. 

Sam was quite of my thinking, that it 
would be better to wait before rejoicing at 
this new turn of affairs, until we knew what 
lay in our path ; but Peleg seemed as elated 
and content to remain in ignorance as Thad. 

Clark had no time to join in the discussions 
which arose while we were warping the 
Laughing Mary into the dock, or as we 
waited the pleasure of the commandant of 
the fort, for it was necessary he should draw 
such rations as the quartermaster could fur- 
nish, and in order to do this he must spend 
much time on shore. 


302 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

So great was my faith in his sincerity that 
I gave no thought to possible treachery. 

Although he, like us, was ignorant of what 
would be required, much harm might have 
been worked by his stating the fact of our 
being sent away on a secret mission, yet I 
had no question as to his honesty. 

There is never a crew who could have 
worked harder than we did, yet it lacked 
less than an hour of sunset when the schooner 
was hauled out from the shore ready for a 
cruise. 

We had on board ammunition enough for 
half a dozen such vessels as the Laughing 
Mary, and would not have burdened our- 
selves with so much but that the command- 
ant insisted on our taking it because of orders 
previously given by Colonel Tupper. 

When Clark made his request for rations 
he was supplied most liberally, and before 
all the provisions had been taken aboard I 
began to mistrust we w^ere to make a sea 
voyage. 

Then, our preparations complete so far as 
we could say, there was nothing for it but to 
await the coming of Colonel Willett, or some 


4 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 303 

one whom he might send, to bring the final 
orders. 

It can well be supposed that we speculated 
much upon our probable destination, and 
, Thad did not hesitate to join in this, even 
though he had claimed to be well satisfied 
simply by knowing we were bound some- 
where on important work. 

The sun had set, but it was not yet night, 
when my uncle and Colonel Tupper suddenly 
appeared over the port rail while we sat 
watching the city front expecting them to 
come from that direction. 

They had arrived in a whale boat pulled by 
two sailors, and, judging from the ap- 
pearance of the oarsmen, I fancied the 
journey had been a long one, which puzzled 
me not a little. 

Thad saluted the visitors, while I stood 
stupidly staring at the boat as if there was 
nothing else to hold my attention, but I was 
speedily aroused to a sense of duty by hearing 
Colonel Willett say sharply, much as though 
we had done something which displeased 
him: 

“We will talk with you lads in the cabin. 


304 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

Leave Peleg and Clark on deck to stand 
watch, and let them see to it that we are 
neither disturbed nor overheard.” 

The fisherman heard this order, for we of 
the Laughing Mary were standing closely 
together, and immediately he walked for- 
ward, followed by Clark, while my comrades 
and I went below led by our visitors. 

It was Colonel Willett who opened the con- 
versation, and he evidently did not intend to 
spend many moments in making the neces- 
sary explanations. 

“You are well aware that two British 
frigates are above the city in the North 
Biver. It is likely more will join them 
speedily, either to invest Fort Lee or to cut us 
off from it, therefore you can go up the 
stream with more ease now than would be 
possible at a later date.” 

He ceased speaking for an instant, and I 
was on the point of again proving myself a 
simple by asking questions, when a look 
from Thad checked me. 

“Do you know Dobb’s Ferry?” Colonel 
Willett asked of no one in particular, and 
Thad replied: 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 305 

“I have never been there; but it will not 
be difficult to find the place, sir.” 

“At such an hour to-night as may seem 
best to you, get the schooner under way, and 
proceed to that point. Once there make 
yourselves familiar with the country round 
about White Plains, and keep close watch for 
su^icious -looking persons who may be loi- 
tering in the vicinity. You need not go out 
of your road to find such, but take good care 
none are allowed to remain in the neighbor- 
hood. You will engage in this work until 
receiving further orders.” 

It was the blindest kind of a puzzle to me, 
for these were apparently all the commands 
we were to receive, and I saw that Sam was 
quite as much perplexed; but Thad acted as 
if it was plain sailing in his mind, and asked 
quietly : 

“Are we to make prisoners of any persons 
who seem to us enemies of the cause?” 

“Yes; unless you might be opposed by too 
great a force. It is not simply an enemy 
whom you are to watch for, but one who ap- 
pears to be trying to gain information. 
Should you find a British force there, word 


306 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

must be sent at once to the headquarters of 
our army.” 

“The tide will serve us at ten o’clock, sir, 
and if the wind holds we will leave then,” 
Thad said as he saluted, and without further 
parley our visitors went on deck, leaving Sam 
and I looking at each other as if we had 
nothing better to do. 

“Can you understand it?” I asked irritably. 

“No more than if we had been asked to 
stand on our heads a few hours. But look at 
Thad! He says we will get under way at 
ten o’clock, as if he made no account of the 
two frigates in the stream! There isn’t a 
cloud in the sky, and their gunners will have 
an easy time peppering the little schooner. 
Instead of bringing up at Dobb’s Ferry, we 
have considerably more chance of going to 
the bottom.” 

“It all seems like a piece of foolishness to 
me,” I cried, and before more could be said 
we heard Thad calling for us to come on 
deck. 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 307 


CHAPTER XVI. 

AN UNEQUAL BATTLE. 

As I followed Sam up the companionway, 
it was in my mind to tell Thad exactly my 
opinion regarding the attempt to run past the 
British frigates on a night when the stars 
were shining so brightly that the schooner 
would be seen almost as plainly as if there 
was a moon, but before gaining the deck I 
thought better of it. 

Knowing my own timorousness even better 
than any one else could, I said to myself 
that perhaps I was the only member of the 
crew who looked at the matter in such a 
light, and it would not appear seemly in me 
to object when all the others were ready, 
therefore I waited to hear how my com- 
panions might view the venture. 

Thad had called us on deck that we should 
set about a careful examination of the run- 
ning-rigging, and also to make ready for get- 


308 CAPTURE OP THE LAUGHING MARYc 

ting under way at an instant’s notice, and 
during half an hour or more all hands were 
busily engaged. 

I was forward overhauling the jib when 
Peleg joined me, he having nothing better to 
do just at the moment. 

He was the one man who best knew the dan- 
ger of such an attempt as we were about to 
make, and had always shown himself so close- 
mouthed that I felt certain he would not 
repeat to Thad anything I might say to him. 

“I reckon you know what we’re going to 
do this night?” I began by way of starting 
the subject. 

“I’ve heard the captain tell what he counts 
on doin’ ; but I allow no man knows exactly 
what will be done.” 

“ Do you believe we can run past the 
frigates ?” 

don’t, an’ that’s a fact. It doesn’t stand 
to reason the thing can be accomplished.” 

“But we came past the whole fleet and 
never started so much as a rope.” 

“There’s a big difference ’twixt now and 
then, lad. The night was black as ink when 
we run through the Narrows, an’ a thunder 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 309 

gast was not only helpin’ us along, but 
mixin’ up for the Britishers. We got close 
aboard before they knew we was anywhere 
around; but it won’t work that way to-night. 
They’ 11 see us from the minute we leave 
our anchorage, and be ready to make it hot 
for us when we’re within range.” 

“Then you don’t think we ought to make 
the attempt?” 

“I didn’t say that, lad. The captain has 
had his orders, an’ they must be obeyed.” 

“And you have nothing to say against 
them?” 

“I’d be a mighty poor kind of a stick if I 
kicked agin orders, an’ my room would be 
better than my company. Since Colonel 
Willett says we must try to do it, the thing 
is settled; but it ain’t treason to make a 
guess as to how th6 venture will turn out.” 

Then Peleg, our work having been finished, 
walked aft apparently unconcerned at the 
prospect of being sent to the bottom by the 
British guns, and I was on the point of fol- 
lowing him when Sam came forward, halting 
under the shadow of the galley as he said in 
a low tone: 


310 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

“There’s nothing more to be done until 
word has been given to weigh anehor. Thad 
is in the cabin, and I want to have speech 
with you.” 

I knew from what he said while we were 
below that his mind was as unquiet as mine, 
and expected to hear him make protest of 
some kind against the attempt to run past 
the British vessels ; but soon discovered that 
he was giving little heed to the immediate 
danger. 

“What do you make out we’re expected to 
do at Dobb’s Ferry?” he asked sharply. 
“Did Colonel Willett say more to you than 
what I heard from his lips?” 

“You know as much as I. Until he spoke 
in the cabin I was completely in the dark.” 

“Is everything plain now?” 

Being so much occupied with the idea of 
what we were to do as soon as the tide 
turned, I had bestowed but little thought on 
the duty we would be expected to perform 
in case the Laughing Mary was yet afloat 
after the frigates opened Are upon her, but 
now that my comrade had broached the sub- 
ject I grew perplexed again. 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


311 


“We are to run up the river, if it so be we 
can, and there loaf around looking for sus- 
picious persons,” Sam continued, speaking 
with much heat. “It is here in New York 
the British will attack our people, and yet we 
are sent so far away that we shall be of no 
service when another battle is fought. I 
don’t say anything of your uncle with disre- 
spect, ’Liphalet; but I ask if you think such 
an order reasonable?” 

“There must be something about it we 
don’t understand.” 

“I should say we didn’t understand any- 
thing regarding it, and I am beginning to ask 
myself if Colonel Willett himself knows why 
we are to go to Dobb’s Ferry, or whether this 
may not be a plan to get us out of the way?” 

“Anything of the kind is sheer foolishness, 
Sam!” I cried. “You know as well as I do 
that nothing could be gained by getting us 
out of the way!” 

“Then tell me why we are to be sent up 
there? Why are we to take the chances of 
running past the frigates on a clear night 
simply to watch for suspicious persons miles 
from where danger threatens?” 


312 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


Perplexed before, I was now bewildered. 

Of course I scouted the idea that there 
could be any reason for getting us out of the 
way, yet at the same time it looked odd we 
should be ordered to incur such great danger 
in order to do so trifling a bit of work. 

“Don’t think I’m going to turn mutineer,” 
Sam continued, speaking yet more softly. 
“I shall do my full duty, regardless of what 
may happen, and if it so be we get past the 
frigates, which I doubt, no one will have 
cause to complain that I fail to watch for 
‘suspicious persons;’ but at the same time I 
would feel more comfortable in mind if we 
knew to what purpose we are making this 
venture.” 

Having said this Sam walked quickly 
away as if not wishing to hear my reply, 
and I was left in a most uncomfortable frame 
of mind. 

For ten minutes or more I remained for- 
ward endeavoring to get the best of myself, 
and Anally succeeded in mastering the worst 
of my fears; but try as I might, it was im- 
possible to feel perfectly at ease regarding 
the attempt to run past the frigates. 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 313 


When I went aft Thad was standing near 
the tiller as if in deep thought, and I halted 
close at hand in the hope something might 
be said concerning the business on hand, but 
he continued silent. 

The night was clear, as I have said, and the 
wind which drew up through the Narrows 
had increased until it was a pleasant sailing 
breeze, but no more. With it the Laughing 
Mary could make five or six knots, and we 
might count on being within range of the 
British guns in not less than twenty min- 
utes. 

When this calculation had been made I was 
more startled than on first hearing what we 
must do. 

Twenty minutes exposed to a shower of 
heavy shot, any one of which, if sent to the 
right spot, would sink the schooner offhand, 
and we might count either on being drowned 
or made prisoners ! 

“Is it worth the venture?” I asked myself, 
and unconsciously spoke the words so loud 
that Thad believed I was questioning him. 

“There’s never a doubt about it!” he re- 
plied emphatically. “We are bound to make 


314 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY 

Dobb’s Ferry, and it is our only course while 
the frigates are here.” 

“We take the chances not only of losing 
the schooner, but our own lives, simply for 
the purpose of watching a settlement where 
are neither friends nor enemies, X said 
bitterly. 

“The order has been given, and that is 
enough for us.” 

Then Thad turned away as Sam had done, 
and I went into the cabin, a mutineer at 
heart if not in fact. 

Not until the word had been passed for all 
hands did I go on deck again, and then the 
time had come when the desperate undertak- 
ing was to be begun. 

The breeze held reasonably strong; the 
tide had turned, and the Laughing Many’s 
bow was toward the Long Island shore. 

Forward, Peleg and Clark stood gazing in- 
tently toward the North Elver, where we 
knew the British frigates lay, and aft, Thad 
and Sam were leaning over the rail. 

Immediately I showed myself the captain 
said quickly, and I noted the fact that his 
voice trembled slightly : 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


315 


“Peleg, you and Clark jump into the dory 
and pull the schooner’s stern around that 
there may be no delay after the canvas is on 
her. ’Liphalet and Sam will run up the 
mainsail, and then it’s a question of all hands 
jumping to it till we’re under way.” 

All was done as he had said, and when the 
two men came on board again* Sam and I 
were swaying down on the fore-halliards. 

Excited as I was, it seemed that I could 
not have counted twenty from the time the 
first command had been given before the 
Laughing Mary was forging ahead past 
Grand Battery. 

The loungers on shore, attracted by the 
noise we made, gathered at the water’s edge, 
and if it had been daylight I warrant we 
should have seen an expression of astonish- 
ment on the faces of all because of this mad 
thing we were about to do. 

Thad took his station at the tiller, and Peleg 
joined him there. 

“You are to go below, as must all the 
others,” the captain said sharply, and I was 
touched to the quick, understanding what 
he would do. 


316 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

As a rule Peleg obeyed orders without hesi- 
tation, but now he waited to ask: 

“Do you count on stayin’ at the helm?” 

“Some one must mind the vessel.” 

“Then it shall be me! I’m not goin’ to 
skulk under cover while you are here.” 

“There is no reason why more than one 
should be exposed to the fire.” 

“Indeed there is!” I cried, forgetting in 
very shame all the fears which had beset me. 
“Sam and I are not minded to play the part of 
cowards, even though we are ordered to do 
so.” 

As I spoke Sam came close by my side to 
show he agreed with what I had said, and 
Clark stood like a statue near the larboard 
rail. 

“It is folly for all hands to thus needlessly 
expose themselves,” Thad cried as if in a 
rage, and Sam replied: 

“The whole venture looks to me like folly; 
but whatever it may be I am not willing one 
shall take all the chances.” 

“You can be of no service here.” 

“We shall not despise ourselves, as would 
be the case if your order was obeyed.” 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 317 

To this Thad could make no reply, and it 
was as if we did not breathe while standing 
there peering ahead for the first flash of the 
guns which would tell that the British gun- 
ners had seen their target. 

Not until we could make out the spars of 
the frigates against the sky was the silence 
broken, and then Thad said huskily: 

“You fellows can screen yourselves * 
under the rail without being obliged to call 
yourselves cowards.” 

“So may you do the same thing if you 
will,” Peleg quietly replied. “By putting a 
tackle on the tiller the schooner can be 
steered while all hands are lying down.” 

It was as if Thad had not thought of such a 
plan before, for he looked around quickly, 
and the fisherman, taking his silence for con- 
sent, at once set about clapping on a tackle. 

We were not yet within range of the 
enemy’s guns when this had been done, and 
soon all hands were stretched at full length 
on the deck, Peleg holding the steering - 
ropes. 

As a matter of course it was necessary to 
raise one’s body slightly now and then to 


318 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

make certain of the course, but such expo- 
sure was trifling as compared with our 
former positions. 

“We’ll hug the New York shore mighty- 
close,” the flsherman said, and the words had 
hardly been spoken when a flash as of light- 
ning lighted up the Jersey coast, a thunderous 
roar was heard; but the shot must have 
fallen far short of the mark, or passed high 
over our heads. 

“They haven’t got the range yet,” I heard 
Sam say with a chuckle of delight, and 
straightway there came into my heart a fever- 
ish desire to inflict some hurt upon the arro- 
gant Britishers. 

It was to me as if all danger had suddenly 
passed, and I thought with satisfaction that 
both our guns were loaded. 

Eaising myself quickly I saw the frigates 
apparently close aboard, and that view was 
enough to take away the last tremor of fear. 

“We won’t force the Laughing Mary to 
keep her mouth shut all the time!” I cried 
savagely, and ran to the larboard gun despite 
Thad’s warning cries. 

Quickly though I moved, Clark was along- 



“that’s the way to do it, lads, you made the splinters fly then. 


CRIED PELEG. 


Laughing Mary, p. 319, 






CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 319 

side the piece almost at the same instant, 
and we saw, without taking much heed to 
the fact, a long line of fire to larboard. 

This time the enemy had better range, and 
splinters flew in every direction as a round 
shot came aboard just forward the galley, 
plowing its way through both rails, but never 
touching the deck. 

One of the fragments hit me on the 
shoulder, yet not with sufficient force to dis- 
able my arm, and like one wild with rage I 
sighted the piece. 

Clark had already brought a brand from 
the galley, and in less time than I have taken 
in the telling, we discharged the gun. at the 
huge hulk nearest. 

There was no thought in my mind to watch 
the effect of the shot; I sprang to the forward 
cannon, shouting for Clark to help me wheel 
it into position, and while doing so we heard 
a joyful cry from Peleg : 

“That’s the way to do it, lads! You made 
the splinters fly then, an’ I’m a shark if you 
didn’t knock a few feathers out of that fine 
bird with the cocked hat who was standin’ 
alongside!” 


320 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

Then both he and Sam came to our aid, 
while in his excitement Thad stood erect at 
the helm. 

For my part, I only knew when we dis- 
charged one or the other of our guns, and 
that we reloaded as rapidly as was possible. 

The air appeared to be full of screaming 
missiles, but there was in mind no thought 
of danger. 

Now and again I felt the little schooner 
reel and stagger under my feet, token of a 
British shot which struck her fairly, yet I 
had forgotten that we should probably be 
sunk. 

More than once I saw the white splinters 
fly from the side of the frigate, telling that 
we were doing some execution with our poor 
cannon, and then from Grand Battery came 
the flashes of guns. 

Our friends were watching the fight, and 
had fired to betoken their joy because we 
were replying to the enemy’s salutes in such 
good fashion. 

Whether an hour passed, or only five 
minutes, I could not have told, so consuming 
was the fever upon me ; but I know we had 


CAPTURE OP THE LAUGHING MARY. 321 

loaded and discharged our small cannon until 
they were so hot as to be painful to the touch 
when Clark suddenly gave a most terrible 
scream, and instantly I was deluged with 
blood. 

It shone out vivid in the dim light, seem- 
ing to me more like a stream of fire than life- 
fiuid, and yet I felt no sorrow — my rage in- 
creased until it was only with great difficulty 
that I could breathe. 

“Load her again ! Load her again ! ” I cried , 
wheeling the gun around unaided, which 
would have been impossible in a calmer 
mood, and Peleg, blackened until he looked 
like an African, emerged from the hold with 
fresh ammunition. 

Thad sprang to my side, and even in the 
excitement the knowledge came into my 
mind that he had lashed the helm in order to 
have his share of the battle. 

Even as he laid hold of the rammer there 
was a crashing sound from above ; the 
splinters flew around me in a shower, and 
Peleg dropped his burden to run to the 
helm. 

“What is it?” Sam asked in a choking 


332 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


Toice, for his throat was dry and scorched 
vdth the burning powder. 

“The head of the foremast has been 
splintered,” Thad cried, looking aloft only 
an instant, and then continuing the work of 
recharging the piece. “She holds yet, and 
we can get in another shot!” 

“Run below, you fellows!” Peleg cried. 
“That last ball struck us below the water 
line, an’ there’s work to be done in the hold 
unless we eount on goin’ to the bottom!” 

Sam and Thad were serving the gun by this 
time, and I turned to obey the summons; but 
stumbled over the lifeless body of poor Clark, 
when, believing me to be wounded, both 
comrades sprang to my side. 

“Go on with your work; I’m not hurt!” I 
shouted as I rose unaided to my feet, and all 
three would have returned to the gun again 
but that Peleg cried angrily : 

“Below! Get below, all hands! There’s 
work there in plenty!” 

Thad and Sam dropped into the hold like 
a flash, and I waited only long enough to dis- 
charge the loaded cannon before following. 

There was indeed work here, and for an 


CAPTURE OP THE LAUCHING MARY. 323 

instant it seemed as if we had delayed too 
long before obeying Peleg’s order. 

The Laughing Mary was grievously 
wounded in the hull eight or ten inches 
below the water line, and the water was pour- 
ing in until it seemed she must be drowned 
before we could so much as lift a hand. 

But for the fact that Peleg had taken the 
precaution to light a lantern and hang it on 
one of the deck-beams when he first came 
down for ammunition we might have gone to 
the bottom without knowing how badly the 
little craft was hurt; but the illumination 
was sufficient to show the damage, and we 
set about repairing it to the best of our 
ability. 

The hammocks left by the mutinous sol- 
diers were yet hanging, and Thad stuffed one 
ot these into the gaping wound, while Sam 
and I fastened another over it by straps of 
scantlings torn from the bunks. 

We had only closed the hole partially, for 
the water still poured in, yet not in such 
volume but that we might keep the little 
schooner afloat by use of the pumps. 

It was not necessary such v/ork should be 


3^>4 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

attended to at once, for she would float yet 
many hours before swamping. 

Then we went on deck, scrambling over 
each other in our eagerness to give the 
Britishers a further proof of our willingness 
to flght ; but there was no longer an oppor- 
tunity. 

“It’s all over!” Peleg shouted. “We’re 
beyond range, an’ with all their pepperin’ are 
still on top of water!” 

It did not seem possible to me we had 
really passed both vessels, and I ran aft, 
where I peered into the gloom until the spars 
of the frigate could be seen far astern. 

Not until that moment did I realize all 
which had been done, and as the knowledge 
of the danger to which we had been exposed 
came over me like a flood, I reeled against 
the rail sick, dizzy, and in mortal terror. 

“Look out for that lad!” I heard Peleg 
shout, and the words came to me faintly as 
if from afar off, after which all was a blank. 

I could have cried with vexation when I 
again had consciousness and realized that 
I had fainted like any woman, when I should 
have stood bravely erect like my companions. 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 325 

“I know how it is, ’Kphalet,” Thad said in 
a soothing tone, “and but for the fact that 
you needed assistance Fm not so certain I 
should have been able to fight off the sick- 
ness which came upon me.” 

“Fm a coward!” 

“If there was fifty such cowards aboard 
this ’ere schooner Fd agree to give them 
frigates 'a mighty hot fight,” Peleg said 
grimly, and I was so foolish as to be pleased 
with the words. 

The Laughing Mary was speeding up the 
river like a frightened thing, wounded in 
many places, but yet sailing bravely on as if 
rejoicing despite her pain at having carried us 
safely past the point of danger. 

As I staggered to my feet, still sick and 
dizzy, the body of poor Clark lay directly 
before my eyes. He had atoned for the one 
mutinous act in his life, and died with his 
face to the enemy, as a brave man should. 

At this moment the fear of death was 
taken from me, for I understood as never be- 
fore that such deaths, and many of them, 
would be necessary before the independence 
we claimed would be ours. 


326 CAPTURE OP THE LAUGHING MARY. 

Sam and Thad took the mangled body up 
tenderly and placed it in a hammock, while 
I worked the pump, and when the shroud 
had been laced around the brave fellow ready 
for the grave, the corpse was placed on the 
deck aft that he might remain close by us as 
long as possible. 

Having cared for the dead it was high time 
we attended to the safety of the living, and 
this Peleg insisted should be begun by a care- 
ful examination of the Laughing Mary’s hull, 
lest peradventure she had received serious 
hurt of which w^e were as yet ignorant. 

Twenty -two times, as was ascertained by. 
actual count, had the little schooner been 
struck by the British balls, and yet the most 
serious mischief was at that place where we 
had made the temporary repairs. 

The head of the foremast was shattered, 
but the spar itself appeared as strong as ever. 

Fourteen holes did we see in the sails, 
showing where cannon balls had passed 
through at short range ; the rigging was cut 
in half a dozen places, and the rails rent and 
torn the entire length. 

Save for the wound in the hull, there was 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 327 


nothing to prevent our continuing the voyage 
to Dobb’s Ferry; but the water gained 
rapidly upon us, despite active work at the 
pump, and Peleg finally said, after working 
the brake a long time in silence : 

“She’ll sink under us, lads, if we don’t 
beach her till that ’ere hole can be plugged 
in proper fashion.” 

“May it be done without further injury 
to the vessel?” Thad asked, fearing lest we 
might lose the Laughing Mary even after she 
had come out with flying colors after the 
storm of British iron. 

“Bless you, lad, she’ll be none the worse for 
layin’ on the sand a bit, no more than was 
the case on Barren Island. I’m not minded 
to do anything to disable her, because our 
friends in New York will give the Laughing 
Mary a proper reception in return for what 
has been done this night, if it so be we ever 
take her back.” . 


328 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


CHAPTER XYII. 

AT DOBB’S ferry. 

By Thad’s request Peleg took it upon him- 
self to direct affairs after it was decided to 
beach the schooner until she could be re- 
paired, and the day was just breaking when 
he ran her into a small cove, where she was 
anchored fore and aft until the receding tide 
should leave her on the sands. 

This done we set about giving to Clark a 
soldier’s burial, as was his due after having 
proved himself to be a brave man. 

The body was carried ashore in the dory, 
and there we all took a turn at fashioning 
the grave, for each was eager to show his 
appreciation of our companion, and the sun 
came up from behind the hills just as we laid 
him in his last resting place this side the 
glorious land of light. 

Thad spoke a prayer while we knelt, and 
then the four of us fired a volley over the 
mound of sand, after which we walked slowly 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 329 

back to the water’s edge where for an hour or 
more we remained in silent communion, each 
with his own thoughts, for at such times a fel- 
low’s mind dwells upon the possibilities of 
the future. 

Perhaps, and very likely, before this seem- 
ingly foolish cruise had come to an end, 
more than one of us would be laid away in 
the same manner, or, through lack of time, 
be thrown overboard with a shot at the feet 
nevermore to be seen until the dead are sum- 
moned to life again. 

It was well for me that we had plenty of 
hard work immediately after this sad hour, 
for gloomy forebodings depressed my spirits 
until I was once more a quaking coward. 

The Laughing Mary had been put on the 
shore in such fashion that she could not be 
strained in any part, and immediately the 
tide went down Peleg began his task of 
patching the hull, setting about the work as 
if familiar with it. 

Now that Clark was gone we had no cook, 
and I took this duty upon myself, although 
with very little knowledge of what should be 
done. 


330 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

It did not hearten a fellow to go into the 
galley where everything told of the com- 
panion who had given up his life for the 
cause, but such thoughts could not be in- 
dulged in, and I strove very hard both to hold 
my fears in check and to prepare food such 
as would be palatable. 

We all understood that the Laughing Mary 
was doomed if the Britishers should send a 
boat’s party up the river before she was afloat 
again, to see what had become of us; but 
that was one of the chances it was necessary 
to take, and we consoled ourselves by keeping 
vigilant watch, resolving to flght in defense 
of the schooner as long as life lasted. 

Because of my new duties I did not see 
how Peleg repaired the injury done the hull ; 
but Thad assured me it was done in a most 
workmanlike fashion, despite the fact that 
both proper tools and materials were lacking. 

Save to repair the damage wrought the 
running-rigging, we gave no heed to the mis- 
chief above the decks, and by nightfall were 
waiting for the tide to put the schooner on 
an even keel. 

The enemy had not shown himself eager to 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 331 


meet us again, as Sam put it; but of course 
no search was made for the schooner, because 
it must have been believed she had gone much 
further up the river, and Peleg congratulated 
all of us over and over again on the fight we 
made. 

“Yesterday at this time I made up my 
mind we had started on our last cruise, for it 
didn’t stand to reason the schooner would 
live to get past the frigates; but now it’s 
been done, we may make some kind of a 
showin’ at what we have in hand.” 

I understood from the fisherman’s tone that 
he could gain no better idea of the task set 
us than had Sam and I, and asked with a 
side-glance at Thad: 

“Do you believe we will have anything to 
do. Master Symonds?” 

“To tell the truth, lad, I don’t, an’ why 
we’re sent on such a wild-goose chase beats 
me.” 

“It isn’t necessary any of us should un- 
derstand it,” Thad replied bravely. “We 
are poor kind of soldiers, or sailors either, 
for that matter, if we insist on having 
everything explained before we’re willing to 


332 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

turn to in proper fashion. There is good 
reason for us to make the trip, otherwise 
Colonel Willett would not have sent us past 
the frigates, and in due season we shall most 
likely know it.” 

No one cared to continue the conversation 
after this reproof, and we talked but little 
until the rising tide liberated the gallant ves- 
sel which had borne us so bravely since the 
day we first stepped on her deck. 

It was my watch below immediately after 
we got under way, and when I was awak- 
ened by Thad shortly after sunrise, the 
Laughing Mary lay at anchor off Dobb’s 
Ferry. 

“There was nothing to prevent our making 
a quick passage,” the captain said when I 
came on deck. “The wind held until day- 
break, and by that time we had arrived. You 
and Peleg will look out for the schooner 
until breakfast is ready, when Sam and I are 
to be called.” ' 

Symonds had followed me on deck, and 
after taking one look around he went into 
the galley, saying as he did so: 

“You can have an eye out, lad, an’ I’ll 


CAPTUEE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


333 


tend to the breakfast. You may be a good 
hand at fightin’ ; but I ain’t in love with your 
cookin’, so count on seein’ what I can do at 
the job.” 

I would have gone into the galley with him 
thinking there was no need for standing a 
very strict watch, but he stopped me by 
saying: 

“It stands us in hand to have our weather - 
eye liftin’ all the time, lad, an’ you can do no 
better than stay on deck. I’ve been turnin’ 
over in my mind what the captain said last 
night, an’ the business wears a different look 
by this hour. Of course we’re needed here, 
else Colonel Willett never would have taken 
the chances of losin’ such a craft as this, so 
it’s reasonable to believe there are, or may 
be, enemies loiterin’ round.” 

I immediately began pacing to and fro on 
the deck, determined the work should not 
suffer because of my neglect, even though I 
might believe it useless ; but until the time 
breakfast was made ready I had seen no 
living thing on the water or the shore. 

It is not well to attempt to set down here 
everything which was done day by day, for 


334 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

the record of one twenty-four hours’ doings 
would read much the same as all the 
others. 

That Thad was thorough in the slight duty 
we had been ordered to perform, it is need- 
less to say. He first made a careful exami- 
nation of the shore on each side of the river, 
after which we scoured the surrounding 
country until all were familiar with every 
road and bypath. 

As a matter of course we saw many people ; 
but never one who could be called “sus- 
picious” in any sense of the word, and more 
than once before a month had come to an 
end did Sam and I say to each other that we 
were sent to this place only that we might be 
kept out of harm’s way. 

There was absolutely nothing which oc- 
curred during these many days worth being 
set down here, until, when the month of 
September was more than half spent, on a 
certain afternoon while I was standing watch 
on deck, with Thad below writing in his log- 
book, and Sam and Peleg on shore watching 
for “suspicious” persons, a small boat rowed 
by one man suddenly appeared coming up 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 335 

the river close to the bank as if desirous of 
remaining hidden from view. 

Instantly I was on the alert, although there 
was no reason to suppose the newcomer 
. other than some farmer bent on paying us a 
visit for the purpose of selling his garden 
truck, and as if I had been correct in such 
surmise, the craft was headed directly 
toward the schooner. 

Instead of boarding us without as much as 
asking permission, as many had already 
done, however, the stranger ceased rowing 
while he was yet twenty yards away, and 
shouted : 

“What schooner is that?” 

“The Laughing Mary,” I replied, for 
though this man might be an enemy I was 
not minded to refuse him the information, 
certain that whatever might happen the little 
vessel would give as good an account of her- 
self as on the night we ran past the frigates. 

“Are you the captain?” the stranger con- 
tinued. 

Hearing the sound of voices Thad came on 
deck just in, time to hear this last question 
and reply to it. 


336 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

But even this was not information enough 
for the man. 

“Is your name Thaddeus Burr, and have 
you on board one Eliphalet Willett?” 

“Yes to both questions. My name is Burr, 
and yonder stands Willett. Now it is but 
fair to tell why you desire such information.” 

“I have come from Colonel Willett with a 
message,” and the man began to pull toward 
us. 

My heart was in my mouth at these words, 
for they not only told that we were yet re- 
membered, but gave promise of our soon 
having something better to do than loitering 
around the landing. 

The man came on board as soon as might 
be, and handed Thad a packet on which was 
superscribed his name. 

I, eager to learn the news, crowded close 
by his side that I might read with him ; but 
gained very little knowledge thereby. 

On the sheet were written only these 
words : 

“The bearer has my fullest confidence, and 
will deliver by word of mouth that which I 
would say.” 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 337 

It was signed with my uncle’s name, and 
after one quick glance at the handwriting I 
turned toward the stranger. 

“My name is Silas Deane,’’ he said, “and I 
am come from Colonel Willett yesterday. He 
wishes to know if you have seen enemies 
roundabout, either Tories or Britishers?’’ 

“Neither the one nor the other. We have 
lain here all these days meeting none but the 
farmers who live near by, and wasting our 
time and our country’s money,’’ Thad re- 
plied, and I rejoiced that he spoke thus 
sharply. 

“Nothing has been wasted,” Master Deane 
said quietly. “I am instructed to explain 
that your vessel was sent to this place be- 
cause the commander-in-chief had already 
laid his plans to make a stand near by if the 
fortunes of war went against him, and it was 
in the highest degree necessary he should 
know whether the British were aware of his 
plans. There have been traitors in the 
American camp, and may yet be.” 

“But for our army to come here would be 
a retreat,” Thad cried, quick to catch the 
meaning of such a movement, while I might 


338 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


have puzzled my brains over it an hour with- 
out hitting the truth. 

“Exactly; the American army are retreat- 
ing. Since the battle of Harlem Heights ’ ’ 

“Have our people fought a battle?” I cried, 
forgetting in the excitement my man- 
ners. 

Master Deane was a long while in making 
us acquainted with all that had happened 
since the night we left New York, and in- 
stead of trying to repeat his words it will be 
enough to set down the facts, unpleasant 
though they be to write. 

As is well known now, though to us it 
was bitter news at that moment, on the 
third day after our departure the frigate 
Rose, having in tow thirty boats, sailed past 
our batteries up the East River. On the 12th of 
September thirty-six more boats went up, 
and twenty -four hours later four frigates and 
six transports joined the Rose. 

All these preparations meant an attack by 
the Britishers, and it was decided to evacuate 
New York. Our sick and wounded were 
taken by such modes of conveyance as could 
best be procured to King’s Bridge, but 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 339 

before the troops were out of the city the 
enemy landed. 

On the 15th of September our men fled be- 
fore the redcoats like whipped curs, but on 
the 16th at Harlem Heights the Americans 
stood their ground and flogged the Britishers 
in fairly good shape. 

Then came the question of making another 
move, for our people were in a dangerous 
position despite the fact of having won the 
battle, and Thad and I began to realize that 
our coming to Dobb’s Ferry had not been 
useless. 

We assured Master Deane that the enemy 
had not shown himself thus far since our 
arrival, and, thinks to Thad’s industry and 
custom of making notes, it was possible to 
give fullest particulars concerning those who 
lived in the immediate vicinity. 

“You have employed your time well,” our 
visitor said when the captain had given him 
all the information gained; “and although 
there has been little chance for glory, and a 
possibility of great danger, you have served 
the cause better than could have been done 
in any other position. The flght with the 


340 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

frigates is known to every one in and around 
New York, and I have seen some very clever 
verses which give you all most lavish praise.” 

“When we heard the guns from Grand 
Battery we knew our friends were watching,” 
and Thad’s eyes brightened with pardonable 
pride as he spoke. 

“Every one who could get. down to the 
water front saw the gallant attack you made. 
It was a sight well worth looking at, and of 
the most intense interest to those who knew 
what a puny craft was engaging the mighty 
frigates. General Putnam referred to it on 
parade as a bright example of faithfulness to 
orders. You lads are famous among our 
friends, and it is to be hoped you will reap a 
rich reward some day.” 

“We have received that within the last 
half-hour, sir,” Thad said, and I could have 
hugged him for the apt reply. 

Master Deane then described the scene near 
Grand Battery while we were engaged with the 
enemy; told of the cheers that went up when 
it was learned we had passed the frigates in 
apparent safety, and repeated the comments 
he heard made by citizens, until I was so 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


341 


puft'ed up with pride as to forget what a 
price we had paid in blood for such 
praise. 

I was yet mentally patting myself on the 
head for having taken part in so glorious an 
action, and giving little heed to anything save 
what I had done, when Master Deane sud- 
denly went over the rail into his boat. 

“Is he going so soon?” I asked Thad, dis- 
appointed because I could not hear more 
regarding our achievement. 

“He must rejoin the army to-morrow morn- 
ing, and cannot stop even for food.” 

His boat was yet in sight when Peleg and 
Sam returned, and, as a matter of course, we 
told them of the news. 

Saddened though we were by the tidings 
of defeat, all felt more comfortable in mind 
than we had for many a long day, because 
we now knew that ours had not been a 
useless voyage. 

We speculated upon what would happen 
when the American army was encamped in 
the vicinity; as to where the next attack 
would be made, and held long converse re- 
garding the excitement caused by our engage- 


342 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

ment with the frigates, until the night came 
before we so much as thought of supper. 

Then Peleg and I went into the galley bent 
on preparing a regular feast, so happy were 
we, and during the next hour heard nothing 
from our comrades save when one or the 
other looked in upon us to ask when it would 
be possible for them to appease their 
hunger. 

We, meaning Peleg and I, were making a 
great clattering of pots and pans when sud- 
denly Thad’s voice rang out sharp and 
distinct : 

“Ahoy in the boat! What do you want?” 

“Is this the Laughing Mary?” I heard a 
voice in the distance ask, and as I turned to 
look out Thad answered “Yes.” 

I had not yet gained the door of the galley 
when the report of a musket was heard, and 
the echoes had hardly died away as one of 
my comrades, I do not know which, shouted: 

“On deck lively, boys, the redcoats are 
upon us!” 

It was like being aroused from a pleasant 
dream, and as usual I played the part of a 
stupid by lingering in amazement so long that 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


343 


Peleg was at the rail many seconds before 
I so much as thought of venturing out. 

Then I was roused to action by hearing 
Thad cry : 

“Bring up the spare muskets from the 
hold!” 

Seizing the lighted lantern from the peg 
on which it was hung to illumine the galley, 
I obeyed the order, but before having fairly 
gained the hold half a dozen muskets were 
discharged, and some of the reports I knew 
were caused by my comrades. 

Fortunately I had sufficient wit to leave the 
lantern below when I clambered up the 
ladder with as many weapons as could be 
grasped, and instantly my head showed 
above the combing of the hatch Peleg was 
arming himself from the supply I brought. 

“Are they soldiers?” I asked, and although 
I tried very hard it was impossible to prevent 
my voice from trembling. 

“Ay, lad, a score of ’em. They must have 
been on the opposite shore, and heard your 
uncle’s messenger when he hailed us, else 
they would not have had the schooner’s name 
on their tongue’s end.” 


344 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

He had loaded his musket by the time he 
ceased speaking, and I fumbled at mine 
most clumsily, being shaken as if with an 
ague fit by the rapid reports which now 
sounded as coming from every side. 

At last I was ready for action, but knew 
not which way to turn, and while I stood 
hesitating Thad shouted: 

“This way, lads! This way lively!” 

Kunning toward the sound of his voice I 
found myself in the bow of the schooner 
looking down on a dark mass which was 
swarming up the side as though hoisted from 
below. 

“Fire! Fire and reload! Work lively 
now, ’Liphalet, or the schooner is lost!” 

I discharged my weapon full at the 
scrambling mass, but it seemed almost as if 
I was engaged in murder until one of the 
fellows struck at me with a boarding -pike, 
tearing away the sleeve of my shirt and 
scratching my arm deep enough to draw 
blood. 

Then was I seized with the same rage as 
when we opened fire upon the frigates, and 
until the boarders had been repelled I fought 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 345 

side by side with my comrades, heeding 
not danger so that I beat back the enemy. 

Peleg afterward said that this scrimmage 
did not last above ten minutes ; but at the 
time I knew nothing save the fact that we 
must win the battle or be killed, and an hour 
or a second were much the same to me. 

It was only when the noise of the conflict 
ceased that I knew we had worsted the foe, 
and I looked around timorously at my com- 
panions fearing lest one or more should be 
stretched out on the deck as I had seen Clark. 

The sickening spectacle was spared me. 
All three were erect and apparently unin- 
jured. 

How the enemy had fared it was impossible 
to say, for those who fell, if indeed there were 
any, had been borne away by the tide. 

It was Peleg who went into the hold for the 
lantern, and when he brought it I saw we had 
not come off unscratched. 

Thad bore an ugly-looking gash on the 
cheek from which the blood had run down 
over his shirt until it was as if he had 
bathed in the red fluid. 

Sam’s left hand was bruised and swollen; 


346 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

Peleg showed a cut on the shoulder such as 
seemed most dangerous, and I, from the 
scratch received early in the action, could 
produce my full share of red stains. 

“It was a close shave for all hands,” the 
fisherman said grimly as he tore away the 
clothing from his shoulder to come at the 
wound; “but I reckon we ain’t much the 
worse for wear.” 

“If our injuries were all that might come 
from this, I could laugh at the plight,” Thad 
replied seriously, and I, thinking his words 
easily understood, said: 

“You believe they will return again with 
stronger force, and capture the schooner?” 

“I was thinking neither of ourselves nor of 
the Laughing Mary. Master Deane is on his 
way back to give Colonel Willett our report. 
It will be believed that there are no Britishers 
hereabouts, and who shall say how much 
harm may not come to our friends? Al- 
though we told only the truth, we have de- 
ceived them, and more disaster must follow.” 

I gazed at him in terror. 

There came into my mind the thought 
that our visit here was indeed worse than 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 347 

useless, for had we not been sent about this 
business the advance of our army would have 
made careful examination of the ground, but 
now, believing the report made, such precau- 
tions might be neglected, and one need not 
be fully witted to understand how much 
mischief could be caused by the confidence 
placd in us. 

“Some one must follow Master Deane at 
once,” I said, speaking before refiecting. 

“You are right, ’Liphalet, and the only 
question is, who shall it be?” 

“Do any of you know which way he 
went?” 

Thad and I stared at each other ; we had 
not so much as asked where the American 
forces were encamped, but took it for 
granted they yet remained at Harlem 
Heights, and so I told Peleg. 

“It’s plain you do not know where this 
Master Deane can be found; but still I agree 
the venture must be made.” 

“There should be no delay,” Thad cried. 
“I’ll start at once, and you shall take com- 
mand of the schooner, Peleg.” 

“I’ll do nothing of the kind. You are cap- 


348 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


tain an’ must stick to your post. I, who am 
no more than a ’foremast hand, can best 
perform the work.” 

“Do you mean to follow Deane?” 

“Follow him, or find Colonel Willet, it 
matters not which; but one or the other I’ll 
do for certain.” 

Thad seized the fisherman by the hand in 
token that he accepted the service, while I, 
who coud have no voice in the selection of a 
messenger since the captain was satisfied 
with this volunteer, believed either Sam or 
myself might best be spared from the 
schooner, for it was almost certain another at- 
tack would be made upon us, and Peleg could 
give a better account of himself in a fight 
than any other member of the crew. 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


349 


CHAPTER XVIII. 

SURRENDER. 

While we were dressing each other’s 
wounds there was ample opportunity to dis- 
cuss the situation, and all found in it good 
cause for fear. 

It did not seem probable a party of British 
soldiers would be so far from the fleet on any 
ordinary expedition, and, save for the fact of 
their having made an attack upon the Laugh- 
ing Mary, it was not to be supposed they 
would come to this place unless an inkling 
had been had of General Washington’s plans. 

I argued, however, that if they came to spy 
upon our army or to give early information 
of its arrival, the attack wonld not have been 
made, since by it we had become aware of 
their presence, and thus gained for myself 
much satisfaction in the supposed fact. 

Thad soon deprived me of this comforting 
belief by suggesting that they tried to seize 


350 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

the schooner in order to prevent us from giv- 
ing warning of their presence, if it so chanced 
we had been made aware they were in the vi- 
cinity, and this last argumenfseemed so likely 
that straightway I adopted it as my own. 

All of us understood that the gravest dis- 
aster might result if we allowed our friends 
to remain in ignorance of what had occurred 
a single hour longer than was necessary, and 
the question of who should act the part of 
messenger was the only one concerning 
which we were at variance. 

The situation appeared so serious, how- 
ever, that I would not allow myself to make 
the slightest protest against Thad’s decision, 
and Peleg set about making preparations for 
departure instantly the wound on his shoul- 
der had received attention. 

There was little for him to do save partake 
of the long-delayed supper, and this he did 
heartily, which is more than can be said for 
the remainder of the party. 

I was so disturbed in mind the food seemed 
to choke me, and I noted the fact that Thad 
only pretended to eat. 

Ours was an ugly situation, look at it in the 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 351 


best possible light, and the departure of the 
fisherman seemed to make it more serious. 

“’Cordin’ to my way of thinkin’,” Peleg 
said as he ate, “it would be a good idee to 
have the schooner in shape for gettin’ under 
way in a jifiFy. The canvas might be loosed 
ready for hoistin’, an’ the anchor atrip, or 
the cable where it could be slipped.” 

“Meaning that the Britishers will make 
another attack?” Thad said in what he in- 
tended should be a cheery tone. 

“1 allow they’re bound to do that, an’ be- 
fore many hours go by. It don’t stand to rea- 
son them fellers are goin’ to sit down an’ 
suck their thumbs after bein’ beaten ofi* by a 
lot of boys.” 

“Is there anything else we might do to im- 
prove the situation?” 

“It wouldn’t work harm if you hauled fur- 
ther into the stream, for as the Laughing 
Mary lays now it might be some time before 
she could gather way enough to give a boat 
the slip. Howsomever, it ain’t for me to ad- 
vise, seein’s you lads have shown yourselves 
capable of takin’ care of the schooner in 
worse plights than this is likely to be.” 


352 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

“Indeed you should give advice,” I has- 
tened to say, “and I am certain Thad will be 
only too glad to follow it.” 

“That I should,” was the captain’s quick 
rejoinder, and after reflecting a moment 
Peleg replied : 

“I don’t allow there’s anything more that 
can be done, unless you’re minded to get 
under way now.” 

“And leave our post? It isn’t to be 
thought of!” 

“I reckon not; but it was the only thing 
that came to my mind. It seems a slim 
chance you can beat off* a squad of soldiers the 
second time; yet you’re bound to make a try 
for it, an’ if ” 

He hesitated, and when I pressed him to 
flnish the sentence, put me off by declaring 
that it was of no importance. 

“I allow there’s nothin’ to keep me here 
any longer, and the sooner I start the sooner 
there’s a chance of my gettin’ back, which 
I count on doin’ no matter what may be goin’ 
on down there. Who’s ready for settin’ me 
ashore?” 

Sam and I ran to the rail where was moored 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 353 

' the dory, and Thad tried to induce Peleg to 
take with him a small supply of provisions. 

“It won’t pay to hamper myself with any- 
thing, not even a musket. I allow to make 
a quick trip, an’ the least cargo I carry the 
better.” 

Thus speaking, and without so much as a 
word of farewell to Thad, Peleg clambered 
over the rail, Sam and I following close at 
his heels. 

During the few moments required to row 
him ashore no one spoke, but when the 
dory’s bow grated on the sand and Peleg 
stepped ashore, I asked pettishly : 

“Do you count on leaving without a word 
of farewell?” 

“ That’s my intention, lad. Good-bys 
amount to little more than wind, an’ no one 
is the better for ’em. If it so be we meet 
again. I’ll welcome you all in great shape.” 

Then turning quickly, as if to prevent a 
reply, Peleg walked away smartly, Sam and 
I watching sorrowfully until he was swal- 
lowed up by the gloom. 

“It ain’t a very jolly look ahead,” Sam said 
as I took my place in the dory again ; but I 


354 CAPTURE OP THE LAUGHING MARY. 

made no reply, for my mind was so full of 
gloomy forebodings that I had not the heart 
to talk even with my comrade. 

When we returned to the schooner Thad 
was busily engaged making ready to receive 
in proper form any evil-disposed visitors who 
might come. 

He had placed in the galley, where they 
could be gotten at quickly, nine loaded mus- 
kets, and near by was a goodly supply of 
ammunition. 

The cable had been hove short, and all the 
canvas loosened. 

“Yes, I thought it best to get this kind of 
work done in season,” he said in reply to 
Sam’s remark, “for there’s no telling how 
soon we may have our hands full.” 

“Is there anything ’Liphalet and I can do?” 

“You may help me bring the cannon aft, 
and load them with musket balls. In case 
the redcoats should succeed in gaining the 
deck, a couple of charges from the pieces 
would go far toward persuading them to 
leave.” 

I felt much easier in mind when the cannon 
were heavily charged, each with a double- 


CAPTURE OP THE LAUGHING MARY. 355 

handful of bullets and a goodly quantity of 
powder, and wheeled aft either side of the 
companionway where they could be trained 
to command any part of the deck, for at 
close quarters they would be serviceable 
weapons. 

This done there was nothing for it but to 
wait and watch, which would be harder than 
actual fighting. 

“In case we are attacked, and the enemy 
attempt to come over the bow, our arrange- 
ments are made properly,” Thad- said 
thoughtfully. “We will hold them in check 
there if possible, and retreat aft should the 
battle go against us. But peradventure they 
take us by the stern, look out for the 
weapons forward.” 

“And if t\vo boats come ” 

“We must do the best we can, and trust 
that the righteousness of the cause will give 
us the victory.” 

This was not the kind of talk to hearten a 
fellow for what might come, and I changed 
the subject by speculating as to the length of 
time required for Peleg to make the journey 
to the American lines and back again. 


356 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

“I believe he can do it in twenty -four hours 
if he is not detained. He should be here by 
this time to-morrow.” 

Such proposition caused me to feel more 
cheerful, and I began to believe the redcoats 
would not recover sufficiently from the drub- 
bing we had given to have stomach for more 
fighting on this night. 

There was no thought of sleeping; all 
hands remained on watch listening for the 
lightest suspicious sound, and about an hour 
before midnight we heard that which had 
been expected. 

From far across the water toward the Jer- 
sey shore came the faint sound as of splash- 
ing water, and Thad said grimly : 

“They are coming, lads, and it now re- 
mains to be seen whether we can unaided 
defend the Laughing Mary successfully.” 

“Why not get under way?” I asked with 
trembling lips. “Duty does not demand that 
we remain here to meet an overwhelming 
force, and it will be a simple matter to return 
to our anchorage in the morning.” 

“How can we leave? Not so much as a 
breath of wind is stirring. I did hope there 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 357 

would be such a draft up the river that we 
might sneak out if necessary, but it has been 
a dead calm since midnight.” 

I could have bitten my tongue for having 
asked a question that would have shamed 
the veriest landsman, for I knew as well as 
he did how helpless the schooner was ; but 
had given no heed, so great was my nervous- 
ness. 

Softly we went forward, and from the gal- 
ley each took two muskets with full horns of 
powder and ball. 

Then, according to Thad’s orders, we 
crouched in the foremost portion of the ves- 
sel, screened by the rail, ready to defend 
ourselves and the Laughing Mary to the best 
of our ability. 

I would have been of stouter heart had the 
enemy approached as if trying to take us by 
surprise ; but the fact that they continued on 
regardless of noise told that they must be in 
great force, and I so whispered to my com- 
rades. 

“The same idea was in my mind as you 
spoke,” Thad replied gravely. “Very likely 
they are in two boats, in which case we can- 


358 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


not hope to hold our own very long; but 
we’ll fight till it’s certain we’re defeated, be- 
fore offering to surrender.” 

It was not pleasant to hear him reply in 
this fashion, and I regretted having spoken. 

Perhaps half an hour went by before we 
could see the redcoats, because of the gloom, 
and then my heart sank even lower than 
before. 

Three boats were being rowed toward us, 
and each appeared to be filled with men. 

“They don’t intend to take any chances 
this trip,” Sam whispered grimly, -“and I’m 
thinking we shan’t be in command of the 
Laughing Mary many minutes more.” 

“Ahoy in the boats!” Thad shouted. 
“Cease rowing or we shall open fire!” 

Much to my surprise the British obeyed 
this command; but it was only in order to 
prove to us how useless would be resist- 
ance. 

“You boys have made a brave fight, and it 
would be worse than folly to resist further,” 
a voice from the boat cried. “My orders are 
to capture the schooner, and I shall do it. I 
have with me forty men, and you will be 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 359 

wise to surrender, since by holding out longer 
you will only cause needless bloodshed.” 

Thad rose to his feet and peered into the 
gloom, we following his example. 

That the speaker had told the truth there 
could be no question ; had I been asked to 
guess how many of the enemy were there I 
should have said, judging from the size of 
the boats and the manner in which they were 
packed, that not less than sixty men had 
come to whip three boys. 

“Grant a truce of half an hour, and allow 
me to pull alongside,” the same voice con- 
tinued, and I fancied he understood why 
Thad was erect. “I pledge my word as a 
British officer to bring my boats back to this 
position again before beginning hostili- 
ties.” 

“There can be no trick in that,” Thad said, 
half-turning toward us. “It isn’t likely he 
would try anything of the kind on a force as 
small as ours.” 

“Let him come,” Sam replied, and I held 
my peace, not understanding at the moment 
why the proposition was made. 

“Do you give your word that no weapon 


360 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

shall be fired, and no man change his posi- 
tion?” Thad asked in a loud tone. 

‘‘I pledge my honor upon preserving faith- 
fully a truce for half an hour, and on coming 
back to this station before opening fire, or 
trying in any way to molest you.” 

Surely the Britisher spoke us fairly, and 
right glad I was to hear my comrade bid him 
pull alongside. 

As the boats advanced we saw that the 
officer in giving us the number of 'his forces 
had mentioned only the soldiers. 

In addition to the forty of which he spoke 
there were no less than five sailors in each 
boat, thus bringing the force up to fifty-five 
trained to warfare who would be opposed to 
us. It was not possible we could hope to hold 
out many moments against them, and I said 
to myself that we would be standing hand in 
hand with death if a battle was begun. 

“You can come on board, sir, if it so please 
you,” Thad said with a bow when the three 
boats were brought to a standstill eight or 
ten yards away. “You doubtless know how 
many we number, therefore will gain no 
valuable information by what can be seen.” 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 361 

“I thank you for the permission,” the 
officer replied courteously, and then he gave 
orders for the oarsmen to lay the craft along- 
side the schooner. 

Thad received him at the rail with as much 
politeness as if he had been accustomed to 
such duties all his life, and the Britisher 
saluted us when, the boat having been 
backed away, he leaped to the deck. 

“You lads have already shown so much 
spirit that I am glad of this opportunity to 
speak with you. My purpose in drawing 
nearer the schooner was to persuade you to 
surrender, rather than sacrifice your lives in 
a useless struggle. It is not unworthy the 
bravest men to yield to a force so superior as 
mine.” 

“Yet we are prepared to give an account of 
ourselves,” Thad replied, but in no voice of 
boasting, as he pointed to the cannon. 

“I fully expected you would be. Those 
guns could clear the deck twice if I were so 
foolish as to land my men in a body, but 
then there would be no opportunity to reload 
them. I should not give you that advantage, 
however. By attacking amidships, forward 


362 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


and aft at the same moment, you could not 
so much as discharge the pieces. Blood will 
be spilled, unquestionably, if there is a fight, 
and much of it, judging from your previous 
exploits.” 

“What is your proposition, sir?” Thad 
asked gravely. 

“That you surrender as prisoners of 
war.” 

“Giving up the vessel?” 

“We shall take her under any circum- 
stances. Are you members of the army?” 

“My comrades are corporals, and I am a 
sergeant.” 

“Then let me say, and truthfully, if your 
superior officer were here he would advise 
you to make any honorable terms ; it is all 
brave fellows like you can do under the cir- 
cumstances.” 

“May I speak alone with my comrades?” 

“Certainly. That is for you to say, since 
you are yet in command of this craft, and I 
but a visitor coming in friendly guise.” 

Saying this the officer walked aft, and we 
three drew nearer together, the same thought 
in the mind of each. 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 363 

“He speaks truly when he says a battle 
must go against us,” Thad began, and Sam 
interrupted : 

“There’s no question of that; look at the 
force.” 

“Are you willing to surrender without 
striking a blow?” 

“We would be obliged to do so in the end, 
unless we stood to our guns until all three 
were shot down, and how would our position 
be bettered after we had killed or wounded a 
few of the redcoats?” 

“What say you, Eliphalet?” 

I could do no less than agree with Sam, 
although it cut me to the heart [to give the 
little schooner over to the Britishers. 

“Then it is decided,” and Thad’s voice 
trembled as he spoke. 

The tears were in my eyes, and Sam turned 
his back to me when our comrade and cap- 
tain went aft a few paces. 

“We will surrender ourselves as your 
prisoners,” he said, and the officer came for- 
ward with extended hands. 

“You have chosen the only course, lad. 
Under the circumstances I would have no 


364 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

shame in so doing were the positions reversed. 
Give me yonr paroles, and you shall be left 
on board free to move around the deck until 
such time as I have further orders concerning 
the matter.” 

This was a handsome thing for the Britisher 
to do, and I waited to hear Thad accept the 
terms ; but to my great surprise and disap- 
pointment he said decidedly : 

“You are very kind, sir, but I cannot ac- 
cept. We are your prisoners, and will not 
give our paroles.” 

“But by refusing you force me to adopt 
what may be harsh measures.” 

“I understand that fully, sir, and whatever 
may be done I shall remember only your 
courtesy in treating with us when it was pos- 
sible, with but little loss, to take forcible 
possession of the Laughing Mary.” 

“I will not urge you to reconsider th^ de- 
termination, and if at any time in the future 
it shall be in my power to render a service, 
I am at your command. We may convince 
you Americans that the British are not as 
black as some would paint them.” 

With this the officer went to the rail and 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 365 

ordered the boats to come alongside, after 
which he called out the names of ten men 
who were to act as guard on board the cap- 
tured schooner. 

By this I understood that he did not care 
to take the trouble of towing her across the 
river, since she could be sailed over as soon 
as the wind sprang up. 

Although I heard the names of those whom 
he called, it is impossible for me to say if 
“Barnes” was among them, yet to my sur- 
prise and deadly fear I saw that traitor 
come over the ’rail immediately in the rear of 
the lieutenant who had been detailed to the 
command of the prize. 

Now I knew full well how it happened 
those who had previously attacked us were 
aware of the schooner’s name, and in my 
mind I saw the villain searching for the 
Laughing Mary from the time of our depar- 
ture from New York until he finally found 
her at this place. 

Thad was looking full at the fellow when 
he came over the rail, but not so much as a 
tremor of my comrade’s eyelids betrayed 
the fact of a recognition. 


366 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

Sam, however, did not have so good a con- 
trol over himself ; but clutched my arm nerv- 
ously while he stared at the scoundrel who 
had already done us so much mischief. 

“Don’t let him see that we are disturbed,” 
Thad whispered sharply. “I would have 
fought to the death rather than come into 
his power; but since we are in the trap we’ll 
bear up like men.” 

The officer to whom we had surrendered 
gave the lieutenant charge concerning us, 
according to which we were to be treated 
with the utmost consideration, although con- 
fined in the hold. 

Having made these arrangements the 
Britisher, and he was the most kindly gentle- 
man I have ever seen in a red coat, saluted 
us in due form, after which orders were given 
for the boats to return to the opposite shore. 

Then it was that Thad motioned us to follow 
him into the hold, for he was not minded to 
be ordered below, or perhaps conducted there 
by Barnes himself. 

The lieutenant in charge was not the gentle- 
man his superior had proven himself to be, 
as we soon understood. 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 367 


Coming below with a file of men shortly 
after we had descended, he ordered that we 
be searched, and not only was everything 
taken from our pockets, and the ammunition 
, and spare weapons removed, but the blankets 
and water-cask were carried away. 

He had spared us contact with Barnes, 
however, and greater favor could not have 
been granted. 

Then the hatch was clapped on, and we left 
in a darkness so dense that it was as if I 
could feel it. 

“Why did you refuse to give a parole?” I 
asked almost angrily of Thad when we were 
alone. “No good can be gained by bringing 
so much discomfort upon ourselves.” 

“’Liphalet, do you feel comfortable in mind 
at being forced to surrender the Laughing 
Mary?” 

“Of course I don’t; it cuts me as deeply as 
it can you.” 

“If we gave our paroles it would be neces- 
sary to remain inactive, no matter how good 
an opportunity for escape presented itself.” 

“But no opportunity can come while we 
are here.” 


368 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


“I am not so certain about that. If you 
two are agreed to take the chances I believe 
we can at least deprive the Britishers of this 
schooner, which is far more than could have 
been done had we stood to the guns, and, in 
addition, we shall prevent that villain Barnes 
from carrying out his intentions concerning 
us.” 

That Thad should speak thus when it 
seemed to me our last hope was gone caused 
my head to whirl, and I stood like a stupid 
with never a question as to what he counted 
on doing. 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY 


369 


CHAPTER XIX. 

SCUTTLED. 

It was Sam who asked Thad for an expla- 
nation of his words, and when it had been 
made I straightway became more perplexed 
and frightened than before. 

“We have at least three hours of darkness 
before any attempt will be made to move the 
schooner, and it is my purpose, if you two 
agree, to scuttle the little craft rather than 
allow her to be used by the Britishers.” 

“Scuttle her!” Sam cried in alarm, and I 
shook with fear. “It would have been bet- 
ter had we fought to the death, rather than 
be drowned here like rats in a trap.” 

“If we had fought they would have posses- 
sion of the Laughing Mary when we were 
dead.” 

“But we should have given up our lives 
in the excitement of a fight. I am too great 


370 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

a coward to willingly meet death here, and in 
such a form.” 

“I am not counting on our being drowned, 
although of course there are many chances 
that all of us may not escape.” 

“If you scuttle the schooner we must be 
drowned, unless the guard find out what is 
being done before she goes down,” and I 
fancied I could hear Sam’s teeth chattering 
from very fear, as I knew for a certainty that 
mine were. 

“Listen, both of you! My plan is a des- 
perate one, but not quite as dangerous as 
you suppose. This prize crew have only 
Peleg’s dory in case the Laughing Mary 
sinks, and ten men would swamp her.” 

“Most likely any of them could swim to 
the shore — it can’t be a hundred yards away 
on the starboard side.” 

“Less than that if anything. I am count- 
ing that some of them cannot, or dare not, 
swim, and of these there will be enough to 
load the dory.” 

“How does that help us?” Sam asked irri- 
tably as Thad paused for an instant. 

“Even though we are Americans, and 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 371 

Barnes is among the number, they will not 
leave us here to drown. The hatches will at 
least be thrown off before she goes down.” 

“Well?” 

“It is dark, and all three of us may be able 
to give the redcoats the slip ’twixt here and 
the shore. We can swim well enough to take 
the chances of dropping far down the river 
before landing, and it will be a keen- eyed 
Britisher who can see a fellow’s head in the 
water during the gloom of night.” 

By this time I began to get an inkling of 
Thad’s plan, and it did not appear as des- 
perate as when he first broached it, although 
at the best there was more danger than one 
would care to brave unless both liberty and 
the destruction of a British prize was the end 
to be gained. 

I had always considered Thad quick- 
witted, but never before did I give him credit 
for so much wisdom. 

If we had defended the schooner she would 
most surely have been made a prize, and we 
could not raise a finger to prevent it. By 
surrendering and refusing to give a parole, it 
might be possible to regain our liberty and 


372 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

at the same time prevent the enemy from 
reaping any advantage through the capture. 

Sam approved of the plan from the start, 
and we discussed the chances of giving our 
captors the slip in the darkness, until I sud- 
denly realized that we had no tools with 
which to work, whereupon I, pluming myself 
upon the discovery, said ironically: 

“It is a great idea, and there is no ques- 
tion but that it might be carried through suc- 
cessfully if we had something with which to 
scuttle the schooner. Since they have not 
left us so much as a sheath-knife. I’m afraid 
we must remain prisoners.” 

“I thought of that when the idea first oc- 
curred to me,” Thad replied quietly, paying 
no more attention to my irony than if I had 
been a willful child. “When we broke 
through the bulkhead in order to get the 
better of the mutineers, the boards were not 
replaced securely, and have never been 
properly fastened. By pulling one or two off 
it will be possible to come at a chisel which 
I left on the cabin fioor this morning.” 

I was overwhelmed with shame because of 
having allowed myself to speak in such a 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 373 

tone to Thad, and he had good right to punish 
me as he did. 

Sam feared it would take too long to scuttle 
the schooner with no better tool than a 
chisel; but the captain had answer ready 
for this objection. 

“We might not make much headway in 
cutting the solid timbers, it is true; but it 
shouldn’t be a hard job to get through where 
the hull was repaired on our way up the 
river.’’ 

“Then let’s begin it at once,’’ Sam whis- 
pered, now convinced the idea was possible. 
“There’s no good reason why we should 
spend idle time thinking about what may 
happen. Besides, we’re wasting the hours of 
darkness.’’ 

“I only waited to make certain you two 
were agreed to the plan, and intended you 
should have ample opportunity of counting 
all the chances against us. Stay you here 
and continue to talk, while I work at the 
bulkhead. The night is so warm that the 
redcoats are likely all on deck making them- 
selves comfortable with our blankets and 
beds.” 


374 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

We had been standing directly beneath the 
hatch while this conversation was had, and 
as he ceased speaking Thad moved softly 
aft, leaving us to continue the hum of voices 
in case the Britishers were on the alert. 

At that moment it seemed impossible for 
me to say a word, even though I knew how 
necessary it was to adopt the precaution sug- 
gested by Thad. 

I was trembling violently with suppressed 
excitement, and so moved by thoughts of the 
possible danger that to speak even at random 
was most difficult. Not so with Sam. 

I verily believe he found a pleasurable ex- 
citement in the thought of what we were 
about to do, and he talked as glibly as if we 
were safe in the American camp. 

We could not so much as guess how Thad 
was progressing. 

He made no more noise than a rat would 
have caused in running across a floor, and to 
distinguish his form in the inky darkness 
was impossible. 

When perhaps ten minutes had passed I 
was startled into an exclamation of fear as I 
felt a hand on my neck, but instantly I real- 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 375 

ized it was Thad who had come to report the 
progress of his work. 

“I have the chisel,” he whispered. “The 
Britishers are all on deck. Now yon lads are 
to come with me. Take off your coats, for 
they will be needed.” 

Together we groped our way to that portion 
of the hold where the ball from the frigate 
had penetrated, and then it was I understood 
why the order to take off our coats had been 
given. 

The garments were to be used to deaden 
any noise he might make with the tool, and 
Thad worked most industriously while Sam 
and I crouched on either side of him. 

It was in the highest degree necessary that 
not only should the work be performed be- 
fore daylight, but that the schooner should 
have time to settle well into the water be- 
fore an alarm was given, otherwise we might 
not gain our liberty, and in my anxiety it 
seemed as if he made no progress. 

“Let me take the chisel,” I whispered im- 
patiently, and at that same instant the water 
spurted through an opened seam, striking 
me full in the face. 


376 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

“Press the coats down hard so I may tear 
off the rest of the planking,” he said sharply, 
and we obeyed, heeding not the fact that all 
three were drenched to the skin. 

Then Thad gave the word to let -go and 
jump back toward the bulkhead, and as we 
did so the water spouted inboard in such 
volume as caused me to fear we should be 
drowned out before an alarm could be given. 

Even before we were able to feel our way 
to the bulkhead the hold was filled knee- 
deep, and in my fear I would have cried 
aloud but that Thad prevented me by press- 
ing his hand over my mouth. 

“It is too soon to give the alarm,” he 
whispered. “Wait till it is above our 
waists!” 

“But we shall drown before they can take 
the hatch off!” I cried as soon as it was 
possible to wrench my mouth free. 

“There’s no danger, for at the last moment 
we can crawl through into the cabin, and it is 
necessary for the success of our plan that the 
soldiers be thoroughly alarmed on awaken- 
ing.” 

Then came into my mind the agonizing fear 


CAPTURE OP THE LAUGHING MARY. 377 

that Barnes, having once been deceived by us 
concerning the condition of the schooner, 
would insist on making us close prisoners 
before any attempt was made to go on shore, 
and I pictured my comrades and myself in 
his power when the Laughing Mary went 
down. 

I believe no more than ten minutes passed 
before the water was nearly to our shoulders, 
and it was only with difficulty we could keep 
a foothold. 

Sam began to share my fear that we should 
delay too long and be drowned ere the hatch 
could be taken off, for he, like me, had little 
faith in our being able to make our way 
through the cabin. 

“We have waited as long as is safe!” he 
cried, and without further parley began 
shouting wildly for help, I joining in the out- 
cry. 

Even now I believe we should have 
drowned before being able to arouse the sol- 
diers from their sleep had we depended upon 
our voices alone; but Thad had in mind a bet- 
ter way to attract attention. 

Swimming in the darkness to the ladder 


378 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

which led upward from the hold, he clam- 
bered upon it, striking the deck-timbers with 
his chisel until the trampling of feet above 
told that our guards had been awakened. 

“Help! Help! The schooner is sinking! 
We are drowning!” all hands cried in the 
most imploring tone possible to assume, and 
it can well be imagined how heartily Sam and 
I assisted in the appeal. 

The hatch was taken off only when the 
water had risen so high that I was forced to 
paddle in order to keep my head above the 
surface, and a frightened voice cried: 

“What’s going on down there?” 

“The schooner is sinking!” Thad replied 
lustily. “The shot-hole we plugged after 
passing the frigates has opened, and she can’t 
float many minutes longer!” 

It was not necessary for the Britisher to 
ask any more questions ; he saw the water 
which nearly fllled the hold, and ran aft 
shrieking in terror that the schooner had 
foundered. 

Sam and I joined Thad a few seconds after 
the man fled so suddenly, and he said 
sharply : 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 379 

“Keep back out of sight! If all three of 
us are seen we shall be taken ashore. Kick 
off your shoes, and you can swim around 
near the edge of the hatch without attracting 
the attention of those who come to aid us!” 

I questioned if the Britishers would think 
of anything save their own safety, but in this 
I was wrong. 

We — meaning Sam and myself — had no 
sooner screened ourselves from view than the 
lieutenant appeared, and an exclamation of 
dismay burst from his lips as he fully real- 
ized the condition of the vessel. 

“Ahoy down there!” he shouted, failing at 
first to see Thad, who was keeping out of 
sight as much as possible. 

“Hello!” our comrade replied, making a 
great splashing as if it was difficult to keep 
himself afloat. 

“How did this happen?” 

“A round-shot went through the schooner’s 
hull when we came up past the frigates ; we 
patched it as best we could with such timber 
as could be taken from the bunks. Now the 
hole has opened! She’ll sink under us! 
Help! Help!” 


380 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


“Why don’t you swim where I can pull yon 
out, instead of hanging back there like a 
stupid?” 

“My comrades are here, and the schooner 
will sink before I can get at them!” Thad 
fairly wailed, raising his voice to its utmost 
pitch that the soldiers might hear him. 

Only this was needed to create a panic 
among those on deck, who must have seen 
how deeply the Laughing Mary had settled 
in the water, and I heard Barnes shout: 

“Get into the boat! If the prisoners can’t 
save themselves let them drown!” 

It was as if the sound of their own voices 
increased the panic, and we who were listen- 
ing intently understood from the noise that 
many were already scrambling into the boat. 

To the credit of the lieutenant, even though 
he had used us roughly at first, I must say 
that he acted the part of a man in trying to 
rescue his prisoners, and for a moment I 
feared he would succeed despite all Thad’s 
efforts to the contrary. 

He urged us to paddle our way to the 
hatch, assuring Thad that the boat should 
not put off without us, and had his men 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 381 

obeyed orders the plan must have failed, so 
far as gaining our liberty was concerned. 

Fortunately for our purpose, however, the 
soldiers, frightened by seeing the schooner 
settling so rapidly in the water, shouted to 
the lieutenant that they would wait for him 
no longer, and Thad cried: 

“Save yourself, sir, while there’s a chance. 
The force of the water setting aft from the 
opening holds my comrades back ; but all of 
us can swim, and if it so be there’s time to 
save our lives, we’ll come ashore yet.” 

“Can I do nothing to aid you?” the officer 
asked, disregarding the cries of his men. 

“Not a thing. I’m going to help my com- 
rades,” and Thad allowed himself to sink 
with a loud splash in the water, but he took 
good care to come to the surface an instant 
later close by the hatchway. 

We heard the lieutenant as he ran aft, and 
the sound of his footsteps was like sweetest 
music to our ears. 

“Now get up to where we can hang on by 
the combing,” Thad said in a low tone. “It 
would be dangerous to come out too soon.” 

I believed it was also dangerous to remain 


382 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

where we were many moments longer, for 
the Laughing Mary was now so nearly under 
water that she might go down at any instant, 
and if we should be in the hold when the 
downward plunge was made, our* chances for 
life would be slim indeed. 

I kept my fears to myself, however, re- 
solved not to show the white feather again 
that night, whatever might befall us, and 
when the voices of the Britishers sounded far 
away in the distance Thad cried : 

“Now for it, lads! Work lively, but don’t 
show your heads above the rail until we’re 
certain of not being seen.” 

It was a simple matter to clamber out on to 
the deck, and once there Sam and I crouched 
low while Thad cautiously crept to the star- 
board rail, which, as the Laughing Mary was 
then lying, was nearest the shore. 

He had hardly done so when we heard loud 
shouts of terror, mingled with the splashing 
of water, and Sam caught my hand with a 
grip that was painful, as he said : 

“The dory has overset or sunk. Most 
likely all hands crowded into her, thinking 
only of gaining the shore, and at the first 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 383 


careless movement she went over or down. 
God grant none of them be drowned.” 

“While you are praying it would be a good 
plan to put in a word for ourselves,” I re- 
plied, irritated that he should be thinking 
only of our enemies’ safety while we our- 
selves were in such danger. “If the schooner 
sinks under us, and she won’t swim many 
seconds longer, our chances for life are small 
indeed.” 

At this moment Thad ran swiftly toward us. 

“Now is our time! The dory has been 
swamped, and there’s little fear they’ll give 
much heed to us.” 

The water was nearly level with the deck 
as he leaped up on the rail, waiting there 
until we were by his side. 

“Head out of the cove, and then straight 
down the river!” he whispered hoarsely. 
“Are you ready? Come!” and he dropped 
into the water, Sam and I following his 
example. 

While in the hold we had put off all cloth- 
ing save our breeches, and once in the water 
it was no more than child’s play to obey the 
order given by Thad. 


384 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

When we had taken half a dozen strokes I 
turned my head to look back at the little 
schooner, which had shown herself to be so 
brave a craft, and was just in time to see her 
settle beneath the surface of the river. 

She sank on an even keel, slowly, and it 
was almost like looking upon the death of a 
comrade, so dear had she become to me, who 
had aided in her destruction. 

We could yet hear the cries of the soldiers 
who were floundering in the water, and as I 
rounded the point which formed the cove 
there was in my heart true repentance for 
having spoken as I did when Sam spoke a 
prayer for the poor wretches. 

To swim was as easy to my comrades and 
myself as to walk, and feeling that we had 
succeeded in all our plans, pity for our late 
captors replaced anger. 

Now I also fervently desired that no lives 
be lost, even though those who were battling 
in the current would do their utmost to work 
disaster to the cause immediately they were 
out of danger, and among them was the 
traitor Barnes. 

Before we were fairly in the stream the 



il TURNED MY HEAD TO LOOK BACK AT THE LITTLE SCHOONER; SHE SANK SLOWLY* 

ON AN EVEN KEEL. 


Laughing Mary^ p, 38U. 




CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 385 

outcries ceased, and Thad, who was a yard 
or more in advance, said in a low tone: 

“Some, if not all, of the squad are ashore, 
and if the lieutenant is among them his first 
thought will be for the prisoners, not perhaps 
because our lives are precious to him, but 
lest he be forced to report our escape. Now 
is come our time of danger. Keep your 
heads low in the water, swim silently, and 
put all possible strength into the stroke, or 
we shall betray ourselves.” 

As I obeyed the faint light of the coming 
day could be seen in the east, and I knew we 
had not much time remaining in which to 
secrete ourselves before the sun rose. 

Never did I swim faster than during the 
half-hour after Thad gave the word for speed, 
and then day had so far come that surround- 
ing objects could be distinctly seen. 

It was time to make for the shore, since 
the river could afford no protection against 
the prying eyes which might be on the Jersey 
shore, and Thad led the way to the bank, 
where grew a thicket of birch saplings. 

We had not landed a single moment too 
soon, so far as I was concerned. 


386 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

I had exerted myself to the utmost, and on 
reaching the shore my legs trembled under 
me till I was forced to clutch at the bushes 
for support. 

Thad’s first act was to kneel and put forth 
such a prayer as I have never heard, even 
though since then we have been many times 
exposed to great danger, and I joined him 
heartily in the thanksgiving, despite the 
scoffing words I had uttered immediately 
before leaving the schooner. 

This done, we crawled into the thicket 
where we could be hidden from view of any 
who might pass either by land or water, 
although had a careful search been made we 
were but poorly screened from view by the 
small trees. 

How great was the luxury of being able to 
throw oneself at full length on the warm 
ground ! 

“The business could not have been planned 
better,” Sam said with a sigh of relief as if 
believing all danger was past; but Thad, who 
had weighed well the chances for escape, 
replied gravely : 

“So far we have been successful, but I 


CAPTURE OP THE LAUGHINC MARY. 387 

count we are in greater danger than at the 
moment the Laughing Mary was sinking. 
That lieutenant will soon conclude we played 
him a trick, even though Barnes isn’t sus- 
picious, and once they are on our trail we are 
doomed to long imprisonment with hard 
usage, after what has been done by us.” 


388 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


CHAPTER XX. 

FREEDOM. 

I HAD composed myself for a needed rest; 
but Thad’s words drove from my mind all 
else save the possibility of being recaptured, 
and I urged that we continue the flight at 
once. 

“When liberty is at stake a fellow can 
endure more than we have and yet not be 
exhausted. Instead of lying here as if there 
were no Britishers in the country, why do we 
not make the best possible use of the time?” 

“I propose that we start after getting our 
wind,” Thad replied. “It was not my pur- 
pose to remain near the river many hours, for 
Barnes and the lieutenant will surely search 
in this direction before the day is ended.” 

I was all on fire to continue the flight, and 
argued so strongly against the necessity of 
an immediate resting spell that my com- 
panions finally agreed with me. 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 389 

Now that it was light prudence demanded 
the greatest precaution, and instead of set- 
ting off across the country at full speed 
regardless of concealment, as I should have 
done but for my comrades, we reconnoitered 
the ground from every place of vantage 
before moving forward. 

By such a course much time was consumed 
in traversing short distances, but we counted 
not the additional hours and labor so long as 
the spending of both insured safety. 

Before noon I was thoroughly spent with 
travel, and had the danger been one whit less 
I should have fallen by the wayside long ere 
a halt was finally called. 

Exhausted and footsore, I was rapidly 
becoming indifferent to recapture, as com- 
pared with an opportunity for rest, and my 
comrades must have noted my condition, for 
while Sam, although painfully weary himself , 
made a bed of leaves for me, Thad went in 
search of water. 

So excited and nervous was I that the 
unconsciousness'of sleep did not come when 
1 closed my eyes, and although my 
companions believed me to be wrapped in 


390 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

slumber, every word they spoke sounded 
distinctly in my ears. 

“We must stay where we are till morning,” 
Thad said to Sam. “Poor Eliphalet could go 
no further even though the Britishers were 
at our heels.” 

“As they soon will be if we remain here. 
We are not hidden in any way, and may be 
seen at a distance of a mile or more.” 

“Yet no move can be made while he is in 
that condition.” 

I tried to tell them I would push on as long 
as they should say was necessary, but the 
words refused to come. 

I was neither asleep nor awake, but in a 
lethargy of fatigue. 

“Think you we shall give them the slip?” I 
heard Sam ask, and Thad replied hesitat- 
ingly: 

“I hope so; but it does not stand to reason 
Barnes would give up the search so soon, 
even though the lieutenant might consent, 
and it should not be a difficult task to follow 
our trail. More than those two do I fear. 
Reconnoitering parties may be abroad, and 
from such comes our greatest danger. If 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 391 

there be a force of Britishers on the Jersey 
shore, sent doubtless by some traitor who 
has betrayed General Washington’s plans, it 
is reasonable to suppose this side of the river 
will be closely watched, and whoever takes 
us prisoners the result will be the same.” 

“We might push on to the strip of trees 
ahead.” 

“They are more than a mile away.” 

“If ’Liphalet is unable to walk as far, we 
can carry him. No labor will be too severe 
if thereby we increase our chances for free- 
dom.” 

Again 1 strove to speak, meaning to say I 
would go unaided as far as should be thought 
necessary, but my tongue refused its office. 

From beneath my half-closed eyelids I 
saw that Thad remained as if in reflection for 
some time, when he said suddenly: 

“We’ll do it, Sam! I warrant we shall get 
’Liphalet over the ground in some fashion, 
and once within the shelter of the trees we 
may count on being safe until the morning at 
least.” 

Then I saw my comrades stagger to their 
feet, and knew they raised me ; but I could 


392 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

not move, or thought I could not, although 
my will was good to do their bidding. 

As Thad has told me since, I walked 
unaided, save that it was necessary to direct 
my steps, for I reeled to and fro like one 
drunken, but when we arrived I knew not. 

Slumber visited me even as I moved for- 
ward, and when next I became conscious of 
myself the sun hung low in the west. 

By my side lay Sam snoring like a trooper, 
and sitting near, as if he had just awakened, 
was Thad. 

“How are you by this time?” my comrade 
asked in a cheery tone, as if he had no care 
save to minister to our comfort. 

“Better than when you set out for this 
place,” and I looked around at the snug 
refuge amid the leaves which had been 
selected while I lay like one dead. 

Then I told Thad of the strange condition 
in which I had been when it was possible to 
hear but not to speak, and assured him I had 
recovered sufficiently to continue the journey 
whenever he should deem it safe to set out 
again. 

As I learned from him, he and Sam had 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 393 

been sleeping since shortly after noon, and 
with so much rest there seemed no reason 
why all of us could not push forward. 

Before we ceased speaking I became aware 
that I was ravenously hungry, and Thad con- 
fessed to the same sensations. 

“At the next house we run across I shall 
take the chances of asking for food,” he said 
stoutly. “We cannot travel much further 
without something to eat, and must be so far 
from the river by this time that there is little 
danger the news of our escape has been told 
in this vicinity.” 

“Do you have any idea in which direction 
we should go to gain the American camp?” 
I asked, and Thad replied bluntly: 

“It would be a lie if I should say I had. 
There is in my mind a general idea, much the 
same as about New York; but it will mainly 
be trusting to chance.” 

“And we may be going directly away from 
our friends.” 

Thad nodded, but did not reply, and I 
understood he feared that all our efforts 
at finding the way back might even now be 
useless. 


394 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

“Is there no way of finding out the true 
course?” I cried after a pause. 

“We can make inquiries; but by so doing 
we shall proclaim ourselves in favor of inde- 
pendence, and would come to grief if the 
question was asked of a Tory.” 

“Wouldn’t it be much the same as the get- 
ting of food — worth the risk?” 

“It may be so, ’Liphalet, it may be so. 
We will hear what Sam has to say on the 
question when he awakes, and it shall be for 
the majority to decide.” 

Then we fell silent, each occupied with the 
same thoughts, but not daring to share them 
because of the unpleasant speculations which 
might arise, and thus we remained until night 
had come once more. 

The sun had been behind the hills an hour 
or more when Sam awakened, and his first 
question was as to whether there might be 
any hope of our finding something to eat. 

“I’ve been dreaming of a sumptuous din- 
ner, and now it seems as if I was well-nigh 
famished.” 

“I doubt not but that you are in truth,” 
Thad replied gently, “and it is for you to say 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 395 


if we shall make an attempt at begging 
food.” 

Sam was in favor of taking the chances, 
both in getting provisions and inquiring the 
true course to the American camp, and with 
this understanding we set out again, so stiff 
of limb that it was almost painful to put one 
foot before the other. 

As we walked the labor of moving became 
less, and at the end of a quarter of an hour 
all three were traveling at such a rapid pace 
as would have encouraged us greatly had it 
been known to a certainty our course was the 
true one. 

When an hour had passed we were on a 
highway, and approaching a dwelling from 
the windows of which could be seen a light. 

Without argument it was decided we would 
make the first venture here, and Thad volun- 
teered to act the part of spokesman. 

I am free to confess that my heart seemed 
to be almost in my mouth when he knocked 
at the door with as much assurance as if we 
had ample means to pay for all we required, 
and I stepped behind my comrades to avoid 
attracting undue attention when the door 


396 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

was opened after much clanking of bolts and 
chains. 

A man with a lighted candle stood before 
us, and since he held this above his head the 
better to see us, we could get but little idea 
of his general appearance. 

“We are hungry, sir, and beg you to give 
us food,” Thad said, coming to the point of 
the matter without play of words. “We are 
not beggars except for this night, and are 
ready to pay by our labor for what you may 
be pleased to supply us with.” 

“Whence come you?” 

“From Dobb’s Ferry, and are now on our 
way to New York, with but poor knowledge 
of the most direct road.” 

The man hesitated as if trying to decide 
whether to grant our request or not, and I 
believed we would be denied the entertain- 
ment so sadly needed, when a voice from an 
inner room cried : 

“Ask their names, Simon!” 

It seemed to me that the voice of the last 
speaker sounded familiar, but I put the 
thought from me at once as something 
impossible. 


iTo^SSV 



WE ARE HUNGRY. SIR. AND BEG YOU TO GIVE US FOOD. SAID THAD. 

Lcni(jhin<j Mary, p. 396. 









• 1 ♦ v>. 

• I ' » ^ ’ 




-rj * 


•> 


V* 

• • rv- , 


r^. 


r 



>"v V/ 


>1 


'f: -t '>^ 

^•t!l-‘5-i'‘it-’*^>-' 4'; 


C 





N*-. -r ••,, ■• 

«•'■• ■■■. ■i4'.';.-*- 

■ 


"... Ti. *«aibiiv. 

•£.'.^4„g4:o 


9 



• . I 


^__:r^■ 5^;: 



rf '•¥ * •• 


• > 


•r, 


^ t! . d’’ 







Sf'’® ' ^ 

,j^ ?> 

'!'■ • . ■«* 




'• 4 , ', 

i/.-*: ’■ V ' ? 


’ -f'-iVl 


' ' .1'.! 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 397 

“Our names are Antill, Willett and Burr,” 
Thad replied as if to the unseen speaker, and 
instantly there came a noise as if a piece of 
furniture had been overturned, after which 
the sound of hurried footsteps approaching 
the door could be heard. Involuntarily I 
shrank back yet further, believing danger of 
some kind menaced, but leaped forward a 
second later as the welcome face of Peleg 
Symonds came within the rays of light cast 
by the candle. 

It did not seem possible such rare good for- 
tune could be ours as that we should meet 
him at this time ; but when he gripped my 
hand in his so firmly that I cried aloud be- 
cause of the pain, his presence was fully 
proven. 

During several moments we stood on the 
doorstep all talking at the same time, and no 
one understanding what the other was say- 
ing, until the host cried heartily : 

“Come in, lads, come in! If it so be you’re 
in need of food we have here that which will 
be of more cheer than the wagging of Peleg’s 
tongue.” 

When we had entered the house the fisher- 


398 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

man so far overcame his excitement and 
desire to learn why we were on foot instead 
of in the cabin of the Laughing Mary as to 
introduce us to the owner of the house. 

“This is Simon Belcher, lads, a cousin of 
mine whom I’d lost sight of for many a year, 
an’ only found him by accident when I came 
on an errand like unto yours, except that I 
had the money with which to pay for what I 
craved. He would make you welcome even 
though your pockets were empty ; but since 
you are able to pay from my store, we’ll 
have the best the house affords. Now tell 
me what has happened?” 

Peleg was so eager in his desire for infor- 
mation that he barely gave us time to pay our 
respects to Simon Belcher before he again 
insisted on an explanation. 

Thad told the story, Sam and I adding a 
word now and then when he failed to give 
himself proper credit for all that had been 
done, and interrupted by Peleg many times 
as the old fellow laughed and roared in great 
glee over the trick we had played so suc- 
cessfully. 

Then when the tale was ended the fisher- 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 399 

man crossed the apartment to shake hands 
with his cousin, as he said: 

“These be rare lads, Simon, an’ what 
they’ve done shows it. When 1 first went on 
board the Laughing Mary I had no idee I’d 
be willin’, ay, even glad to serve under boys; 
but before bein’ two hours in their company 
I said to myself, says I: ‘Peleg Symonds, 
you’re with mates as is mates, an’ here you’ll 
stay.’ As I spoke then so I’ve done, an’ 
when we part it’ll be that they’re tired of me, 
not of my own free will.” 

“Peleg gives us too high praise. Master 
Belcher, and says too little regarding him- 
self,” Thad added. “We have him to thank 
for very much since the day he joined us, 
and by no means the least is his friendship.” 

“Well spoken, lad!” the old man cried 
heartily, and then insisted on shaking each 
of us by the hand, after which he gave all his 
attention to hastening the preparations for 
the appetizing meal which now gave such 
promise as caused my mouth to water. 

“It goes without sayin’ that I’m sorry the 
schooner is gone to the bottom,” Peleg con- 
tinued; “but her end was what you might 


400 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 

call a blaze of glory, and the cost of the les- 
son you gave the Britishers is none too great, 
even though the Laughing Mary could outsail 
any craft of her size in these waters. I’d 
give a good part of what I’ve got in my 
pocket if I could see Barnes’ face when he 
finds you’ve played him a second trick, and 
of much the same kind as before.” 

“He may never know it,” Sam suggested. 

“Don’t think anything like that, lad. 
Britishers ain’t fools, by a long shot, even 
though Barnes may be, an’ when that lieu- 
tenant sets about, figgerin’ out the whole 
thing, he’ll suddenly ask himself why the 
schooner should take it into her head to sink 
jest when you most needed she should. Then 
agin, he’ll be askin’ why you didn’t go ashore 
with him if it was all an accident. No, no, 
Sam, don’t you fear but the traitor knows all 
by this time, an’ is fumin’ over it in great 
style this very minute.” 

Then, after his mirth subsided a little, 
Peleg gave us an account of his visit to the 
American camp. 

He had found his way with no great diffi- 
culty, and was received by Colonel Willett 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 401 

himself, who at that very instant had con- 
cluded an audience with Silas Deane. 

The information brought was, as he knew, 
of the greatest importance, but what effect it 
might have upon the movements of our army 
the fisherman was, as a matter of course, 
unable to say. 

By the time his story came to an end, and 
he had repeated for at least the tenth time 
that he should have pushed forward within 
an hour had we not appeared so unexpectedly, 
Simon Belcher announced that supper was 
ready. 

Never again will it be possible that food 
can be so appetizing to me! 

We sat at table until our hunger was ap- 
peased, and then remained yet longer for the 
pleasure of eating, arising only after it had 
been decided that on the morrow, at an early 
hour, we set out for the American camp, at 
that time not more than twenty miles 
away. 

And there we did arrive in due season, to 
be well received by my uncle, complimented 
by Lieutenant- Colonel Tupper, and flattered 
by all with whom we came in contact, until 


402 CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 


there was danger of our being so puffed up 
by pride as to be useless ever after. 

I cannot now speak of the battle which 
followed, nor even so much as make mention 
of what we then did. 

With our arrival at the American camp the 
story of how we held command of, and how 
we lost the Laughing Mary has been told, 
and this portion of the records (which we 
shall continue if our lives are spared during 
the summer’s campaign) must come to an 
end, first because, in view of the adventures 
we afterward experienced, the telling of this 
has taken too many words, and secondly 
because what follows must be given as a 
separate account for its better understanding. 

We have not risen a single grade since hav- 
ing been made sergeant and corporals after 
our discovery of the plot against General 
Washington’s life, and there is very good 
reason why higher rank should not be ours. 

Although we have done our best at learning 
the duties of a soldier, neither of us (I myself 
think Thad should be made an exception), 
is sufficiently learned in such matters to 
take command of men older than ourselves. 


CAPTURE OF THE LAUGHING MARY. 403 

and there is a full supply of officers, but a 
dearth of privates, consequently we are well 
content to remain in the ranks. 

If the day shall come when it may be said 
of us that we are fitted to do all which is in 
our hearts to do for the cause, then I feel 
that we shall have achieved such rank and 
honor as will make my mother blush with 
pride, and my brave uncle glad to take us by 
the hands. 

It may be we shall find the opportunity 
during the campaign which is about to begin, 
and if the good God sees fit to spare our 
lives, we will put forth every effort as gladly 
as we did at Chatterton Hill, at Trenton, at 
Princeton, and in the smaller affairs in which 
we have been engaged since the loss of the 
Laughing Mary, as shall be set down in due 
time and order. 


THE END. 




A. L. BURT’S PUBLICATIONS 

For Young People 

BY POPULAR WRITERS, 

97-99-101 Reade Street, New York, 


Honnie Prince Charlie : A Tale of Fontenoy and Culloden. By 
G. A. Henty. Wi’li 12 full- page Illustrations by Gordon 
Browne. 12mo, cloth, price $1.00. 

The adventures of the son of a Scotch officer in French service. 
The boy, brought up by a Glasgow bailie, is a rested for aiding a 
Jacobite agent, escapes, is wrecked on the French coast, reaches 
Paris, and serves with the French army at Dettingen. He kills 
his father’s foe in a duel, and escaping to the coast, shares the 
adventures of Prince Charlie, but finally settles happily in Scot- 
land. 

“Ronald, the hero, is very like the hero of ‘ Quentin Durward.’ The lad’s 
journey across France, and his hairbreadth escapes, make up as good a nar- 
rative of the kind as we have ever read. For freshness of treatment and 
variety of incident Mr. Henty has surpassed himself.’’— Specfafo)-. 

With Clive in India ; or, the Beginnings of an Empire. By 
G. A. Henty. With 12 full-page Illustrations by Gordon 
Browne. 12mo, cloth, price $1.00. 

The period between the landing of Clive as a young writer in 
India and the close of his career was critical and eventful in the 
extreme. At its commencement the English were traders existing 
on sufferance of the native princes. At its close they were masters 
of Bengal and <>f the greater part of Southern India. The author 
has given a full and accurate account of the events of that stirring 
time, and battles and sieges follow each other in rapid succession, 
while he combines with his narrative a tale of daring and adven- 
ture, which gives a lifelike interest to the volume. 

“ He has taken a period of Indian history of the most vital importance, 
and he has embroidered on the historical facts a story which of itself is deeply 
interesting. Young people assuredly will be delighted with the volume.’’ — 
Scotsman. 

The Lion of the North : A Tale of Gustavus Adolphus and the 
Wars of Religion. By G. A. Henty. With full-page Illus- 
trations by John Sciionberg. 12mo, cloth, price $1.00. 

In this story Mr. Hen y gives the history of the first part of the 
Thirty Years’ War. The issue had its importance, which has ex- 
tended to the present day, as it established religious freedom 
in Germany. The array of the chivalrous king of Sweden was 
largely composed of Scotchmen, and among these was the hero of 
the story. 

“ The tale is a clever and instructive piece of history, and as boys may be 
trusted to read it conscientiously, they can hardly fail to be profited. "—Times. 


2 


A. L. BURT’S PUBLICATIONS. 


The Dragon and the Raven ; or, The Days of King Alfred. By 

G. A. Henty. With full-page Illustrations by C. J. Stani- 

LAND, R.I. 12mo, cloth, price $1.00. 

In this story the author gives an a ‘count of the fierce struggle 
between Saxon and Dane for supremacy in England, and presents 
a vivid picture of the misery and ruin to which the country was 
reduced by the ravages of the sea-wolves. The hero, a young 
Saxon thane, takes part in all the battles fought by King Alfred. 
He is driven from his home, takes to the sea and resists the Danes 
on their own element, and being pursued by them up the Seine, 
is present at the long and desperate siege of Paris. 

“ Treated in a manner most attractive to the boyish reader.” — Athenceum. 

The Young Carthaginian : A Story of the Times of Hannibal. 

By G. A. Henty. With full-page Illustrations by C. J. Stani- 

LAND, R.I. 12mo, cloth, price $1.00. 

Boys reading the history of the Punic Wars have seldom a keen 
appreciation of the merits of the contest. That it was at first a 
struggle for empire, and afterward for existence on the part of 
Carthage, that Hannibal was a great and skillful general, that he 
defeated the Romans at Trebia, Lake Trasimenus, and Cannae, 
and all but took Rome, represents pretty nearly the sum total of 
their knowledge. To let them know more about this momentous 
struggle for the empire of the world Mr. Henty has written this 
story, which not only gives in graphic style a brilliant descrip- 
tion of a most interesting period of history, but is a tale of ex- 
citing adventure sure to secure the interest of the reader. 

” Well constructed and vividly told. From first to last nothing stays the 
interest of the narrative. It bears us along as on a jstream whose current 
varies in direction, but never loses its force.'’''— Saturday Review. 

In Freedom’s Cause : A Story of Wallace and Bruce. ByG. A. 

Henty. With fulLpage Illustrations by Gordon Browne. 

12mo, cloth, price $1.00. 

In this story the author relates the stirring tale of the Scottish 
War of Independence. The extraordinary valor and personal 
prowess of Wallace and Bruce rival the deeds of the mythical 
heroes of chivalry, and indeed at one time Wallace was ranked 
with these legendary personages. The researches of modern 
historians have shown, however, that he was a living, breathing 
man — and a valiant champion. The hero of the tale fought under 
both Wallace and Bruce, and while the strictest historical accuracy 
has been maintained with respect to public events, the work is 
full of “hairbreadth ’scapes ” and wild adventure. 

” It is written in the author’s best style. Full of the wildest and most re- 
markable achievements, it is a tale of great interest, which a boy, once he has 
begun it, will not willingly put on one side .” — The Schoolmaster, 


A. L. BURT’S PUBLICATIONS. 


3 


With Lee in Virginia: A Story of the American Civil War, By 

G. A. Henty. With full-page Illustrations by Gordon 

Browne. 12mo, cloth, price |1.00. 

The story of a young Virginian planter, who, after bravely 
proving his sympathy with the slaves of brutal masters, serves 
with no less courage and enthusiasm under Lee and Jackson 
Girough the most exciting events of the struggle. He has many 
hairbreadth escapes, is seve al time'? wounded and twice taken 
prisoner; but his courage and readiness and, in two cases, the 
devotim of a black servant and a runaway slave whom he had 
assisted, bring him safely througn all difficulties, 

“ One of the best stories for lads which Mr. Henty has yet written. The 
picture is full of life and color, and the stirring and romantic incidents are 
skillfully blended with the personal interest and charm of the story.”— 
Standard. 

By England’s Aid ; or. The Freeing of the Netherlands (1585- 

1604). By G. A. Henty. With full-page Illustrations by 

Alfred Pearse, and Maps. 12mo, cloth, price $1.00. 

The story of two English lads v* ho go to Holland as pages in 
the service of one of “ the fighting Veres.” After many adven- 
tures by sea and land, one of the lads finds himself on board a 
Spanish ship at the time of the defeat of the Armada, and escapes 
only to fall into the hands of the Corsairs. He is successful in 
getting back to S|)ain under the protection of a wealthy merchant, 
and regains his native country aher the capture of Cadiz. 

“ It is an admirable book for youngsters. It overflows with stirring inci- 
dent and exciting adventure, and the color of the era and of the scene are 
finely reproduced. The illustrations add to its attractiveness,”— Boston 
Gazette. 

By Right of Conquest ; or, With Cortez in Mexico. By G. A. 

Henty. With full-page Illustrations by W. S. Stacey, and 

Two Maps. 12mo, cloth, price $1.50. 

The conquest of Mexico by a small band of resolute men under 
the magnificent leadership of Cortez is always rightly ranked 
among the most romantic and daring exploits in history. With 
this as the groundwork of his story Mr. Henty has interwoven the 
adventures of an English youth, Roger Hawkshaw, the sole sur- 
vivor of the good ship Swan, which had sailed from a Devon port 
to challenge the mercantile supremacy of the Spaniards in the 
New World. He is beset by many perils among the natives, but 
is saved by his own judgment and strength, and by the devotion 
of an Aztec princess. At last by a ruse he obtains the protection 
of the Spaniards, and after the fall of Mexico he succeeds in re- 
gaining his native shore, with a fortune and a charming Aztec 
bride. 

“ ‘ By Right of Conquest ’ is the nearest approach to a perfectly successful 
historical tale that Mr. Henty has yet published.”— .Academy. 


4 


A. L. BURT’S PUBLICATIONS. 


In the Reign of Terror : The Adventures of a Westminster Boy. 
By G. A. Henty. With full-page Illustrations by J. Schon- 
BERG. 12mo, cloth, price $1.00. 

Harry Sandwith, a Westminster boy, becomes a resident at the 
chateau of a French marquis, and aft r various adventures accom- 
panies the family to Paris at the crisis of the Revolution. Im- 
prisonment and death leduce tl.eir number, and the hero finds 
himself beset by perils with the three young daughters of the 
house in his charge. After hairbreadth escapes they reach Nan- 
tes. There the oirls are condemned to death in the coffin- hips, 
but are saved by the unfailing courage of their boy protector. 

“ Harry Sandwith, the Westminster boy, may fairly be said to beat Mr. 
Henty’s record. His adventures will delight boys by the audacity and peril 
they depict. . . . The story is one of Mr. Henty’s best."— Saturday 
Review. 

With Wolfe in Canada ; or. The Winning of a Continent. By 
G. A. Henty. With full-page Illustrations by Gordon 
Browne. 12mo, cloth, price $1.00. 

In the present volume Mr. Henty gives an account of the strug- 
gle between Britain and France for supremacy in the North 
American continent. On the issue of this war depended not only 
the destinies of North America, but to a large extent those of the 
mother countries themselves. The fall of Quebec decided that 
the Anglo-Saxon race should predominate in the New World; 
that Britain, and not France, should take the lead among the 
nations of Europe; and that English and American commerce, the 
English language, and English literature, should spread right 
round the globe. 

“ It is not only a lesson in history as instructively as it is graphically told, 
but also a deeply interesting and often thrilling tale of adventure and peril by 
flood and Illustrated London News. 

True to the Old Flag; A Tale of the American War of Inde- 
pendence. By G. A. Henty. With full-page Illustrations by 
Gordon Browne. 12mo, cloth, price $1.00. 

In this story the author has gone to the accounts of oflHcers who 
took part in the conflict, and lads will find that in no war in which 
American and British soldiers have been engaged did they behave 
with greater courage and good conduct. The historical portion of 
the book being accompanied with numerous thrilling adventures 
with the redskins on the shores of Lake Huron, a story of exciting 
interest is interwoven with the general narrative and carried 
through the book. 

“ Does justice to the pluck and determination of the British sol'^iers during 
the unfortunate struggle against American emancipation. The son of an 
American loyalist, who remains true to our flag, falls among the hostile red- 
skins in that very Huron country which has been endeared to us by the ex- 
ploits of Hawkeye and Chingachgook.”— ;tZ7ie Terries. 


A. L. BURT’S PUBLICATIONS. 


5 


The Lion of St. Mark : A Tale of Venice in the Fourteenth 

Century. By G. A. Heniy. With full-page Illustrations by 

Gordon Browne. 12mo, cloth, price $1.00. 

A story of Venice at a period when her strength and splendor 
were put to the severest tests. The hero displays a fine sense and 
manliness which carry him safely through an atmosphere of in- 
trigue, crime, and bloodshed. He contributes largely to the vic- 
tories of the Venetians at Porto d’Anzo and Chioggia, and finally 
wins the band of the daughter of one of the chief men of Venice. 

“ Every boy should read ‘ The Lion of St. Mark.’ Mr. Henry has never pro- 
duced a story more delightful, more wholesome, or more vivacious.” — Satur- 
day Review. 

A Final Reckoning: A Tale of Bush Life in Australia. ByG. A. 

Henty. With full-page Illustrations by W. B. Wollen. 

12mo, cloth, price $1.00, 

The hero, a young English lad. after rather a stormy boyhood, 
emigrates to Australia, and gets employment as an officer in the 
mounted police. A few years of active work on the frontier, 
where he has many a brush with both natives and bushrangers, 
gain him promotion to a captaincy, and he eventually settles 
down to the peaceful life of a squatter. 

“ Mr. Henty has never published a more readable, a more carefully con- 
structed, or a better written story than this.'"— Spectator. 

Under Drake’s Flag : A Tale of the Spanish Main. By G. A. 

Henty, With full-page Illustrations by Gordon Browne. 

12mo, cloth, price $1.00, 

A story of the days when England and Spain struggled for the 
supremacy of the sea. The heroes sail as lads with Drake in the 
Pacific expedition, and in his great voyage of circumnavigation. 
The historical portion of the story is absolutely to be relied upon, 
but this will perhaps be less attractive than the great variety of 
exciting adventure through which the young heroes pass in the 
course of their voyages, 

“ A book of adventure, where the hero meets with experience enough, one 
would think, to turn his hair gray.”— Harper’s Monthly Magazine. 

By Sheer Pluck : A 'J'ale of the Ashanti War. By G. A. Henty. 

With full- page Illustrations by Gordon Browne. 12mo, 

cloth, price $1.00. 

The author has woven, in a tale of thrilling interest, all the de- 
tails of the Ashanti campaign, of which he was himself a witness. 
His hero, after many exciting adventures in the interior, is de- 
tained a prisoner by the king just before the outbreak of the war, 
but escapes, and accompanies the English expedition on their 
march to Coomassie. 

“ Mr. Henty keeps up his reputation as a writer of boys’ stories. ‘ By Sheer 
Pluck ’ will be eagerly vQaA."—Athenaiuai. 


6 


A. L, BURT’S PUBLICATIONS. 


By Pike and Dyke ; A Tale of the Rise of the Dutch Republic. 
By G. A. Henty. With full-page Illustrations by Maynard 
Brown, and 4 Maps. 12mo, cloth, price $1.00. 

In this story Mr. Henty traces the adventures and brave deeds 
of an English boy in the household of the ablest man of his age — 
William the Silent. Edward Martin, the son of an English sea- 
captain, enters the service of the Prince as a volunteer, and is em- 
ployed by him in many dangerous and responsible missions, in the 
discharge of which he passes through the great sieges of the time. 
He ultimately settles down as Sir Edward Martin. 

“ Boys with a turn for historical research will be enchanted with the book, 
while the rest who only care for adventure .will be students in spite of them- 
selves.”— Nf. James' Gazette. 

St. George for England : A Tale of Cressy and Poitiers. By 
G. A. Henty. With full-page Illustrations by Gordon 
Browne. 12mo, cloth, price $1.00. 

No portion of English history is more crowded with great events 
than that of the reign of Edward III. Cressy and Poitiers; the 
destruction of the Spanish fleet; the plague of the Black Death; 
the Jacquerie rising; these are treated by the author in “ St. 
George for England.” The hero of the story, although of good 
family, begins life as a London apprentice, but after countless ad 
ventures and perils becomes by valor and good conduct the squire, 
and at last the trusted friend of the Black Prince. 

“Mr. Henty has developed for himself a type of historical novel for boys 
which bids fair to supplement, on their behalf, the historical labors of Sir 
Walter Scott in the land of fiction.”— T/ie Standard. 

Captain’s Kidd’s Gold : The True Story of an Adventurous Sailor 
Boy. By James Franklin Fitts. 12mo, clot. i, price $1.00. 
There is something fascinating to the average youth in the very 
idea of buried treasure. A vision arises before his eyes of swarthy 
Portuguese and Spanish rascals, with black beards and gleaming 
eyes — sinister-looking fellows who once on a time haunted the 
Spanish Main, sneaking out from some hidden creek in their long, 
low schooner, of picaroonish rake and sheer, to attack an unsus- 
pecting trading craft. There were many famous sea rovers in 
their day, but none more celebrated than Capt. Kidd. Perhaps 
the most fascinating tale of all is Mr. Fitts’ true story of an adven 
turous American boy, who receives from his dying father an 
ancient bit of vellum, which the latter obtained in a curious way. 
The document bears obscure directions purporting to locate a cer- 
tain island in the Bahama group, aud a considerable treasure 
buried there by two of Kidd’s crew. The hero of this book, 
Paul Jones Garry, is an ambitious, persevering lad, of salt-water 
New England ancestry, and his efforts to reach the island and 
secure the money form one of the most absorbing tales for our 
youth that has come from the press. 


A. L. BURT’S PUBLICATIONS. 


7 


Captain Bayley’s Heir : A Tale of the Gold Fields of California. 

By G. A. Henty. With full-page Illustrations by H. M. 

Paget. 12mo, cloth, price $1.00. 

A frank, manly lad and his cousin are rivals in the heirship'of a 
CO siderable property. The former falls into a trap laid by the 
latter, and while under a false accusation of theft foolishly leaves 
England for America. He works his passage before the mast, 
joins a small band of hunters, crosses a tract of country infested 
with Indians to the Californian gold diggings, and is successful 
both as digger and trader. 

“Mr. Henty is careful to mingle instruction with entertainment; and the 
humorous touches, especially in the sketch of John Holl, the Westminster 
dustman, Dickens himself could hardly have excelled.”— C/trisfmn Leader. 

For Name and Fame ; or. Through Afghan Passes. By G. A. 

Henty. With full-page Illustrations by Gobdon Browne. 

12mo, cloth, price $1.00. 

An interesting story of the last war in Afghanistan. The hero, 
after being wrecked and going through many stirring adventures 
among the Malays, finds his way to Calcutta and enlists in a regi- 
me t proceeding to join the army at the Afghan passes. He ac- 
companies the force under General Roberts to the Pei war Kotal, 
is wounded, taken prisoner, carried to Cabul, whence he is trans- 
ferred to Candahar, and takes part in the final defeat of the army 
of Ayoub Khan. 

“ The best feature of the book— apart from the interest of its scenes of ad- 
venture— is its honest effort to do justice to the patriotism of the Afghan 
people.”— Da^7:y News. 

Captured by Apes : The Wonderful Adventures of a Young 

Animal Trainer. By Harry Prentice. 12mo, cloth, $1.00. 

The scene of this tale is laid on an island in the Malay Archi- 
pelago. Philip Garland, a young animal collector and trainer, of 
New York, sets sail for Eastern seas in quest of a new stock of 
living curiosities. The vessel is wrecked off the coast of Borneo 
and young Garland, the sole survivor of the disaster, is cast ashore 
on a small island, and captured by the apes that overrun the 
place. The lad discovers that the ruling spirit of the monkey 
tribe is a gigantic and vicious baboon, whom he identifies as 
Goliah, an animal at one time in his possession and with whose 
instruction he had been especially diligent. The brute recognizes 
him, and with a kind of malignant satisfaction puts his former 
master through the same course of training he had himself ex- 
perienced with a faithfulness of detail which shows how astonish- 
ing is monkey recollection. Very novel indeed is the way by 
which the young man escapes death. Mr. Prentice has certainly 
worked a new vein on juvenile fiction, and the ability with which 
he handles a diflficult subject stamps him as a writer of undoubted 
skill. 


8 


A. L. BURT’S PUBLICATIONS. 


The Bravest of the Brave ; or, With Peterborough in Spain. 

By G. A. Henty. With full-page Illustrations by H. M. 

Paget. 13uio, cloth, price $1.00. 

There are few great leaders whose lives and actions have so 
completely fallen into oblivion as those of the Earl of Peter- 
borough. This is largely due to the fact that they were over- 
shadowed by the glory and successes of Marlborough. His career 
as general extended over little more than a year, and yet, in that 
time, he showed a genius for warfare which has never been sur- 
passed. 

“ Mr. Henty never loses sight of the moral purpose of his work— to enforce 
the doctrine of courage and truth. Lads will read ‘ The Bravest of the Brave ’ 
with pleasure and profit; of that we are quite sure.”— Pa % Telegraph. 

The Cat of Bubastes : A Story of Ancient Egypt. By G. A. 

Henty. With full-page Illustrations. 12mo, cloth, price $1.00. 

A story which will give young readers an unsurpassed insight 
into the customs of the Egyptian people. Amuba, a prince of the 
Rebu nation, is carried with his charioteer Jethro into slavery. 
They become inmates of the house of Ameres, the Egyptian high- 
priest, and are happy in his service until the priest’s son acci- 
dentally kills the sacred cat of Bubastes. In an outburst of popular 
fury Ameres is killed, and it rests with Jethro and Amuba to 
secure the escape of the high-priest’s son and daughter. 

“ The story, from the critical moment of the killing of the sacred cat to the 
perilous exodus into Asia with which it closes, is very skillfully constructed 
and full of exciting adventures. It is admirably illustrated.”— 

Review. 

With Washington at Monmouth : A Story of Three Phila- 
delphia Boys. By James Otis. 12mo, cloth, price $1.00. 

Three Philadelphia boys, Seth Graydon “whose mother con- 
ducted a boarding-house which was patronized by the British 
officers;” Enoch Ball, “son of that Mrs. Ball whose dancing 
school was situated on Letitia Street,” and little Jacob, son of 
“ Chris, the Baker,” serve as the principal characters. The 
story is laid during the winter when Lord Howe held possession 
of the city, and the lads aid the cause by assisting the American 
spies who make regular and frequent visits from Valley Forge. 
One reads here of home-life in the captive city when bread was 
scarce among the people of the lower classes, and a reckless prodi- 
gality shown by the British officers, who passed the winter in 
feasting and merry-making while the members of the patriot army 
but a few miles away were suffering from both cold and hunger, 
’i'be story abounds with pictures of Colonial life skillfully 
drawn, and the glimpses of Washington’s soldiers which are given 
show that the work has not been hastily done, or without con- 
siderable study. 


A. L. BURT’S PUBLICATIONS. 


9 


For the Temple: A Tale of the Fall of Jerusalem. By G. A. 
Henty. With full-page Illustrations by S. J. Solomon. 12mo, 
cloth, price $1.00. 

Mr. Henty here weaves into the record of Josephus an admirable 
and attractive story. The troubles in the district of Tiberias, the 
march of the legions, the sieges of Jotapata, of Gamala, and of 
Jerusalem, form the impressive and carefully studied historic 
setting to the figure of the lad who passes from the vineyard to 
the service of Josephus, becomes the leader of a guerrilla band of 
patriots, fights bravely for the Temple, and after a brief term of 
slavery at Alexandria, returns to his Galilean home with the favor 
of Titus. 

“ Mr. Henty’s graphic prose pictures of the hopeless Jewish resistance to 
Roman sway add another leaf to his record of the famous wars of the world.” 
— Graphic. 

Facing Death ; or. The Hero of the Vaughan Pit. A Tale of 
the Coal Mines. By G. A. Henty. With full-page Illustra- 
tions by Gordon Browne. 12mo, cloth, price $1.00. 

“Facing Death” is a story with a purpose. It is intended to 
show that a lad who makes up his mind firmly and resolutely that 
he will rise in life, and who is prepared to face toil and ridicule 
and hardship to carry out his determination, is sure to succeed. 
The hero of the story is a typical British boy, dogged, earnest, 
generous, and though “ shamefaced” to a degree, is ready to face 
death in the discharge of duty. 

“The tale is well written and well illustrated, and there is much reality in 
the characters. If any father, clergyman, or schoolmaster is on the lookout 
for a good book to give as a present to a boy who is worth his salt, this is the 
book we would recommend.” — Standard. 

Tom Temple’s Career. By Horatio Alger. 12mo, cloth, 
price $1.00. 

Tom Temple, a bright, self-reliant lad, by the death of his 
father becomes a boarder at the home of Nathan Middleton, a 
penurious insurance agent. Though well paid for keeping the 
boy, Nathan and his wife endeavor to bring Master Tom in line 
with their parsimonious habits. The lad ingeniously evades their 
efforts and revolutionizes the household. As Tom is heir to 
$40,000, he is regarded as a person of some importance until by 
an unfortunate combination of circumstances his fortune shrinks 
to a few hundreds. He leaves Plympton village to seek work in 
New York, whence he undertakes an important mission to Cali- 
fornia, around which center the most exciting incidents of his 
young career. Some of his adventures in the far west are so 
startling that the reader will scarcely close the book until the last 
page shall have been reached. The tale is written in Mr. Alger’s 
most fascinating style, and is bound to please the very large class 
of boys who regard this popular author as a prime favorite. 


10 


A. L. BURT’S PUBLICATION^'; 


Maori and Settler: A Story of the New Zealand War. By 

G. A. Henty. With full-page Illustrations by Alfred Pearse. 

12mo, cloth, price $1.00. 

The Renshaws emigrate to New Zealand during the period of 
the war with the natives. Wilfrid, a strong, self-reliant, coura- 
geous lad, is the mainstay of the household. He has for his friend 
Mr. Atherton, a botanist and naturalist of herculean strength and 
unfailing nerve and humor. In the adventures among the Maoris, 
there are many breathless moments in which the odds seem hope- 
lessly against the party, but they succeed in establishing them- 
selves happily in one of the pleasant New Zealand valleys. 

“Brimful of adventure, of humorous and interesting conversation, and 
vivid pictures of colonial hte."— Schoolmaster. 

Julian Mortimer}: A Brave Boy’s Struggle for Home and Fortune. 

By Harry Castlemon. 12mo, cloth, price $1.00. 

Here is a story that will warm every boy’s heart. There is 
mystery enough to keep any lad’s imagination wound up to the 
highest pitch. The scene of the story lies west of the Mississippi 
River, in the days when emigrants made their perilous way across 
the great plains to the land of gold. One of the startling features 
of the book is the attack upon the wagon train by a large party of 
Indians. Our hero is a lad of uncommon nerve and pluck, a brave 
young American in every sense of the word. He enlists and holds 
the reader’s sympathy from the outset. Surrounded by an un- 
known and constant peril, and assisted by the unswerving fidelity 
of a stalwart trapper, a real rough diamond, our hero achieves tbe 
most happy results. Harry Castlemon has written many enter- 
taining stories for boys, and it would seem almost superfluous to 
say anything in his praise, for the youth of America regard him 
as a favorite author. 

“Carrots:” Just a Little Boy. By Mrs. Molesworth. With 

Illustrations by Walter Crane. 12mo, cloth, price 75 cents. 

“ One of the cleverest and most pleasing stories it has been our good for- 
tune to meet with for some time. Carrots and his sister are delightful little 
beings, whom to read about is at once to become very fond otJ"— Examiner. 

“A genuine children’s book; we’ve seen ’em seize it, and read it greedily! 
Children are first-rate critics, and thoroughly appreciate Walter Crane’s 
illustrations.”— Pwnc/i. 

Mopsa the Fairy. By Jean Ingelow. With Eight page 

Illustrations. 12mo, cloth, price 75 cents. 

“ Mrs. Ingelow is, to our mind, the most charming of all living writers for 
children, and ‘ Mopsa’ alone ought to give her a kind of pre-emptive right to 
tlie love and gratitude of our young folks. It requires genius to conceive a 
purely imaginary work which must of necessity deal with the supernatural 
without running into a mere rior of fantastic absurdity; but genius Miss In- 
gelow has and the stor3' of ‘ Jack ’ is as careless and joyous, but as delicate 
as a picture of childhood.”— * 


A. h. BURT’S PUBLICATIONS. 


11 


A Jaunt Through Java: The Story of a Journey to the Sacred 
Mountain. By Edward S. Ellis. 12mo, cloth, price $1.00. 
The central interest of this story is found in the thrilling ad- 
ventures of two cousins, Hermon and Eustace Hadley, on their 
trip across the island of Java, from Samarang to the Sacred Moun- 
tain. In a land where the Royal Bengal tiger runs at large; 
where the rhinoceros and other fierce beasts are to be met with 
at unexpected moments; it is but natural that the heroes of this 
book should have a lively experience. Hermon not only dis- 
tinguishes himself by killing a full grown tiger at short range, 
but meets with the most startling adventure of the journey. 
T'here is much in this narrative to instruct as well a- entertain the 
reader, and so deftly has Mr. Ellis used his material that theie is 
) ot a dull page in the book. The two heroes are brave, manly 
young fellows, bubbling over with boyish independence. They 
cope with the many difficulties that ’arise during the trip in a fear- 
less way that is bound to win the admiration of every lad who is 
so fortunate as to read their adventures. 

Wrecked on Spider Island; or. How Ned Rogers Found the 
Treasure. By James Otis. 12mo, cloth, price $1.00. 

A “ down-east” plucky lad who ships as cabin boy, not from 
love of adventure, but because it is the only course remaining by 
which he can gain a livelihood. While in his bunk, seasick, 
Ned Rogers hears the captain and mate discussing their plans for 
the willful wreck of the brig in order to gain the insurance. Once 
it is known he is in possession of the secret the captain maroons 
him on Spider Island, explaining to the crew that the boy is 
afflicted with leprosy. While thus involuntarily playing the part 
of a Crusoe, Ned discovers a wreck submerged in the sand, and 
overhauling the timbers for the purpose of gathering material 
with which to build a hut finds a considerable amount of treasure. 
Raising the wreck; a voyage to Havana under sail; shipping there 
a crew and running for Savannah; the attempt of the crew to 
seize the little craft after learning of the treasure on board, and, 
as a matter of course, the successful ending of the journey, all 
serve to make as entertaining a story of sea-life as the most 
captious boy could desire. 

Geoff and Jim : A Story of School Life. By Ismay Thorn. Il- 
lustrated by A. G. Walker. 12mo, cloth, price 75 cents. 

“ This is a prettily told story of the life spent by two motherless bairns at 
a small preparatory school. Both Geoff and ,Tim are very lovable characters, 
only Jim is the more so; and the scrapes he gets into and the trials he en- 
dures will, no doubt, interest a large circle of young readers.”— C/iwrc^ 
TitYt^S 

“This is a capital children’s story, the characters well portrayed, and the 
book tastefully bound and well illustrated.”— S^c/toofma.sfe'r. 

“ The story can be heartily recommended as a present for boys. 
Standard. 


12 


A. L. BURT’S PUBLICATIONS. 


The Castaways ; or, On the Florida Reefs. By James Otis, 

12mo, cloth, price $1.00. 

This tale smacks of the salt sea. It is just the kind of story 
that the majority of boys yearn for. From the moment that the 
Sea Queen dispenses with the services of the tug in lower New 
York bay till the breeze leaves her becalmed off the coast of 
Florida, one can almost hear the whistle of the wind through her 
rigging, the creak of her straining cordage as she heels to the 
leeward, and feel her rise to the snow-capped waves which her 
sharp bow cuts into twin streaks of foam. Off Marquesas Keys 
she floats in a dead calm. Ben Clark, the hero of the story, and 
Jake, the cook, spy a turtle asleep upon the glassy surface of the 
water. They determine to capture him, and take a boat for that 
purpose, and just as they succeed in catching him a thick fog 
cuts them off from the vessel, and then their troubles be in. 
They take refuge on board a drifting hulk, a storm arises and they 
are cast ashore upon a low sandy key. Their adventures from 
this point cannot fail to charm the reader. As a writer for young 
people Mr. Otis is a prime favorite. His style is captivating, and 
never for a moment does he allow the interest to flag. In “ The 
Castaways ” he is at his best. 

Tom Thatcher’s Fortune. By Horatio Alger, Jr. 12mo, 

cloth, price $1.00. 

Like all of Mr. Alger’s heroes, Tom Thatcher is a brave, am- 
bitious, unselfish boy. He supports his mother and sister on 
meager wages earned as a shoe-pegger in John Simpson’s factory. 
The story begins with Tom’s discharge from the factory, because 
Mr. Simpson felt annoyed with the lad for interrogating him too 
closely about his missing father. A few days afterward Tom 
learns that which induces him to start overland for California with 
the view of probing the family mystery. He meets with many ad- 
ventures. Ultimately he returns to his native village, bringing con- 
sternation to the soul of John Simpson, who only escapes the con- 
sequences of his villainy by making full restitution to the man 
whose friendship he had betrayed. The story is told in that en- 
tertaining way which has made Mr. Alger’s name a household 
word in so many homes. 

Birdie : A Tale of Child lafe. By H. L. Childe-Pemberton. 

Illustrated by H. W. Rainey. 12mo, cloth, price 75 cents. 

“ The story is quaint and simple, but there is a freshness about it that 
makes one hear again the ringing laugh and the cheery shout of children at 
play which charmed his earlier years. "—New York Express. 

Popular Fairy Tales. By the Brothers Grimm Profusely 

Illustrated, 12mo, cloth, price $1.00. 

“ From first to last, almost without exception, these stories are delightful ” 
—Athenoeum, 


A. L. BURT’fc^ PUBLICATIONS. 


13 


With Lafayette at Yorktown : A Story of How Two Boys 
Joined the Continental Army. By James Otis. 12mo, cloth, 
price $1.00. 

The two boys are from Portsmouth, N. H., and are introduced 
in August, 1781, when on the point of leaving home to enlist in 
Col. Scaramell’s regiment, then stationed near New York City. 
Their method of traveling is on horseback, and the author has 
given an interesting account of what was expected from boys in 
the Colonial days. The lads, after no slight amount of adventure, 
are sent as messengers — not soldiers — into the south to find the 
troops under Lafayette. Once with that youthful general they 
are given employment as spies, and enter the Bricish camp, 
bringing away valuable information. The pictures of camp-life 
are carefully drawn, and the portrayal of Lafayette’s character is 
thoroughly well done. The story is wholesome in tone, as are all 
of Mr. Otis’ works. There is no lack of exciting incident which 
the youthful reader craves, but it is healthful excitement brim- 
ming with facts which every boy should be familiar with, and 
while the reader is following the adventures of Ben Jaffreys and 
Ned Allen he is acquiring a fund of historical lore which will 
remain in his memory long after that which he has memorized 
from text-books has been forgotten. 

Lost in the Canon ; Sam Willett’s Adventures on the Great 
Colorado. By Alfred R. Calhoun. 12mo, cloth, price $1.00. 
This story hinges on a fortune left to Sam Willett, the hero, 
and the fact that it will pass to a disreputable relative if the lad 
dies before he shall have reached his majority. The Vigilance 
Committee of Hurley’s Gulch arrest Sam’s father and an associate 
for the crime of murder. Their lives depend on the production 
of the receipt given for money paid. This is in Sam’s possession 
at the camp on the other side of the canon. A messenger is dis- 
patched to get it. He reaches the lad in the midst of a fearful 
storm which floods the canon. His father’s peril urges Sam to 
action. A raft is built on which the boy and his friends essay to 
cross the torrent. They fail to do so, and a desperate trip down 
the stream ensues. How the party finally e.scape from the hor- 
rors of their situation and Sam reaches Hurley’s Gulch in the very 
nick of time, is described in a graphic style that stamps Mr. Cal- 
houn as a master of his art. 

Jack : A Topsy Turvy Story. By C. M. Crawley-Boevey. 
With upward of Thirty Illustrations by H. J. A. Miles. 
12mo, cloth, price 75 cents. 

“ The illustrations deserve particular mention, as they add largely to the 
interest of this amusing volume for children. .TacR falls asleep with his mind 
full of the subject of the fishpond, and is very much surprised presently to 
find himself an inhabitant of Waterworld, where he goes though wonderful 
and edifying adventures. A handsome and pleasant hook."— Litera7’y Woi lU. 


14 


A. L. BURT’S PUBLICATIONS. 


Search for the Silver City : A Tale of Adventure in Yucatan. 

By James Otis. 12mo, cloth, price $1.00. 

Two American lads, Teddy Wright and Neal Emery, embark 
on the steam yacht Day Dream for a short summer cruise to the 
tropics. Homeward bound the yacht is destroyed by fire. All 
hands take to the boats, but during the night the boat is cast upon 
the coast of Yucatan. They come across a young American 
named Cummings, who entertains them with the story of the 
wonderful Silver City, of the Chan Santa Cruz Indians. Cum- 
mings proposes with the aid of a faithful Indian ally to brave 
the perils of the swamp and carry oil a number of the golden 
images from the temples. Pursued with relentless vigor for days 
their situation is desperate. At last their escape is effected in an 
astonishing manner. Mr. Otis has built his story on an historical 
foundation. It is so full of exciting incidents that the reader is 
quite carried away with the novelty and realism of the narrative. 

Frank Fowler, the Cash Boy. By Horatio Alger, Jr. 12mo, 

cloth, price $1.00. 

Thrown upon his own resources Frank Fowler, a poor boy, 
bravely determines to make a living for himself and his foster- 
sister Grace. Going to New York he obtains a situation as cash 
boy in a dry goods store. He renders a service to a wealthy old 
gentleman named Wharton, who takes a fancy to the lad. Frank, 
after losing his place as cash boy, is enticed by an enemy to a 
lonesome part of New Jersey and held a prisoner. This move re- 
coils upon the plotter, for it leads to a clue that enables the lad to 
establish his real identity. Mr. Alger’s stories are not only un- 
usually interesting, but they convey a useful lesson of pluck and 
manly independence. 

Budd Boyd’s Triumph; or, the Boy Firm of Fox Island. By 

William P. Chipman. 12mo, cloth, price $1.00. 

The scene of this story is laid on the upper part of Narragansett 
Bay, and the leading incidents have a strong salt-water flavor. 
Owing to the conviction of his father for forgery and theft, Budd 
Boyd is compelled to leave his home and strike out for himself. 
Chance brings Budd in contact with Judd Floyd. The two boys, 
being ambitious and clear sighted, form a partnership to catch 
and sell fish. The scheme is successfully launched, but the un- 
expected appearance on the scene of Thomas Bagsley, the man 
whom Budd believes guilty of the crimes attributed to his father, 
leads to several disagreeable complications that nearly caused the 
lad’s ruin. His pluck and good sense, however, carry him through 
his troubles. In following the career of the boy firm of Boyd & 
Floyd, the youthful reader will find a useful lesson — that industry 
and perseverance are bound to lead to ultimate success. 


A. L. BURT’S PUBIJCATIONS. 


15 


The Errand Boy ; or, How Phil Brent Won Success. By 

Horatio Alger, Jr. 12mo, cloth, price $1.00. 

The career of “ The Errand Boy” embraces the city adventures 
of a smart country lad who at an early age was abandoned by his 
father. Philip was brought up by a kind-hearted innkeeper 
named Brent. The death of Mrs. Brent paved the way for the 
hero’s subsequent troubles. Accident introduces him to the 
notice of a retired merchant in New York, who not only secures 
him the situation of errand boy but thereafter stands as his 
friend. An unexpected turn of fortune’s wheel, however, brings 
Philip and his father together. In “The Errand Boy” Philip 
Brent is possessed of the same sterling qualities so conspicuous in 
all of the previous creations of this delightful writer for our youth. 

The Slate Picker : The Story of a Boy’s Life in the Coal Mines. 

By Harry Prentice. 12mo, cloth, price $1.00. 

This is a story of a boy’s life in the coal mines of Pennsylvania. 
There are many thrilling situations, notably that of Ben Burton’s 
leap into the “ lion’s mouth ” — the yawning shute in the breakers 
— to escape a beating at the hands of the savage Spilkins, the 
overseer. Gracie Gordon is a little angel in rags, Terence O’Dowd 
is a manly, sympathetic lad, and Enoch Evans, the miner-poet, is 
a big-hearted, honest fellow, a true friend to all whose bur- 
dens seem too heavy for them to bear. Ben Burton, the hero, had 
a hard road to travel, but by grit and energy he advanced step by 
step until he found himself called upon to fill the position of 
chief engineer of the Kohinoor Coal Company. 

A Runaway Brig ; or. An Accidental Cruise. By James Otis. 

12mo, cloth, price $1.00. 

“ A Runaway Brig ” is a sea tale, pure and simple, and that’s 
where it strikes a boy’s fancy. The reader can look out upon 
the wide shimmering sea as it flashes back the sunlight, and 
imagine himself afloat with Harry Vandyne, Walter Morse, Jim 
Libby and that old shell-back. Bob Brace, on the brig Bonita, 
which lands on one of the Bahama keys. Finally three strangers 
steal the craft, leaving the rightful owners to shift for themselves 
aboard a broken-down tug. The boys discover a mysterious 
document which enables them to find a buried treasure, then a 
storm comes on and the tug is stranded. At last a yacht comes in 
sight and the party with the treasure is taken off tlm lonely key. 
The most exacting youth is sure to be fascinated with this enter- 
taining story. 

' Fairy Tales and Stories. By Hans Christian Andersen. 

Profusely Illustrated, 12mo, cloth, price $1.00. 

“ If I were asked to select a child’s library I should name these three volumes 
‘English,’ ‘Celtic,’ and ‘Indian Fairy Tales,’ with Grimm and Hans Ander- 
sen’s Fairy Tales.”— independent. 


10 


A. L. BURT’S PUBLICATIONS. 


The Island Treasure ; or, Harry Darrel’s Fortune. By Frank 

H. Converse. 13mo, cloth, price $1.00. 

Harry Darrel, an orphan, having received a nautical training on 
a school-ship, is bent on going to sea with a boyish acquaintance 
named Dan Plunket. A runaway horse changes his prospects. 
Harry saves Dr. Gregg from drowning and the doctor presents his 
preserver with a bit of property known as Gregg’s Island, and 
makes the lad sailing-master of his sloop yacht. A piratical hoard 
is supposed to be hidden somewhere on the island. After much 
search and many thwarted plans, at last Dan discovers the 
treasure and is the means of finding Harry’s father. Mr. Con- 
verse’s stories possess a charm of their own which is appreciated 
by lads who delight in good healthy tales that smack of salt 
water. 

The Boy Explorers: The Adventures of Two Boys in Alaska. 

By Harry Prentice. 12mo, cloth, price $1.00. 

Two boys, Raymond and Spencer Manning, travel from San 
Francisco to Alaska to join their father in search of their uncle, 
who, it is believed, was captured and detained by the inhabitants 
of a place called the “ Heart of Alaska.” On their arrival at 
Sitka the boys with an Indian guide set off across the mountains. 
’Phe trip is fraught with perils that test the lads’ courage to the 
utmost. Reaching the Yukon River they build a raft and float 
down the stream, entering the Mysterious River, from which they 
barely escape with their lives, only to be captured by natives of 
the Heart of Alaska. All through their exciting adventures the 
lads demonstrate what can be accomplished by pluck and resolu- 
tion, and their experience makes one of the most interesting tales 
ever written. 

The Treasure Finders : A Boy’s Adventures in Nicaragua. By 

James Otis. 12mo, cloth, price $1.00. 

Roy and Dean Coloney, with their guide Tongla, leave their 
father’s indigo plantation to visit the wonderful ruins of an ancient 
city. The boys eagerly explore the dismantled temples of an ex- 
tinct race and discover three golden images cunningly hidden 
away. They escape with the greatest difficulty; by taking advan- 
tage of a festive gathering they seize a canoe and fly down the 
river. Eventually they reach safety with their golden prizes. 
Mr. Otis is the prince of story tellers, for he handles his material 
with consummate skill. We doubt if he has ever written a more 
entertaining story than “ The Treasure Finders.” 

Household Fairy Tales. By the Brothers Grimm. Profusely 

Illustrated, 12mo, cloth, price $1.00. 

“Asa collection of fairy tales to delight children of all ages this work 
ranks second to none."— Daily Graphic. 


A. L. BURT’S PUBLICATIONS. 


17 


Dan the Newsboy. By Horatio Alger, Jr. 12mo, cloth, 
price $1.00. 

The reader is introduced to Dan Mordaunt and his mother living 
in a poor tenement, and the lad is pluckily trying to make ends 
meet by selling papers in the streets of New York. A little 
heiress of six years is confided to the care of the Mordaunts. At 
the same time the lad obtains a position in a wholesale house. 
He soon demonstrates how valuable he is to the firm by detecting 
the bookkeeper in a bold attempt to rob his employers. The 
child is kidnaped and Dan tracks the child to the house where 
she is hidden, and rescues her. The wealthy aunt of the little 
heiress is so delighted with Dan’s courage and many good qualities 
that she adopts him as her heir, and the conclusion of the book 
leaves the hero on the high road to every earthly desire. 

Tony the Hero : A Brave Boy’s Adventure with a Tramp. By 
Horatio Alger, Jr. 12mo, cloth, price $1.00. 

Tony, a sturdy bright-eyed boy of fourteen, is under the control 
of Rudolph Rugg, a thorough rascal, shiftless and lazy, spending 
his time tramping about the country. After much abuse Tony 
runs away and gets a job as stable boy in a country hotel. Tony is 
heir to a large estate in England, and certain persons find it nec- 
essary to produce proof of the lad's death. Rudolph for a con- 
sideration hunts up Tony and throws him down a deep well. Of 
course Tony escapes from the fate provided for him, and by a 
brave act makes a rich friend, with whom he goes to England, 
where he secures his rights and is prosperous. The fact that Mr. 
Alger is the author of this entertaining book will at once recom- 
mend it to all juvenile readers. 

A Young Hero ; or. Fighting to Win. By Edward S. Ellis. 
12mo, cloth, price $1.00. 

This storytells how a valuable solid silver service was stolen 
from the Misses Perkinpine, two very old and simple minded 
ladies. Fred Sheldon, the hero of this story and a friend of the 
old ladies, undertakes to discover the thieves and have them ar- 
rested. After much time spent in detective work, he succeeds in 
discovering the silver plate and winning the reward for its re- 
storation. During the narrative a circus comes to town and a 
thrilling account of the escape of the lion from its cage, with its 
recapture, is told in Mr. Ellis’ most fascinating style. Every 
boy will be glad to read this delightful book. 

The Days of Bruce: A Story from Scottish History. By Grace 
Aguilar. Illustrated, 12mo, cloth, price $1.00. 

“There is a delightful freshness, sincerity and vivacity about all of Grace 
Aguilar’s stories which cannot fail to win the interest and admiration of 
every lover of good reading.” —i^usfon Beacon. 


18 


A. L. BURT’S PUBLICATIONS. 


Tom the Bootblack; or, The Road to Success. By Horatio 

Alger, Jr. 13mo, cloth, price $1.00. 

A bright, enterprising lad was Tom the bootblack. He was 
not at all ashamed of his humble calling, though always on the 
lookout to better himself. His guardian, old Jacob Morton, died, 
leaving him a small sum of money and a written confession that 
Tom, instead of being of humble origin, was the son and heir of 
a deceased Western merchant, and had been defrauded out of his 
just rights by an unscrupulous uncle. The lad started for Cin- 
cinnati to look up his heritage. But three years passed away 
before he obtained his first clue. Mr. Grey, the uncle, did not 
hesitate to employ a ruffian to kill the lad. The plan failed, and 
Gilbert Grey, once Tom the bootblack, came into a comfortable 
fortune. This is one of Mr. Alger’s best stories. 

Captured by Zulus : A story of Trapping in Africa. By Harr'S 

Prentice. 12mo, cloth, price $1.C0. 

This story details the adventures of two lads, Dick Elsworth 
and Bob Harvey, in the wilds of South Africa, for the purpose of 
obtaining a supply of zoological curiosities. By stratagem the 
Zulus capture Dick and Bob and take them to their principal 
kraal or village. The lads escape death by digging their way 
out of the prison hut by night. They are pursued, and after a 
rough experience the boys eventually rejoin the expedition and 
take part in several wild animal hunts. The Zulus finally give 
up pursuit and the expedition arrives at the coast without further 
trouble. Mr. Prentice has a delightful method of blending fact 
with fiction. He tells exactly how wild-beast collectors secure 
specimens on their native stamping grounds, and these descrip- 
tions make very entertaining reading. 

Tom the Ready; or. Up from the Lowest. By Randolph 

Hill. 12mo, cloth, price $1.00. 

This is a dramatic narrative of the unaided rise of a fearless, 
ambitious boy from the lowest round of foi tune’s ladder — the 
gate of the poorhouse — to wealth and the governorship of his 
native State. Thomas Seacomb begins life with a purpose. While 
yet a schoolboy he conceives and presents to the world the germ 
of the Overland Express Co. At the very outset of his career 
jealousy and craft seek to blast his promising future. Later he 
sets out to obtain a charter for a railroad line in connection with 
the express business. Now he realizes what it is to match him- 
self against capital. Yet he wins and the railroad is built. Only 
an uncommon nature like Tom’s could successfully oppose such a 
combine. How he manages to win the battle is told by Mr. Hill 
id a masterful way that thrills the reader and holds his attention 
and sympathy to the end. 


A. L. BURT’S PUBIRCATIONS. 


19 


Roy Gilbert’s Search: A Tale of the Great Lakes. By Wm, P. 

Chipman. 12mo, cloth, price $1.00. 

A deep mystery bangs over the parentage of Roy Gilbert. 
He arranges with two schoolmates to make a tour of the 
Great Lakes on a steam launch. The three boys leave Erie on 
the launch and visit many points of interest on the lakes. Soon 
afterward the lad is conspicuous in the rescue of an elderly gentle- 
man and a lady from a .sinking yacht. Later on the cruise of the 
launch is brought to a disastrous termination and the boys nar- 
rowly escape with their lives. The hero is a manly, self-reliant 
boy, whose adventures will be followed with interest. 

The Young Scout; The Story of a West Point Lieutenant. By 
Edward S. Ellis. 12mo, cloth, price $1.00. 

The crafty Apache chief Geronimo but a few years ago was the 
most terrible scourge of the southwest border. The author has 
woven, in a tale of thrilling interest, all the incidents of Geronimo’s 
last raid. The hero is Lieutenant James Decker, a recent graduate 
of West Point. Ambitious to distinguish himself so as to win 
well-deserved promotion, the young man takes many a desperate 
chance against the enemy and on more than one occasion nar- 
rowly escapes with his life. The story naturally abounds in 
thrilling situations, and being historically correct, it is reasonable 
to believe it will find great favor with the boys. In our opinion 
Mr. Ellis is the best writer of Indian stories now before the 
public. 

Adrift in the Wilds : The Adventures of Two Shipwrecked 

Boys. By Edward S. Ellis. 12mo, cloth, price, $1.00. 

Elwood Brandon and Howard Lawrence, cousins and school- 
mates, accompanied by a lively Irishman called O’Rooney, are en 
route for San Francisco. Off the coast of California the steamer 
takes fire. The two boys and their companion reach the shore 
with several of the passengers. While O’Rooney and the lads 
are absent inspecting the neighborhood O’Rooney has an excit- 
ing experience and young Brandon becomes separated from his 
party. He is captured by hostile Indians, but is rescued by an 
Indian whom the lads had assisted. This is a very entertaining 
narrative of Southern California in the days immediately preced- 
ing the construction of the Pacific railroads. Mr. Ellis seems to 
be particularly happy in this line of fiction, and the present story 
is fully as entertaining as anything he has ever written. 

The Red Fairy Book. Edited by Andrew Lang. Profusely 

Illustrated, 12mo, cloth, price $1.00. 

“ A gift-book that will charm any child, and all older folk who have been 
fortunate enough to retain their taste for the old nursery stovies."— Literary 
World. 


I 


20 A. L. BURT’S PUBLICATIONS. 


The Boy Cruisers ; or, Paddling in Florida. By St, George 
Rathborne. 12mo, cloth, price, $1.00. 

Boys who like an admixture of sport and adventure will find 
this book just to their taste. We promise them that they will 
not go to sleep over the rattling experiences of Andrew George 
and Roland Carter, who start on a canoe trip along the Gulf 
coast, from Key West to Tampa, Florida. Their first adventure 
is with a pair of rascals who steal their boats. Next they run 
into a gale in the Gulf and have a lively experience while it lasts. 
After that they have a lively time with alligators and divers 
varieties of the finny tribe. Andrew gets into trouble with a 
band of Seminole Indians and gets away without having his 
scalp raised. After this there is no lack of fun till they 
reach their destination. That Mr. Rathborne knows just how to 
interest the boys is apparent at a glance, and lads who are in 
search of a rare treat will do well to read this entertaining story. 

Guy Harris : The Runaway. By Harry Castlemon. 12mo, 

cloth, price $1.00. 

Guy Harris lived in a small city on the shore of one of the 
Great Lakes. His head became filled with quixotic notions of 
going West to hunt grizzlies, in fact, Indians. He is ]ier- 
suaded to go to sea, and gets a glimpse of the rough side of life 
in a sailor’s I oarding house. He ships on a vessel and for five 
months leads a hard life. He deserts his ship at San Francisco 
and starts out to become a backw'oodsman, but rough experiences 
soon cure him of all desire to be a hunter. At St. Louis he be- 
comes a clerk and for a time he yields to the temptations of a 
great city. The book will not only interest boys generally on 
account of its graphic style, but will put many facts before their 
eyes in a new light. This is one of Castlemon’s most attractive 
stories. 

The Train Boy. By Horatio Alger, Jr. 12mo, cloth, price 

$ 1 . 00 . 

Paul Palmer was a wide-awake boy of sixteen who supported 
his mother and sister by selling books and papers on one of the 
trains running between Chicago and Milwaukee. He detects a 
young man named Luke Denton in the act of picking the pocket 
of a young lady, and also incurs the enmity of his brother Ste- 
phen, a worthless follow. Luke and Stephen plot to ruin Paul, 
but their plans are frustrated. In a railway accident many pas- 
sengers are killed, but Paul is fortunate enough to assist a C’hicago 
merchant, who out of gratitude takes him into his employ. Paul 
is sent to manage a mine in Custer City and executes his com- 
mission with tact and judgment and is well started on the road 
to business prominence. This is one of Mr. Alger’s most attrac' 
tive stories and is sure to please all readers. 


A. L. BURT’S PUBLICATIONS. 


31 


Joe’s Luck : A Boy’s Adventures in California. By Horatio 

Alger, Jr. 12mo, cloth, price $1.00. 

Without a doubt Joe Mason was a lucky boy, but he deserved 
the golden chances that fell to his lot, for he had the pluck and 
ambition to push himself to the front. Joe had but one dollar in 
the world when he stood despondently on the California Mail 
Steamship Co.’s dock in New York watching the preparations in- 
» ident to the departure of the steamer. The same dollar was 
still Joe’s entire capital when he landed in the bustling town of 
tents and one-story cabins — the San Francisco of ’51, and inside 
of the week the boy was proprietor of a small restaurant earning a 
comfortable profit. The story is chock full of stirring incidents, 
while the amusing situations are furnished by Joshua Bickford, 
from Pumpkin Hollow, and the fellow who modestly styles him- 
self the “Rip-tail Roarer, from Pike Co., Missouri.” Mr. Alger 
never writes a poor book, and “Joe’s Luck” is certainly one of 
his best. 

Three Bright Girls : A Story of Chance and Mischance. By 

Annie E. Armstrong. With full page Illustrations by W. 

Parkinson. 12mo, cloth, price $1.00. 

By a sudden turn of fortune’s wheel the three heroin es of this 
story are brought down from a household of lavish comfort to 
meet the incessant cares and worries of those who have to eke out 
a very limited income. And the charm of the story lies in the 
cheery helpfulness of spirit developed in the girls by their changed 
circumstances; while the author finds a pleasant ending to all 
their happy makeshifts. 

“ The story is charmingly told, and the book can be warmly recommended 
as a present for girls.”— Ntondarc?. 

Giannetta : A Girl’s Story of Herself. By Rosa Mulholland. 

With full-page Illustrations by Lockhart Bogle. 13mo, 

cloth, price $1.00. 

The daughter of a gentleman, who had married a poor Swiss 
girl, was stolen as an infant by some of her mother’s relatives. 
The child having died, they afterward for the sake of gain sub- 
stitute another child for it, and the changeling, after becoming 
a clever modeler of clay images, is suddenly transferred to the 
position of a rich heiress. She develops into a good and accom- 
plished woman, and though the imposture of her early friends is 
finally discovered, she has gained too much love and devotion to 
be really a sufferer by the surrender of her estates. 

“ Extremely well told and full of interest. Giannetta is a true heroine— 
warm-hearted, self-sacriflcing, and, as all good women nowadays are. largely- 
touched with enthusiasm of humanity. The illustrations are unusually good. 
One of the most attractive gift books of the season.”— T/ie Academy. 


22 


A. L. BURT’S PUBLICATIONS. 


Margery Merton’s Girlhood. By Alice Corkran. With full- 
page Illustrations by Gordon Browne. 12mo. cloth, price 
$ 1 . 00 . 

The experiences of an orphan girl who in infancy is left by her 
father — an officer in India — to the care of an elderly aunt residing 
near Paris. The accounts of the various persons who have an 
after influence on the story, the school companions of Margery, 
the sisters of the Conventual College of Art, the professor, and 
the peasantry of Fontainebleau, are singularly vivid. There is a 
subtle attraction about the book which will make it a great favorite 
with thoughtful girls. 

“ Another book for girls we can warmly commend. There is a delightful 
piquancy in the experiences and trials of a young English girl who studies 
painting in Paris ”— NafwcZay Review. 

Under False Colors: A Story from Two Girls’ Lives. By 
Sarah Doudney. With full-page Illustrations by G. G. Kil- 
BURNE. 12mo. cloth, price $1.00. 

A story which has in it so strong a dramatic element that it 
will attract readers of all ages and of either sex. The incidents 
of the plot, arising from the thoughtless indulgence of a decep- 
tive freak, are exceedingly natural, and the keen interest of the 
narrative is sustained from beginning to end. 

” Sarah Doudney has no superior as a writer of high-toned stories— pure 
in style, original in conception, and with skillfully wrought out plots; but 
we have seen nothing equal in dramatic energy to this hook.."— Christian 
.Leader. 

Down the Snow Stairs; or. From Good-night to Good-morning. 
By Alice Corkran. With Illustrations by Gordon Browne. 
12mo, cloth, price 75 cents. 

This is a remarkable story: full of vivid fancy and quaint 
originality. In its most fantastic imaginings it carries with it a 
sense of reality, and derives a singular attraction from that com- 
bination of simplicity, originality, and subtle humor, which is so 
much appreciated by lively and thoughtful children. Children 
of a larger growth will also be deeply interested in Kitty’s strange 
journey, and her wonderful experiences. 

“ Among all the Christmas volumes which the year has brought to our 
table this one stands out facile princeps—a, gem of the first water, bearing 
upon every one of its pages the signet mark of genius. ... All is told 
with such simplicity and perfect naturalness that the dream appears to be a 
solid reality. It is indeed a Little Pilgrim’s Progress.” —Christian Leader. 

The Tapestry Room; A Child’s Romance. By Mrs. Moles- 
WORTH. Illustrated by Walter Crane. 12mo, cloth, price 
75 cents. 

‘‘Mrs. Molesworth is a charming painter of the nature and ways of children; 
and she has done good service in giving us this charming juvenile which will 
delight the young people.” — Athencenm, London. 


A. L. BURT’S PUBTAOATTONS. 


23 


Little Miss Peggy : Only a Nursery Story. By Mrs. Moles- 
WORTH. Witli Illustrations by Walter Crane. 12mo, cloth, 
price 75 cents. 

Mrs. Molesworth’s children are finished studies. She is never 
sentimental, but writes common sense in a straightforward man- 
ner. A joyous earnest spirit pervades her work, and her sym- 
pathy is unbounded. She loves them with her whole heart, 
while she lays bare their little minds, and expresses their foibles, 
their faults, their virtues, their inward struggles, their concep- 
tion of duty, and their instinctive knowledge of the right and 
wrong of things. She knows their characters, she understands 
their wants, and she desires to help them. 

Polly: A New Fashioned Girl. By L. T. Meade. Illustrated 
12mo, cloth, price $1.00. 

Few authors have achieved a popularity equal to Mrs. Meade 
as a writer of stories for young girls. Her characters are living 
beings of flesh and blood, not lay figures of conventional type. 
Into the trials and crosses, and everyday experiences, the reader 
enters at once with zest and hearty sympathy. While Mrs. 
Meade always writes with a high moral purpose, her lessons of 
life, purity and nobility of character are rather inculcated by 
example than intruded as sermons. 

Rosy. By Mrs. Molesworth. Illustrated by Walter Crane. 
12mo, cloth, price 75 cents. 

Mrs. Molesworth, considering the quality and quantity of her 
labors, is the best story-teller for children England has yet 
known. This is a bold statement and requires substantiation. 
Mrs. Molesworth, during the last six years, has never failed to 
occupy a prominent place among the juvenile writers of the 
season. 

“ A very pretty story. . . . The writer knows children and their ways 
well. . . . The illustrations are exceedingly well drawn.”— /Sp«c^a^or. 

Little Sunshine’s Holiday: A Picture from Life. By Miss 
Mulock. Illustrated by Walter Crane. 12mo, cloth, price 
75 cents. 

“ This is a pretty narrativ^e of baby life, describing the simple doings and 
sayings of a very charming and rather precocious child nearly three years 
old.”— Pa?? Mall Gazette. 

“ Will be delightful to those who have nurseries peopled by ‘ Little Sun- 
shines ’ of their ornn.'^—Athenoeum,. 

Esther : A Book for Girls. By Rosa N. Carey. Illustrated, 
12mo, cloth, price $1.00. 

“ She inspires her readers simply by bringing them in contact with the 
characters, who are in themselves inspiring. Her simple stories are woven 
in order to give her an opportunity to describe her characters by their own 
conduct in seasons of trial.”— C/iicagfo Times. 


24 


A. L. BURT’S PUBLICATIONS. 


Sweet Content. By Mrs. Molesworth. Illustrated by W. 
Rainey. 12mo, cloth, price 75 cents. 

“ It seems to me not at all easier to draw a lifelike child than to draw a 
lifelike man or woman; Shakespeare and Webster were the only two men of 
their age who could do it with perfect delicacy and success. Our own age is 
more fortunate, on this single score at least, having a larger and far nobler 
proportion of female writers; among whom, since the death of George Eliot, 
there is none left whose touch is so exquisite and masterly, whose love is so 
thoroughly according to knowledge, whose bright and sweet invention is so 
fruitful, so truthful, or so delightful as Mrs. Molesworth.”— A. C. Swinburne. 

One of a Covey. By the Author of “Honor Bright,” “Miss 
Toosey’s Mission.” With Numerous Illustrations by H. J. A. 
Miles. 12mo, cloth, price 75 cents. 

“ Full of spirit and life, so well sustained throughout that grown-up readers 
may enjoy it as much as children. This ‘ Covey ’ consists of the twelve 
children of a hard-pressed Dr. Partridge, out of which is chosen a little girl 
to be adopted by a spoilt, fine lady. . . . It is one of the best books of the 
season. ’ ’ — Guardian. 

“ We have rarely read a story for boys and girls with greater pleasure. 
One of the chief characters would not have disgraced Dickens’ pen.”— 
Literary World. 

The Little Princess of Tower Hill. By L. T. Meade. Illus- 
trated, 12mo, cloth, price 75 cents. 

“ This is one of the prettiest books for children published, as pretty as a 
pond-lily, and quite as fragrant. Nothing could be imagined more attractive 
to young people than such a combination of fresh pages and fair pictures; 
and while children will rejoice over it — which is much better than crying for 
it— it is a book that can be read with pleasure even by older boys and girls.” 
— Boston Advertiser. 

Honor Bright ; or. The Four-Leaved Shamrock. By the Author 

of “One of a Covey,” “ Miss Toosey’s Mission,” etc., etc. 

With full-page Illustrations, 12mo, cloth, price $1.00. 

“ It requires a special talent to describe the sayings and doings of children, 
and the author of ‘ Honor Bright,’ ‘ One of a Covey,’ possesses that talent 
in no small degree.” — Literary Churchman. 

‘‘A cheery, sensible, and healthy tale.”— T/ie Times. 

The Cuckoo Clock. By Mrs. Molesworth. With Illustra- 
tions by Walter Crane. 12mo, cloth, price 75 cents. 

“ A beautiful little story. It will be read with delight by every child into 
whose hands it is placed. . . . The author deserves all the praise that has 
been, is, and will be bestowed on ‘ The Cuckoo Clock.’ Children’s stories are 
plentiful, but one like this is not to be met with every day.”— AiZi Mall 
Gazette. 

Girl Neighbors; or. The Old Fashion and the New. By Sarah 
Tytler. With full-page Illustrations by C. T. Garland. 
12mo, cloth, price 75 cents. 

“ One of the most effective and quietly humorous of Miss Tytler’s stories. 
‘ Girl Neighbors ’ is a pleasant comedy, not so much of errors as of preju- 
dices got rid of, very healthy, very agreeable, and very well written.” — 
Spectator. 


A. L. BURT’S PUBLICATIONS. 


25 


The Little Lame Prince. By Miss Mulock. Illustrated, 
cloth, price 75 cents. 

“No sweeter— that is the proper word— Christmas story for the little folks 
could easily be found, and it is as delightful for older readers as well. There 
is a moral to it which the reader can find out for himself, if he chooses to 
think.”— fleraZd, Cleveland. 

The Adventures ’of a Brownie. As Told to my Child. By 
Miss Mulock. Illustrated, 12mo, cloth, price 75 cents. 

“ The author of this delightful little book leaves it in doubt all through 
whether there actually is such a creature in existence as a Brownie, but she 
makes us hope that there might be.” — Standard, Chicago. 

Only a Girl : A Story of a Quiet Life. A Tale of Brittany. 
Adapted from the the French by C. A. Jones. Illustrated, 
12mo, cloth, price $1.00. 

“ We can thoroughly recommend this brightly written and homely narra- 
rative.” — Saturday Review. 

Little Rosebud ; or, Thiuj^s Will Take a Turn. By Beatrice 

Harraden. Illustrated, 12mo, cloth, price 75 cents. 

“ A most delightful little book. . . . Miss Harraden is so bright, so 
healthy, and so natural withal that the book ought, as a matter of duty, to 
be added to every girl’s library in the land.”— Boston Transcript. 

Little Miss Joy. By Emma Marshall. Illustrated, 12mo, 

cloth, price 75 cents. 

“ A very pleasant and instructive story, told by a very charming writer in 
such an attractive way as to win favor among its young readers. The illus- 
trations add to the beauty of the book.”— UtZca Herald. 

Little Lucy’s Wonderful Globe. By Charlotte M. Yonge. 

Illustrated, 12mo, cloth, price 75 cents. 

“ This story is unique among tales intended for children, alike for pleasant 
instruction, quaintness of humor, gentle pathos, and the subtlety with which 
lessons moral and otherwise are conveyed to children, and perhaps to their 
seniors as well.”— TZie Spectator. 

Joan’s Adventures at the North Pole and Elsewhere. By 

Alice Corkran. Illustrated, 12mo, cloth, price 75 cents. 

“ Wonderful as the adventures of Joan are, it must be admitted that they 
are very naturally worked out and very plausibly presented. Altogether 
this is an excellent story for Saturday Revietv. ^ 

Count Up the Sunny Days : A Story for Boys and Girls. By 
C. A. Jones. With full-page Illustrations, 12mo, cloth, price 
75 cents. 

“ An unusually good children’s story."— Glasgow Herald. 

Sue and I. By Mrs. O’Reilly. Illustrated, 12mo, cloth, price 
75 cents. 

“A thoroughly delightful book, full of sound wisdom as well as fun.’* — 
Athenaeum. 


26 


A. L. BURT’S PUBLICATIONS. 


Alice’s Adventures in Wonderland. By Lewis Carroll. 
With 42 Illustrations by John Tenniel. 12mo, 'cloth, price 
75 cents. 

“From first to last, almost without exception, this story is delightfully 
droll, humorous and illustrated in harmony with the story.”— ATeu? York 
Express. 

Celtic Fairy Tales. Edited by Joseph Jacobs. Illustrated by 
J. D. Batten. 12mo, cloth, preic $1.00. 

“ A stock of delightful little narratives gathered chiefiy from the Celtic- 
speaking peasants of Ireland.”— Dat’Zj/ Telegraph. 

“A perfectly lovely book. And oh! the wonderful pictures inside. Get 
this book if you can; it is capital, all through.”— PaW Mall Budget. 

English Fairy Tales. Edited by Joseph Jacobs. Illustrated 
by J. D. Batten. 12mo, cloth, price $1.00. 

“The tales are simply delightful. No amount of description can do them 
justice. The only way is to read the book through from cover to cover.”— 
Magazine and Book Review, 

“The book is intended to correspond to ‘ Grimm’s Fairy Tales,’ and it must 
be allowed that its pages fairly rival in interest those of the well-known re- 
pository of folk-lore.” — Sydney Morning Herald. 

Indian Fairy Tales. Edited by Joseph Jacobs. Illustrated by 
J. D Batten. 12mo, clotb, price $1.00. 

“ Mr. Jacobs brings home to us in a clear and intelligible manner the enor- 
mous influence which ‘ Indian Fairy Tales ’ have had upon European litera- 
ture of the Mnd."— Gloucester Journal. 

“ The present combination will be welcomed not alone by the little ones for 
whom it is specially combined, but also by children of larger growth and 
added yeaxs."— Daily Telegraph. 

The Blue Fairy Book. Edited by Andrew Lang. Profusely 
Illustrated, 12mo, cloth, price $1.00. 

“The tales are simply delightful. No amount of description can do them 
justice. The only way is to read the book through from cover to cover.” — 
Magazine and Book Review. 

The Green Fairy Book. Edited by Andrew Lang. Profusely 
Illustrated, 12mo, cloth, price $1.00. 

“The most delightful book of fairy tales, taking form and contents to- 
gether, ever presented to children.”— E. S. Hartland, in Folk-Lore. 

The Yellow Fairy Book. Edited by Andrew Lang. Profusely 
Illustrated, 12ino, cloth, price $1.00. 

“ As a collection of fairy tales to delight children of all ages ranks second 
to none."— Daily Graphic (with illustrations). 

Through the Looking Glass, and What Alice Found There. 

By Lewis Carroll. With 50 Illustrations by John Tenniel. 

“ a delight alike to the young people and their elders, extremely funny 
both in text and illustrations.”— Poston Express. 


A. L. BURT’S PUBLICATIONS. 


27 


The Heir of Redclyffe. By Charlotte M. Yonge. Illustrated, 
12mo, cloth, price $1.00. 

“A narrative full of interest from first to last. It is told clearly and in a 
straightforward manner and arrests the attention of the reader at once, so 
that one feels afresh the unspeakable pathos of the story to the end.”^ 
London Graphic. 

The Dove in the Eagle’s Nest. By Charlotte M. Yonge. 
Illustrated, 12mo, cloth, price $1.00. 

“ Among all the modern writers we believe Miss Yonge first, not in genius, 
but in this, that she employs her great abilities for a high and noble purpose. 
We know of few modern writers whose works may be so safely commended 
as hers.” — Cleveland Times. 

A Sweet Girl Graduate. By L. T. Meade. Illustrated, 12mo, 
cloth, price $1.00. 

“ One of this popular author’s best. The characters are well imagined and 
drawn. The story moves with plenty of spirit and the interest does not flag 
until the end too quickly comes.” — Pi'ovidence Journal. 

The Palace Beautiful : A Story for Girls. By L. T. Meade. 
Illustrated, cloth, 12rao, price $1.00. 

“ A bright and interesting story. The many admirers of Mrs. L. T. Meade 
in this country will be delighted with the ‘ Palace Beautiful ’ for more reasons 
than one.” — New York Recorder. 

A World of Girls : The Story of a School. By L. T. Meade. 
Illustrated, 12m o, cloth, price $1.00. 

” One of those wholesome stories which it does one good to read. It will 
afford pure delight to her numerous readers.” — Boston Home Journal. 

The Lady of the Forest : A Story for Girls. By L. T. Meade. 
Illustrated, 12mo, cloth, price $1.00. 

‘‘This story is written in the author’s well-known, fresh and easy style. 
All girls fond of reading will be charmed by this well-written story. It is 
told with the author’s customary grace and spirit.”— Boston Times. 

At the Back of the North Wind. By George Macdonald. 

Illustrated by George Groves, 12mo, cloth, price $1.00. 

‘‘A very pretty story, with much of the freshness and vigor of Mr. Mac- 
donald’s earlier work. . . . It is a sweet, earnest, and wholesome fairy 
story, and the quaint native humor is delightful. A most delightful volume 
for young readers.” — Philadelphia Times. 

The Water Babies : A Fairy Tale for a Land Baby. By Charles 

Kingsley. Illustrated, 12rao, cloth, price $1.00. 

‘‘ The strength of his work, as well as its peculiar charms, consist in his 
description of the experiences of a youth with life under water in the luxu- 
riant wealth of which he revels with all the ardor of a poetical nature.”— 
New York Tribune. 


THE LITTLE MEN SERIES. 


Uniform Cloth Binding. Profusely 
Illustrated. 

PRICE 75 CENTS PER COPY.» 

This series of boys’ books have been selected 
from the writings of a large number of popular 
authors of juvenile stories, and are particularly 
adapted to interest and supply attractive reading 
for youDg boys. The books are profusely illus- 
trated, and any one seeking to find a book to gi" e 
a young boy cannot make a mistake by selecting 
from the following list of titles. 



Black Beauty. The Autobiography of a Horse. By Anna Sewell. Illus- 
trated, cloth, price 75 cents. 

Carrots: Just a Little Boy. By Mrs. Molesworth. Illustrated, cloth, 
price 75 cents. 

Chunk, Fuskey and Snout. A Story of Wild Pigs for Little People. 
By Gerald Young. Illustrated, cloth, price 75 cents. 

Daddy’s Boy. By L. T. Meade. Illustrated, cloth, price 75 cents. 

Flat Iron for a Farthing, A. The Story of an Only Son. By Juliana 
Horatia Ewing. Illustrated, cloth, price 75 cents. 

Flock of Four, A. A Story for Boys and Girls. By Ismay Thorn, II- 
. lustrated, cloth, price 75 cents. 

Geoff and Jim. A Story of School Life. By Ismay Thorn. Illustrated, 
cloth, price 75 cents. 

Jack: A Topsy Turvy Story. By C. M. [Crawley-Boevey. Illustrated, 
cloth, price 75 cents. 

Jackanapes. By Juliana Horatia Ewing, Illustrated, cloth, price 75 
cents. 

Larry’s Luck. By the author of “ Miss Toosey’s Mission,” “ Tom’s Opin- 
ion.” Illustrated, cloth, price 75 cents. 

Little Ivan’s Hero. A Story of Child Life. By Helen Milman. Illus- 
trated, cloth, price 75 cents, 

Mopsa the Fairy. A Fairy Story for Boys. By Jean Ingelow. Illus- 
trated, cloth, price 75 cents. 

My Dog Plato: His Adventures and Impressions. By M. H, Cornwall 
Legh. Illustrated, cloth, price 75 cents. 

Peter the Pilgrim. The Story of a Boy and His Pet Rabbit. By L. T. 
Meade. Illustrated, cloth, price 75 cents. 

Prince Prigio, Adventures of. By Andrew Lang. Illustrated, cloth, 
price 75 cents. 

Robin’s Ride. A Story for Children. By Ellinor D. Adams. Illustrated, 
cloth, price 75 cents. 

Squib and His Friends. A Story for Children. By Ellen Everett 
Green. Illustrated, cloth, price 75 cents. 

Tom’s Opinion. The Story of a Boys’ School. By the author of “ Miss 
Toosey’s Mission.” Illustrated, cloth, price 75 cents. 

We and the World, A Story for Boys. By Juliana Horatia Ewing. 
Illustrated, cloth, price 75 cents. 

Wonder Book, A: For Boys and Girls. Comprising Stories of Classical 
Fables. By Nathaniel Hawthorne. Illustrated, cloth, price 75 cents. 


For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by the pub- 
lisher, A* L* BURT, 97 Reade Street, New York. 


THE LITTLE WOMEN 

Uniform Cloth Binding^. Profusely 
Illustrated. 

PRICE 75 CENTS PER COPY. 

A series of most delightful stories for young girls. 
Selected from the best known writers for children. 
These stories are narrated in a simple and lively 
fashion and cannot but prove irresistible with the 
little ones, while throughout the volumes there is a 
comprehension of and sympathy with child thought 
and feeling that is almost as rare out of books as in. 
These stories are sunny, interesting and thoroughly 
winsome and wholesome. 


Adventures of a Brownie, As Told to My Child. 

By Miss Mulock. Illustrated. Price 75 cents. 

Adventures in Toyland. What the Marionette Told Molly. By Edith 
King Hall. Illustrated, cloth, price 75 cents, 

Alice’s Adventures in Wonderland. By Lewis Carroll. With 42 Il- 
lustrations by John Tenniel. Cloth, price 75 cents. 

Birdie. A Tale of Child Life. By H. L. Childe-Pemberton. Illustrated, 
cloth, price 75 cents. 

Count Up the Sunny Days. A Story for Girls. By C. A. Jones. Illus- 
trated, cloth, price 75 cents. 

Cuckoo Clock, The. By Mrs. Molesworth. With 7 Illustrations by 
Walter Crane. Cloth, price 75 cents. 

Down the Snow Stairs; or. From Good Night to Good Morning. By 
Alice Corkran. With 60 Illustrations by Gordon Browne. Price 75c. 

Joan’s Adventures. At the North Pole and Elsewhere, By Alice 
Corkran. Illustrated, cloth, price 75 cents. 

Little Lame Prince, and His Traveling Cloak. By Miss Mulock. Illus- 
trated, cloth, price 75 cents. 

Little Lucy’s Wonderful GHobe. By Charlotte M. Yonge, Illus- 
trated, cloth, price 75 cents. 

Little Miss Joy. By Emma Marshall. Illustrated, cloth, price 75 cents. 

Little Miss Peggy. Only a Nursery Story. By Mrs. Molesworth. With 
13 Illustrations by Walter Crane. Cloth, price 75 cents. 

Little Princess of Tower Mill. By L. T. Meade. Illustrated, cloth, 
price 75 cents. 

Little Rosebud: or. Things Will Take a Turn. By Beatrice Harraden. 
Illustrated, cloth, price 75 cents. 

Little Sunshine’s Holiday. A Picture from Life. By Miss Mulock 
Illustrated, cloth, price 75 cents. 

Mixed Pickles. A Story for Girl‘=». By Mrs. E. M. Field. 111b trated, 
cloth, price 75 cents. 

One of a Covey. By the author of “Honor Bright.” With 19 Illustra“ 
tions by H. J. A. Miles. Cloth, price 75 cents. 

Rosy. By Mrs. Molesworth. With 8 Illustrations by Walter Crane, 
Cloth, price 75 cents. 

Sue and I. By Mrs. Robert O’Reilly. Illustrated, cloth, price 75 cents. 

Sweet Content. By Mrs. Molesworth. With 20 Illustrations by W. 
Rainey. Cloth, price 75 cents. 

Tapestry Room, The. By Mrs. Molesworth. Illustrated, cloth, price 

Through the Looking-Glass, and What Alice Found There. By Lewis 
Carroll. .With 50 Illustrations by John Tenniel. Cloth, price 75 cents. 


SERIES. 



For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price by the pub- 
lisher, A. L, BURT, 97 Reade Street, New York. 


The Fairy Library 

A series of books composed wholly of Fairy 
Stories, compiled and edited by various authors, 
comprising the fairy stories and folk tales of 
various people. Each volume profusely illus- 
trated and handsomely bound in cloth orna- 
mented in gold and colors. 


PRICE 31.00 PER VOLUME. 


The Red Fairy Booh, edited by 
Andrew Lang, with numerous illustra- 
tions by H. J. Ford and Lancelot Speed, 
clotb, price $1.00. 

The Blue Fairy Booh, edited by Andrew Lang, with 
numerous illustrations by H. J. Ford and G. P. Hood, clotb, prict 
$ 1 . 00 . 

The Green Fairy Booh, edited by Andrew Lang, with 
numerous illustrations by H. J. Ford, clotb, price $1.00. 

The Yellow Fairy Booh, edited by Andrew Lang, with 
numerous illustrations by H. J. Ford, clotb, price $1.00. 

Celtic Fairy Tales, edited by Joseph Jacobs, profusely 
illustrated by John D. Batten, clotb, price $1.00. 

English Fairy Tales, edited by Joseph Jacobs, profusely 
illustrated by John D. Batten, clotb, price $1.00. 

Indian Fairy Tales, edited by Joseph Jacobs, profusely 
illustrated by John D. Batten, clotb, price $1.00. 

Andersen^s Fairy Tales, by Hans Christian Ander- 
sen, with many illustrations by Cooper Edwards and others, clotb, 
price $1.00. 

Grimm’s Household Fairy Tales, by tbe Broth/^rs 
Grimm, with many illustrations by Walter Crane and others, 
cloth, price $1.00. 

Grimm’s Popular Fairy Tales, by the Brothers 
Grimm, with many illustrations by Walter Crane and otberf 
clotb, price $1.00. 



For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price 
bv the vnblisher, A, L, BURT, >7 Reade Street, New TorJc, 



‘f- 


I - ', V . I . k t 

f . • ■* K i . .■ 

• . .1 




I 

f 


y '^. 
1;’ ‘ 

5 ; ‘ 




9 . 


t ' 


-i,'’ '. >-y '■ 


flaLi^ 




f. 


9 i 





. • { y ’•■h’ . •• y • .. - ‘ 

’ 4 W > r • ■ « ■,...' 

>;v- "r 

.» ♦' ' ' • C r; ' ' ■ ‘-I - 

it ♦ 


« 

t , 






r a'* . 


' 


. - p 
)>. ' 


'•» ^ I. 


t . 




'••1 




•' '. *^ 1 1 "'*, 

•N • • ,' ■ . ^ » -A . . » ’ ^ A 

J ' *' • ' 

.-r r u. V . ^ k 



*’ f • kp 


* ^ ^ ' ■ 


,tf 'r:''‘f^ ’ 




/ ^ 


' ’»■ ^ * - 
• • ^ ■» » < • 


•i . 


t r 









:j^m\-.y m^y.: ■.■ -m 


.,;„,f .. ^ -'W;; -*,'''-'V"‘:- .i'vni; 

AT . ■# . . ‘ . t ’4 



/ 


:.- ■ <* 

’♦ > 

iX^’ *" 


■ ■ ' •’ • ' '• ' Vh<.. ' %: ■ ■ Ml 

: ^ . ■ - ■' . >? ■■ •• - 






V \ 


* / 

- *. 


t^^'- 

, *4 J 


* 
I « 


I >*y^ 


•-V • 

k;.ifii 




V ^ 



w> , 


■ ‘ 1 
\ 

( 


•f ' • • / 



K ‘ n \'-'' 


fk . 4 4 ^'' 


S’ •"-■ 

’. .' y v s * y • ' 




V ■ • 


LSiWRf . >” 7t Xv - » , , A ..• 




' * • . . '^ ' 


t > 









k ,- I 



"U 







' ■& : 




r -r. 



■ m • *»•..■'■<* 



A' 


n 


• y 



4 ‘j 


41 







,1 . ^ r 


• . ^ . 7 : ■ ^ .‘ ' ' ' 

. *. :' '. J :, -I, . 

' * ♦ % 4 ^ • - * 


V-/ ,'; 




«.» 


• \ 


:• i 


» 


( I 










» ' 

• 'Vr- 


*• • 



t 


if 





>•',<•*» * > , » • * 

r,vvA'- > ' . 



v< / . fc* V ; / 


V. >i' '■; ■ 

V ^ r 'i. ■ ,•' 


• 4 ^ 


,» ■ • i-, - 


' ‘ I 


.-• K, 


’. N , . -Vs/VV- 




Ti*; ■■ ; 


•» • 


• \ 


*!■ 





$. 


\ > 


- -i 


. * 7 * K/c 

• ■•. ^ JKl • ’ . 


f- 


1 ^ 



■r . .• • >; '-£. 

. ■ :i'.. ^ 






iV;.* V-^ 


A'l 


A '.•;. 


• ' ’ d •- ■ ; ■ 

I ' -y • • 1 


• ' ! * 


!>.* 


/• »' 


• i t. .. 



•t 


IV 


• 1 



. 




4 


,1 ■ V ,' ;■ 

•, ' ■ r. '7 ' j 

,m-^7 V ; Bf r ■■ 

' li. V . .'^* J- .’I * 


W<-:‘: 



' If- ‘, ^ 

.‘.;/ v: . V; 


f 


-■r. ?'4\‘ ‘-Ht 
V 






ku/f ^ 







V?. 


• .f 




• • 









' ■ 



^ I ' 

rt -* A ^ . ’ 

^ I •• • 

^'^ ; • ,■’ *■■ - 

?U -^ • ;■ . , » 

\ . » ' •* » -i . •• 


V', 


'-) 




^ .» •‘♦*i* ' ’ * j-v,'.'- .' .•Hn /!'• •' 

; ■ ■- ■ ' "' ’.’v-v ■I'A-.l 




{f: >•(!■*’- ■ 


7 '• ' ‘ 

‘ /, 


r • 




» k 


I * • 


* -u . . .» 

- 


tiv-7 



# •• 


^ A 


‘ I ' r ^ u ' • . ,*- 




V • ’ ‘ r. 

^ •' 


f ‘ 




f- ( 


:v"-T?L 


•r* ^ 


' *» *'• 


i f • 









> ' '- 


‘Y ■* ^ 
• . « 








m:. 









